Documentcentre C400/320/240 Series

DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series User Guide (Copier) This PDF file is best viewed using Acrobat® Reader 5 This equipment is certified by the Japan Electrical Safety & Environment Technology laboratories in compliance with IEC60950 (AS/NZS 3260). The equipment is manufactured under the ISO 9002 Quality System certified by the British Standards Institution. The equipment is also certified in compliance with applicable standards by various national bodies. The equipment was tested and is certified by the New Zealand Ministry of Commerce and the Australian Com- munications Authority in conformance with CISPR pub. 22 (1993) AS/NZS 3548 (1995), which relates to radio frequency interference regulations. Note:Machines intended for use in South Korea and Taiwan have been certified separately in compliance with the requirements. Any unauthorized alteration which includes the addition of new functions or the connection of external devices may impact this certification. Contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for a list of approved accessories.

Using the printer to print copies of bank notes or securities is illegal and punishable, regardless of whether they are being used.

Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT, Microsoft Network are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Novell, NetWare, IntranetWare, NDS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States. and other countries. Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, Postscript 3, and the PostScript logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Macintosh, Mac OS, TrueType are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Ltd. Solaris, Sun OS, and NIS (Network Information Services) are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Micosystems Inc. in the United States. PCL, HPGL, HPGL/2 are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation. All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders. Permission has been obtained from Microsoft Corporation for use of software screen shots. Our printer software uses some of the codes created by the Independent JPEG Group.

Saved data may be lost if hard disk of the machine breaks down due to external shocks or if the power is accidentally cut off in a manner not following the methods listed in manuals or other documentations. Fuji Xerox is not responsible for such data loss and any consequence caused by such data loss.

Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus.

Important

1 This guide is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this guide may not be copied or modified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher. 2 Parts of this guide are subject to change without prior notice. 3 We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages. 4 Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this guide. Unauthorized operation can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems resulting from unauthorized operation of the equipment.

Xerox, The Document Company and Ethernet are registered trademarks. DocuWorks and CentreWare are trademarks. Preface

Thank you for purchasing the Fuji Xerox DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series. This User Guide provides all the necessary operating procedures, maintenance information like how to clear paper jams, daily care, setting various items, and precautions. Please read this guide thoroughly to obtain the best performance on your machine. After reading this guide, be sure to keep it handy for quick reference. This guide will prove useful if you are unsure of particular operations or you encounter difficulties with the machine during use. For details about printing and scanning features, and how to set a network environment, refer to the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). For details about optional accessories in the printer kit package, also refer to the guide provided with each optional accessory. Also, for details on machines installed with the fax feature, refer to the User Guide (Facsimile). In this guide, DocumentCentre C400, C320 and C240 may be referred to as the Document- Centre C400/320/240 series. In this guide, precautions are indicated with the symbol . Always read and follow these instructions before carrying out the required procedure. Also, thoroughly read the Safety Notes provided in this guide.

As a member of the International Star Program, Fuji Xerox certifies that this product satisfies the Japanese requirements for International Star Program standards.

Fuji Xerox shares the global concern about environmental conservation and has integrated that concern in its business activities from research and development to disposal. We have implemented a number of programs to lessen the burden on the environment through totally eliminating ozone-deplet- ing chlorofluorocarbons from our manufacturing facilities. We are committed to leadership in the conservation of resources by reusing and recycling post-consumer waste material such as paper, consumables such as cartridges and parts from copiers and printers of our customers. Along with our efforts to make environmental values a part of the Fuji Xerox culture, DocumentCentre C400/320/240 adopts recycled components that satisfy our strict quality standards.

About reception interference If you notice flickering or distorted images or noises on your audio-visual units, your machine may be causing radio interference. Switch it off immediately. If this interference disappears, the machine is the cause of the interference. Perform the following procedure until the interference is corrected. Reposition or re-orient the machine and the TV and/or radio. Move the machine and the TV and/or radio away from each other. Unplug the machine, TV and/or radio, and replug them into outlets that operate on different circuits. Reorient the TV and/or radio antennas and cables until the interference stops. (For an outdoor antenna, ask your local electrician for support.) Use coaxial cable antennas.

This equipment is certified as a Class 1 laser product under IEC60825. This means that the machine does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within the protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.

This equipment complies with the guidelines set forth by the Japan Business Machine Makers Association on the harmonic affects by copiers and other reproduction devices in accordance with the guidelines on the harmonic suppressors of electronic appliances and general-purpose machines.

i Features in Brief

The following shows a list of samples made using the copy features of this machine. The illustrations used in these samples have been modified slightly to simplify explanations for these copy features. Making one sided/two sided Making enlarged/reduced copies copies

A Report Report B

“3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/ “3.3 Making One sided/Two sided Copies - 2 Sided” Enlarge” (P. 306) in “Part 2 Copier” (P. 299) in “Part 2 Copier” Inserting blank sheets be- Sorting copies before output tween copied transparencies

A Report B A 3 2 Report 1 B A 3 2 A 1 A Report B 3 B 3 ReportReportB 3 2 2 2 1 1 1

“3.6 Sorting Copies Before Output - Output” “3.14 Inserting Blank Sheets Between Copied Transparencies (P. 324) in “Part 2 Copier” - Transparency Separators” (P. 357) in “Part 2 Copier” Making copies from a bound Making two sided copies from document onto separate sheets a bound document

A C Report B D

No.1

A Blank sheet B No.1

“3.12 Making Copies From a Bound Document Onto Separate “3.25 Making Two sided Copies From a Bound Doc- Sheets - Bound Originals” (P. 351) in “Part 2 Copier” ument - Book Duplex” (P. 391) in “Part 2 Copier” ii Stapling copies Scanning different size documents A A Report Report A A B B Report B ReportB 3 2 2 1 1 3

“3.7 Outputting to the Finisher Tray - Output/Sta- pling” (P. 327) in “Part 2 Copier” “3.11 Simultaneously Scanning Different Size Documents - Mixed Size Originals” (P. 346) in “Part 2 Copier” Specifying the document Copying two or four docu- scanning size ment onto one sheet

Question Question 1 1 2 Y 2

Answer 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 “3.10 Specifying the Document Scanning Size Before Making Copies - Original Size” (P. 343) in “Part 2 Copier” “3.13 Copying Multiple Documents Onto One Sheet - Multiple Up” (P. 354) in “Part 2 Copier”

Moving the position of images Erasing edges and shadows in the copy in the document

A A

B B

“3.8 Moving the Position of Images in the Copy - “3.9 Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Doc- Margin Shift” (P. 333) in “Part 2 Copier” ument - Border Erase” (P. 340) in “Part 2 Copier”

iii Selecting the original type Adjusting copy density and contrast

“3.16 Selecting the Original Type - Original Type” (P. 365) in “Part 2 Copier” “3.18 Adjusting Copy Density and Contrast - Lighter/ Making reversed copies of im- Darker/Contrast” (P. 371) in “Part 2 Copier” ages Making multiple copies on one sheet

“3.28 Making Reversed Copies of Images - Mirror Image/Negative Image” (P. 400) in “Part 2 Copier” “3.26 Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet - Repeat Adjusting the sharpness and Image” (P. 395) in “Part 2 Copier” saturation of images Automatically adjusting image quality

“3.19 Adjusting the Sharpness and Saturation of Images - Sharpness/Color Saturation” (P. 373) in “Part 2 Copier” “3.22 Selecting Image Quality - Image Quality Pre- sets” (P. 380) in “Part 2 Copier” iv Adjusting tone Adjusting color balance

“3.20 Adjusting Tone - Color Shift” (P. 375) in “3.21 Adjusting Color Balance - Color Balance” “Part 2 Copier” (P. 378) in “Part 2 Copier” Outputting a cover for copies Creating a booklet

A B A A Report A 4 B A ReportB B BReport 3 B 2 A B B 7 7 1 3 3 4 1 1 ReportB 3 3 3 2 1

“3.23 Outputting a Cover for Copies - Covers” “3.24 Creating a Booklet - Booklet Creation” (P. 382) in “Part 2 Copier” (P. 385) in “Part 2 Copier”

Making enlarged copies spread over multiple sheets

“3.27 Making Enlarged Copies Spread Over Multi- ple Sheets - Poster” (P. 398) in “Part 2 Copier”

v Contents

Preface ...... i Features in Brief ...... ii Contents ...... vi Related Guides ...... xiii Using This Guide ...... xiv Safety Notes ...... xvii The Objective of the International Energy Star Program ...... xxvii Illegal Copies ...... xxviii

Part 1 Hardware

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Copier

Chapter 2 Loading Paper

vi Chapter 3 Daily Care

3.1 Confirming Machine Status...... 42 3.2 Replacing Consumables...... 45 3.2.1 About Consumables/Maintenance Parts...... 45 3.2.2 Confirming the Status of Consumables...... 46 3.2.3 Replacing Toner Cartridges ...... 48 3.2.4 Replacing the Toner Collection Bottle B...... 51 3.2.5 Replacing Drum Cartridges A1, A2, A3, A4 ...... 55 3.2.6 Replacing the Staple Cartridge ...... 58 3.3 Cleaning the Copier ...... 62 3.3.1 Cleaning External Covers ...... 62 3.3.2 Cleaning Internal Components (Raster Output Scanners)...... 63 3.3.3 Cleaning the DADF and Document Glass...... 66 3.4 Executing Automatic Gradation Adjustment ...... 67

Chapter 4 Troubleshooting

4.1 Troubleshooting...... 72 4.2 Initial Checks ...... 73 4.3 Poor Print Quality...... 81 4.4 Confirming Error Information ...... 85 4.4.1 Printing Error History Reports...... 85 4.5 Paper Jams...... 86 4.5.1 Paper Jams at the Top Left Cover ...... 87 4.5.2 Paper Jams at the Left Center Cover ...... 89 4.5.3 Paper Jams at the Bottom Left Cover ...... 90 4.5.4 Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4 ...... 91 4.5.5 Paper Jams on the High Capacity Tray ...... 92 4.5.6 Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) ...... 94 4.5.7 Paper Jams on the Duplex Unit...... 95 4.5.8 Paper Jams on the Light Finisher...... 96 4.6 Document Jams...... 100 4.6.1 Document Jams in the Left Cover (Top)...... 100 4.6.2 Paper Jams on Document Tray and Document Glass Section...... 101 4.7 Stapler Faults...... 103

vii Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings

5.1 Overview of System Administration Mode ...... 108 5.2 Entering and Exiting the System Administration Mode...... 111 5.2.1 Entering the System Administration Mode...... 111 5.2.2 Exiting the System Administration Mode...... 112 5.2.3 Setting System Settings in the System Administration Mode ...... 113 5.3 Setting and Changing System Administrator’s Passwords ...... 117 5.3.1 Setting New Passwords ...... 117 5.3.2 Changing Passwords ...... 119 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)...... 122 5.4.1 Machine Clock/Timers...... 123 5.4.2 Setting Audio Tones ...... 125 5.4.3 Setting Screen Defaults ...... 126 5.4.4 Setting Paper Tray Attributes...... 127 5.4.5 Printing Priority...... 132 5.4.6 Image Quality/Auto Gradation Adjustment...... 133 5.4.7 Reports ...... 137 5.4.8 Initializing the Hard Disk (Diagnostics)...... 138 5.4.9 Migration to Sleep Mode and Offset Settings (Others) ...... 138 5.5 Copy Mode Settings ...... 139 5.5.1 Basic Copying Presets ...... 139 5.5.2 Copy Defaults...... 141 5.5.3 Copy Control ...... 153 5.5.4 Original Size Defaults...... 154 5.5.5 Reduce/Enlarge Presets ...... 155 5.5.6 Custom Colors ...... 156 5.6 Network Settings ...... 157 5.6.1 Port Settings...... 158 5.6.2 Protocol Settings...... 164 5.7 Print Mode Settings ...... 166 5.7.1 Allocate Memory ...... 167 5.7.2 Others (Print Mode Settings) ...... 170 5.8 Scan Mode Settings ...... 171 5.8.1 Basic Scanning Presets ...... 172 5.8.2 Scan Defaults...... 173 5.8.3 Scan Size Default...... 178 5.8.4 Output Size Default ...... 179 viii 5.8.5 Reduce/Enlarge Presets ...... 180 5.8.6 Others (Scan Mode Settings)...... 181 5.9 Registering/Changing Mailboxes ...... 184

Chapter 6 Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

6.1 Overview of the Totals Management Feature ...... 188 6.1.1 Authentication...... 189 6.1.2 Overview of Auditron Administration ...... 190 6.1.3 Managed Functions and Features...... 191 6.1.4 Starting Setting of Totals Management ...... 194 6.2 Confirming the Totals Management Feature...... 196 6.3 Registering/Confirming Account Data ...... 198 6.3.1 Setting the Password/Account Name...... 198 6.3.2 Setting Color Mode/Maximum Number ...... 201 6.3.3 Confirming the Total Number for Each Account ...... 203 6.4 Deleting/Resetting Total Data ...... 205 6.4.1 Deleting/Resetting Data by Account...... 205 6.4.2 Deleting the Data of All Accounts...... 207 6.4.3 System Administrator Confirmation of Total Number ...... 208 6.5 Confirming the Total Number of Copied/Printed Pages ...... 210 6.5.1 Confirming the Number of Copied/Printed Pages by Meters ...... 210 6.5.2 Confirming the Number of Copied/Printed Pages by Meter Reports .. 213 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists ...... 219 6.6.1 Types of Reports/Lists...... 219 6.6.2 Printing Reports/Lists...... 241

Chapter 7 Confirming Jobs

7.1 Overview of Job Confirmation Feature ...... 244 7.2 Confirming Jobs...... 245 7.2.1 Confirming Currently Executing Jobs...... 245 7.2.2 Changing the Print Priority ...... 246 7.2.3 Confirming Completed Jobs...... 247 7.2.4 Outputting/Deleting Secure Prints...... 248 7.2.5 Outputting Sample Prints ...... 252 7.2.6 Making Prints at a Specified Time...... 256 7.2.7 Deleting Stored Documents ...... 259 7.2.8 Forcibly Outputting Data Wait Documents ...... 262

ix Part 2 Copier

Chapter 1 Loading Documents

Chapter 2 Making Copies

Chapter 3 User Friendly Features

3.1 How to Switch the Screen Display...... 292 3.2 Selecting the Color to Copy - Output Color ...... 295 3.3 Making One sided/Two sided Copies - 2 Sided ...... 299 3.3.1 Making One sided Copies...... 299 3.3.2 Copying on Two Sides...... 301 3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge ...... 306 3.4.1 Making Copies at the Same Copy Ratio for the X and Y Directions ... 306 3.4.2 Making Copies at Independent Copy Ratios for the X and Y Directions ...... 311 3.4.3 Making Copies at Specified Dimensions in the X and Y Directions .... 313 3.5 Selecting the Paper to Use for Copying - Paper Supply ...... 317 3.5.1 Making Copies With the Paper Automatically Selected ...... 317 3.5.2 Making Copies on a Selected Paper Size...... 319 3.6 Sorting Copies Before Output - Output...... 324 3.7 Outputting to the Finisher Tray - Output/Stapling...... 327 3.7.1 Outputting to the Finisher Tray ...... 328 3.7.2 Stapling Copies...... 330 x 3.8 Moving the Position of Images in the Copy - Margin Shift ...... 333 3.9 Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document - Border Erase ...... 340 3.10 Specifying the Document Scanning Size Before Making Copies - Original Size343 3.11 Simultaneously Scanning Different Size Documents - Mixed Size Originals..... 346 3.12 Making Copies From a Bound Document Onto Separate Sheets - Bound Originals ...... 351 3.13 Copying Multiple Documents Onto One Sheet - Multiple Up...... 354 3.14 Inserting Blank Sheets Between Copied Transparencies - Transparency Separators...... 357 3.15 Making Copies With the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally - Image Rotation ...... 362 3.16 Selecting the Original Type - Original Type...... 365 3.17 Erasing the Background Color of Documents - Auto Exposure ...... 369 3.18 Adjusting Copy Density and Contrast - Lighter/Darker/Contrast...... 371 3.19 Adjusting the Sharpness and Saturation of Images - Sharpness/Color Saturation...... 373 3.20 Adjusting Tone - Color Shift ...... 375 3.21 Adjusting Color Balance - Color Balance...... 378 3.22 Selecting Image Quality - Image Quality Presets ...... 380 3.23 Outputting a Cover for Copies - Covers ...... 382 3.24 Creating a Booklet - Booklet Creation ...... 385 3.25 Making Two sided Copies From a Bound Document - Book Duplex...... 391 3.26 Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet - Repeat Image...... 395 3.27 Making Enlarged Copies Spread Over Multiple Sheets - Poster ...... 398 3.28 Making Reversed Copies of Images - Mirror Image/Negative Image ...... 400 3.29 Storing Frequently Used Setups - Stored Jobs...... 403 3.29.1 Storing Copy Setups to Stored Jobs ...... 403 3.29.2 Deleting Stored Jobs...... 405 3.29.3 Copying With Stored Jobs...... 407 3.30 Making Copies of Documents at Different Settings in a Single Operation - Build Job ...... 408 3.31 Specifying the Document Orientation - Original Orientation...... 417

Part 3 Appendix A Specifications...... 424 B Optional Accessories...... 432 C Cautions and Limitations ...... 433 D Possible Combinations of Features ...... 434

xi E Error Codes Displayed on the Display ...... 443 E.1 Error Code Tables ...... 443 E.2 About Other Errors...... 452

Index ...... 453

xii Related Guides

This section describes the guides provided for this machine.

Guides Supplied

We provide the following guides for optimum usage of this machine. User Guide (Copier) (this guide) This guide describes all the necessary steps for copying, clearing paper jams, daily care, setting the various items and safety information. User Guide (Printer/Scanner) This guide describes all the necessary steps for printing and scanning, setting the network environment, setting the various items, and troubleshooting. User Guide (Facsimile) This guide describes all the necessary steps for faxing and troubleshooting when faxing. This guide is provided with the DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series machine equipped with the fax function as well as with the Standard G3 Fax Kit (option). User Guide (PostScript® Kit) This guide describes how to install and use the software that is included in the PostScript Driver Library. It is included with the PostScript kit.

Guides for Optional Accessories Optional accessories are also available for this machine. User Guides are provided with the optional accessories exclusively for the DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series. These User Guides are referred to as “guides for optional accessories”. Guides for optional accessories are provided in two forms, printed or as On-line Help. Guides for optional accessories describe all the necessary steps for operating optional accessories and installing software.

xiii Using This Guide

This section describes the organization of this guide. This guide has been produced for people who operate the DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series of copiers on a regular daily basis. When reading this guide, read the chapter that is of particular relevance to the operation you are performing.

What You Need to Know

This guide assumes that the operator has a basic knowledge of the operating environment of the personal computer in use, networking environments, and how to operate a personal computer. For details about the environment of the personal computer in use, basic knowledge of networking environments, and how to operate a personal computer, refer to the User Guides provided with the personal computer, operating system, and network system.

Organization of This Guide

This guide consists of the following chapters.

Part 1 Hardware Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Copier This chapter describes basic information such as identifying the major components, how to switch the machine on and off, how to use the Touch Panel Dis- play, and how to set the power saver feature. Chapter 2 Loading Paper This chapter describes the types of paper that can be used on this machine, precautions when handling paper, and how to load paper in trays Chapter 3 Daily Care This chapter describes how to check machine states, replace consumables, clean the machine, and adjust gradation. Chapter 4 Troubleshooting This chapter describes what kind of actions should be taken to remedy poor print quality, and paper, document or staple jams.

xiv Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings This chapter describes how to enter and exit the System Administration Mode, how to set and change System Administrator’s passwords, operations in the default screen, and default settings. Chapter 6 Managing Totals and Outputting Reports This chapter describes how to register and check account data, delete and reset total data, manage and total the number of copies by account, and output reports and lists. Chapter 7 Confirming Jobs This chapter describes how to check, output or delete currently executing, queued or saved documents.

Part 2 Copier Chapter 1 Loading Documents This chapter describes the specifications of documents that can be used on this machine, precautions when handling documents, and how to load documents. Chapter 2 Making Copies This chapter describes basic copying operations and other nice-to-know applications such as copying on transparencies, heavy-stock paper and other special paper, and interrupt copy. Chapter 3 User Friendly Features This chapter describes operations in the Basic Copying, Advanced Features, Image Quality, and Other screens. All almost regular copy operations are described in this chapter.

Part 3 Appendix Appendix This appendix describes the specifications of this machine, optional accessories, cautions and limitations, possible combinations of features, and error codes displayed on the display.

xv Conventions

1 In this guide, host device refers to a personal computer or workstation and “Doc- umentCentre C400/320/240” refers to “Fuji Xerox DocumentCentre C400/320/ 240”. 2 The following icons are used in this guide. Indicates important information and must be read in detail. Indicates supplementary information. Indicates references used in this guide. Guide titles are noted without double quotes while specific sections such as “1.9.2 Disabling the Power Save Mode” are found within double quotes. 3 Special marks/characters used in this guide. “ ” : Double quotes indicate the following: Messages that appear in the touch panel display and computer screens. Characters to be entered. Feature names or buttons that are difficult to understand. Bold face : Bold face characters refer to selections made like options on the screen, hard or soft buttons, and keys from the keyboard. For example: Press ESC. 4 When a checkbox is checked, it indicates ON, otherwise it indicates OFF. 5 The item with the radio button checked is the selected item.

xvi Safety Notes

Read this section carefully before using the DocumentCentre 400/320/240 Series to ensure that you operate your machine safely. This section explains the graphic symbols used in this guide. is used to alert operators to an operating procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, may result in severe injury or loss of life. is used to alert operators to an operating procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, may result in safety hazards to per- sonnel or damage to the equipment. This symbol is used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure that requires close attention. Read and follow instructions carefully to ensure the task is accomplished safely. Heated surface Flammable Electric shock Pinched fingers This symbol is used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure that must not be performed. Read instructions carefully and do Prohibited No fire Do not Do not not perform any procedures that are prohibited. tear down touch This symbol is used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure that must be emphasized in order to operate the machine safely. Read and follow instructions carefully. Instructions Unplug Ground/Earth

Installation and Relocation Cautions

Do not place the machine near heaters or volatile, flammable, or combustible materials such as curtains that may catch fire.

Do not place the machine in a hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environment. Pro- longed exposure to these adverse conditions can cause fire or electric shocks.

Place the machine on a level and sturdy surface that can withstand a weight of 215kg. If tilted, the machine may fall over and cause injuries.

xvii The machine has ventilation holes. Ensure that the machine is installed with a minimum clearance of 100mm from the rear vent to the wall. A poorly ventilated machine can cause excessive internal heat and fire. The accompanying diagrams show the minimum clear- ances required for normal operation, consumables replacement and maintenance to ensure your machine operates at peak performance. Your Xerox representative will provide necessary support for the proper installation of the machine.

Without DADF With DADF 100 100

780 780

1705 1705

425 425

50967 50 501361 50 400 400

1067 (unit : mm) 1461 (unit : mm)

With staple finisher (option) and side tray (option)

100

780

1705

305 425

50 2117 50 400

(unit : mm) 2217

xviii When relocating the machine, contact our Customer Support Center.

When moving the machine, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the machine is moved with the power cord attached, it can cause damage to the cord which could result in fire or electric shock.

When moving the machine, do not tilt it more than 10 degrees. If tilted excessively, the machine may fall over and cause injuries.

Front Rear Front Left Right Right Rear Left 10° 10° 10° 10°

When the machine is installed, be sure to lock the caster stoppers. An unlocked machine may fall over or slide and cause injuries.

This machine is capable of operating normally within the following recommended environmental limits. Temperature range 10 - 32 °C Humidity range 15 - 85% (no condensation) Humidity should be 47.5% or below at 35°C, and temperature should be 28°C or below at 85% humidity.

Sudden temperature fluctuations can affect copy quality. Rapid heating of a cold room can cause condensation inside the machine, directly interfering with image transfer.

Do not expose the machine to direct sunlight. Exposure to direct sunlight can adversely affect the machine’s performance. If the Ethernet cable is directly connected to the outside, lightning strikes may cause the machine to malfunction. Internal Ethernet cable connections only are allowed.

xix Power and Earth Connection Cautions

The power specifications are listed below. Connect the power plug only to a properly rated power outlet. Otherwise, it can cause fire or electric shocks. If in doubt, contact our Cus- tomer Support Center. Rated voltage 220-240 V Rated frequency 50/60 Hz Ensure that the plug connection is free of dust. In a damp environment, a contaminated connector can draw a non-negligible amount of current that can generate heat and eventu- ally cause fire over an extended period of time.

Always use the power cord provided with your machine. When an extension power cord is required, always use a properly rated cord. In Japan: “125 V/15 A” In other countries: Contact our Customer Support Center. If you use a cord with an unspecified current rating, the machine or plug may emit smoke or become hot to the touch externally. Do not attempt to rework, pull, bend, chafe or otherwise damage the power cord. Do not place a heavy object on the cord. A damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks.

Never touch a power cord with wet hands. Danger of electric shock exists.

If the power cord is broken or insulated wires are exposed, contact our Customer Support Center for a replacement. Using a damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks.

Stop operation immediately if your machine produces smoke, excessive heat, unusual noise, or smell, or if water is spilt onto the machine. These conditions can cause fire. Immediately switch off and unplug the machine, and contact our Customer Support Center.

To prevent fire or electric shocks, follow the instruction below based on your machine configuration. If in doubt, contact our Customer Support Center. If your machine is a 220-240 V model, there is no need to attach a separate earth line since the earth connection is incorporated in the power line. Plug it into a properly rated outlet. If your machine is a 100 or 110 V model, use the green earth wire bundled with the power cord, located at the rear of the machine. The earth wire must be connected to one of the following conductors: - Earth terminal of the specified power outlet - A piece of copper buried in the earth 650 mm or deeper - Earth terminal with Class D* earthing. *Class D is the regulation for Japan only. Never connect the earth wire to any of the following: Gas pipe, which can be ignited and explode Telephone line earth wire or lightning rod, which can draw an excessive electric current if hit by lightning Water faucet or pipe whose electrical conductivity is broken by a non-metal part xx Do not unplug or replug the machine while it is on. Unplugging a live connector can deform the plug and cause fire.

When unplugging the machine, grasp the plug instead of the cord. Forcibly pulling on a cord can damage it and cause fire or electric shock.

The machine has a circuit breaker. In the event of a current leakage, the breaker will automatically cut off the power circuit to prevent any leakage or fire from occurring. The breaker is normally On (“l”). Once a month, check the breaker for correct operation. Also, make sure that it is earthed. If not, the breaker cannot detect the current leakage which can cause electric shock. Check the breaker by using the following procedure. If you notice any unusual conditions, contact our Customer Support Center.

1. Turn the machine Off. 2. Push in the breaker’s reset button. The reset button stays pressed in when you take your finger away from the button. 3. Lightly press the Test button with the tip of a ball-pen or other fine-tipped object. The reset button is released and springs back out. This completes the check. 4. Press the reset button again to press in the button.

Power switch

Reset button Test button

When the machine is not used over an extended period of time, switch it off and unplug it. If an unused machine is left connected to a power source for a long period, degraded insula- tion can cause electric shocks, current leakage or fire.

Be sure to switch off and unplug the machine before accessing the interior of the machine for cleaning, maintenance or fault clearance. Access to a live machine’s interior can cause electric shock.

Be sure to switch off and unplug the machine before accessing the interior of the machine for accessing interface cables, maintenance or fault clearance. Access to a live machine’s interior can cause electric shock.

xxi Once a month, unplug the machine and check the power cord for the following. If you notice any unusual conditions, contact our Customer Support Center. The power cord is plugged firmly into a receptacle. The plug is not excessively heated, rusted, or bent. The plug and receptacle are free of dust. The cord is not cracked or frayed.

Others

The machine has a built-in circuit for protection against lightning-induced surge current. If lightning strikes in your neighborhood, switch off the machine. Disconnect the power cord from the machine and reconnect only when the lightning has stopped. If you notice flickering or distorted images or noises on your audio-visual units, your machine may be causing radio interference. Switch it off and if the interference disappears, the machine is the cause of the radio interference. Perform the following procedure until the interference is corrected. • Move the machine and the TV and/or radio away from each other. • Reposition or re-orientate the machine and the TV and/or radio. • Unplug the machine, TV and/or radio, and replug them into outlets that operate on different circuits. • Reorientate the TV and/or radio antennas and cables until the interference stops. For an outdoor antenna, ask your local electrician for support. • Use coaxial cable antennas.

Operating Safeguards

Do not place any liquid container such as a vase or coffee cup on the machine. Spilt water can cause fire or shock hazard.

Do not place any metal parts such as staples or clips on the machine. If metal and flammable parts get into the machine, they can short-circuit internal components, and cause fire or electric shocks.

If debris (metal or liquid) gets into the machine, switch off and unplug the machine. Contact our Customer Support Center. Operating a debris-contaminated machine can cause fire or electric shock.

Never open or remove machine covers that are screwed with screws unless specifically instructed in the “User Guide”. A high-voltage component can cause electric shocks.

xxii Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts. An unauthorized modifica- tion can cause smoke or fire.

This equipment is certified as a Class 1 laser product under IEC825 (1984). This means that the machine does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within the protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Do not perform any operation apart from the instructions given in the guide. There may be a danger of laser beam leakage.

Do not place a magnet near the safety switch of the machine. A magnet can activate the machine accidentally, resulting in injuries.

Do not use a highly flammable spray or solvent near the machine. It can cause fire.

When copying a thick document, do not use excessive force to press it against the document glass. The glass may break and cause injuries.

Never touch a labelled area found on or near the heat roller. You can get burnt. If a sheet of paper is wrapped around the heat roller, do not try to remove it yourself to avoid injuries or burns. Switch off the machine immediately, and contact our Customer Support Center.

Do not use conductive paper, e.g. folding paper, carbonic paper and coated paper. When a paper jam occurs, they can cause a short circuit and fire.

Do not place any heavy object on the machine. An off-balance machine can fall over or the heavy object can fall, causing injuries.

Keep the room ventilated when using the copier for a long period of time. If not, you can get a headache.

If you make copies with the document cover open, avoid looking directly at the copy lamp. Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or damage.

Do not place a heavy object or lean your elbows on the Touch Panel Display. The panel or display can break, and the broken glass can cause injuries.

When pulling out a paper tray, do it slowly. If pulled out with too much force, the tray can hit and injure your knees.

xxiii When removing jammed paper, make sure that no pieces of torn paper are left in the machine. A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire. If a sheet of paper is wrapped around the heat roller, or when clearing a jammed paper that is difficult or impossible to see, do not try to remove it by yourself. Doing so can cause injuries or burns. Switch off the machine immediately, and contact our Customer Support Center.

When removing the fuser cartridge, make sure that you switch off the power first and wait for 20 minutes before removing it.

Others

When clearing a paper jam or other fault, follow the appropriate procedure given in the User Guide. Consumables Safeguards

Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Toner remaining in the cartridge can cause an explosion and you can get burnt.

Never throw toner or a toner collection bottle or a toner cartridge into an open flame. It can cause an explosion and you can get burnt.

Keep button batteries out of the reach of children. If a button battery is swallowed accidentally, get medical treatment immediately.

Never heat the drum cartridge, or scratch its surface. A heated or scratched drum can be hazardous to your health.

Be sure to use the specified type of batteries only. Do not use new and old batteries together. If not, batteries can burst or leak, causing fire or injuries.

Ensure that batteries are installed with correct polarity. Incorrectly installed batteries can burst or leak, resulting in spillage or injuries.

xxiv Others

Do not unpack consumables before use. Store consumables in a cool, dry, and clean environment, away from an open flame, and out of direct exposure to sunlight. When using consumables, read and observe operating instructions and safeguards given on the package and container. Post-consumer toner cartridges and drum cartridges are recycled for resource conservation. –Handling instructions– Used toner cartridges and drum cartridges should be properly disposed of. Contact our Customer Support Center for disposal. Follow the instructions below in case of an emergency. • If toner gets into the eyes, rinse them with plenty of water until the pain subsides. Consult a doctor if necessary. • If toner adheres to your skin, wash it with soap and rinse with water thoroughly. • If you inhaled toner, exit the area immediately and gargle with plenty of water. • If you swallowed toner, induce vomiting and consult a doctor immediately.

Staple Finisher Safeguards

When removing jammed staples, take care not to injure your fingers.

When the staple finisher is operating, do not try to touch any of its moving parts as they can pinch or injure your fingers.

Never touch the safety switch. When the front cover is opened or when the staple finisher moves to the right and is detached from the main body, the safety switch turns the machine off. Do not try to bypass the safety switch by pressing it with a coin or screwdriver. The machine may start operating and may cause injuries.

xxv Positions of Warning and Caution Labels on This Machine

*This label is affixed to the front of the toner collection bottle when the cover is opened.

xxvi The Objective of the International Energy Star Program

To protect the global environment and conserve energy resources, the International Energy Star Pro- gram encourages the following product features. Fuji Xerox confirms that this product satisfies the requirements for this program.

Two sided copying feature

To reduce the volume of copy paper used, this machine is provided with the 2 Side Copy feature for coping to both sides of a sheet of paper. You can copy two single-sided originals on both sides of a sheet of paper. You can also make single-sided copies. See “3.3.2 Copy- ing on Two Sides” in “Part 2 Copier” of this guide (Copier) for details.

Power saving feature (Lower Power mode/ Sleep mode)

This product has a power saving feature which switches the machine to the Low Power mode automatically if the machine is on and not operated for a certain period of time. In this mode, the machine lowers the fuser temperature and saves power. The factory default Low Power mode start time is set at 15 minutes. This time can be set within 15 to 240 minutes in 1-minute increments. See “1.3 Power Saver Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of this guide (Copier) for details.

xxvii Illegal Copies

It is illegal to make copies of certain documents.

Copying certain documents may be illegal in your country. Penalties of fines or imprison- ment may be imposed on those found guilty. The following are examples of items that may be illegal to copy in your country.

Currency Banknotes and cheques Bank and government bonds and securities Passports and identification cards Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, contact your legal counsel.

Notice: This machine is provided with the recognition function to prevent the copying of currency. Also, in case currency or securities are copied, the forgery tracing function can identify a machine used for the copy. Note that the recognition function prevents a limited range of illegal copies. Always put your machine under careful charge to prevent illegal copies from being made.

xxviii Part 1 Hardware 1Getting to Know Your Copier

1.1 Main Components and Their Functions ...... 4 1.1.1 Main Body...... 4 1.1.2 Control Panel ...... 8 1.1.3 How to Use the Touch Panel Display...... 10 1.2 Switching on/off the Power...... 16 1.2.1 Switching On the Power...... 16 1.2.2 Switching Off the Power...... 17 1.2.3 About the Breaker (Clear All)...... 18 1.3 Power Saver Mode...... 19 1.3.1 Setting the Power Saver Feature ...... 19 1.3.2 Exiting the Power Saver Mode...... 23 1.4 Possible Combinations of Features...... 24 5 6 7 8 3 4 10 from here on.). ” 2 1 this machine this “ or ” See “1.1.2 Control Panel” (P. “1.1.2 Control Panel” See 8). sumables. High Capacity trays. 4. in trays 1 to be loaded cannot that media) special other and paper, after moving the machine to its installation site. the machine “ Main Components and and Components Main Functions Their Main Body 9

12 Document cover3 Document glass Control panel Holds the document down. Load documents here. PanelTouch Display. of operation buttons, indicators and the Consists 45(Output) tray output Center Copies and prints are delivered here facing down. 6 stopper Paper 7 switch Power Front cover8 Trays 1 to 4 Set upright for use when making copies or prints. 9Tray)(Bypass 5 Switches the power of the machine on/off. Tray Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to replace con- thick-stock (transparencies, paper non-standard loading for Used Load paper here for copying. Trays 3 and 4 can also be changed to 10casters Locking Used for locking the wheels of the machine. Lock these casters No. Name Functions

1.1.1 1.1 the functionsThis section describes the main of DocumentCentre C400/ components of the called 320/240 (simply

Getting to Know Your Copier

4 1 1.1 Main Components and Their Functions Getting to Know Your Copier

Left Side and Back

17 11 12 16

13 High Capacity Tray Model + Side 1 Output Tray 15 14

Tray 4* (High Capacity)

Tray 3* (High Capacity)

* For DocumentCentre C400/320 only

No. Name Functions 11 Top left cover Push up the unlock lever to access the inside of the machine to clear paper jams and replace consumables. 12 Duplex Unit cover Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to clear paper jams when the Duplex Unit is installed. 13 Left center cover Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to clear paper jams. 14 Bottom left cover Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to clear paper jams in the case of 2-tray cassettes or cassettes having more trays. 15 Clear all Press this button to automatically turn the machine off when a current leakage is detected. 16 Parallel interface connector Connect the Centronics interface cable to this connector to connect the machine to a personal computer. 17 10Base-T/100Base-TX Connect the interface cable to this connector. connector 18 Side Output Tray Copies and prints are delivered here facing up. The Side Output Tray is an optional accessory.

5 1.1 Main Components and Their Functions Getting to Know Your Copier

Internal Components

19 20

24 1 21 22

Duplex Automatic Document Feeder 23 25 26 27

29 28

No. Name Functions 19 Stopper Fastens the handle in place. 20 Toner cartridges Four toner (image forming powder) cartridges are provided, Black (K), Cyan (C), Magenta (M) and Yellow (Y). 21 Handle Press this down to unlock the stopper when replacing the drum cartridges. 22 Drum cartridges (A1, A2, A drum cartridge comprises photosensitive elements. Drum car- A3, A4) tridges are arranged in order A1, A2, A3 and A4 from the left as you face the main body. 23 Toner collection bottle Toner collection bottles (B) for collecting used toner are located on cover the other side of this cover. Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to replace the toner collection bottles. 24 Fuser unit (E) Fuses the printed image on the paper by fusing the toner. Do not touch this unit as it is extremely hot. 25 Confirmation indicator This indicator lights to confirm that the document is loaded correctly. 26 Document guide This guide is used to align the edges of the document. 27 Document feed tray Load documents here. 28 Document output tray Receives documents that are scanned. 29 Left cover Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to clear document jams.

Never touch an area indicated by a label High Temperature. You can get burnt.

In text descriptions, the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder is simply referred to as “DADF”.

6 1.1 Main Components and Their Functions Getting to Know Your Copier

Light Staple Finisher

1 2 7

3 1

4 5

No. Name Functions 1 Finisher top cover buttons When a paper jam occurs, press this button. This opens the finisher top cover so that you can clear the paper jam. 2 Stapler tray Stapled paper is delivered to this tray. 3 Front cover Open this cover to access the inside of the Light Staple Finisher to replace staples and clear staple jams. 4 Staple cartridge This cartridge contains staples. Remove this cartridge to replace staples and clear staple jams. 5 Stand This stand connects the finisher section to the main body. 6 Finisher interface top Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to clear paper cover jams. Before opening this cover, be sure to move the finisher to the right. 7 Center tray exit cover Open this cover to access the inside of the machine to clear paper jams.

In text descriptions, the Light Staple Finisher is simply referred to as Finisher.

7 1.1 Main Components and Their Functions Getting to Know Your Copier

1.1.2 Control Panel

The following describes the names and functions of components on the control panel.

For details about indications on the display, see “1.1.3 How to Use the Touch Panel Display” (P. 10). 1 For details on machines installed with the fax feature, see the User Guide (Facsimile). 1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 6

4 5 6 7 8 7 8 9

0 9

11 10

No. Name Functions 1 Brightness Adjustment Adjusts the brightness of the Touch Panel Display. Use this dial to Dial adjust the brightness of Touch Panel Display when it is too dark to read. 2 Touch Panel Display This display displays messages required for operation and buttons for various features. You can directly touch the Touch Panel Dis- play to instruct operations in screens and set features. 3 Job in Memory indicator This indicator lights when data is stored in the machine’s memory. 4 Online indicator This indicator lights when data is being received from a client. 5 Power Saver (On/Off) but- If the machine is not operated for a while, the machine’s power con- ton sumption is lowered to enter the Power Saver mode. In the Power Saver mode, this button is lit. To cancel the Power Saver mode, press this button again. In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the Power Saver button. 6 Clear All button Press this button to return the machine to its initial state. The machine will be reset to the state after it is turned on. In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the Clear All button. 7 Interrupt button/indicator Press this button to temporarily stop a continuous copy job or communications to give another job higher priority. During an interrupt, the Interrupt indicator is lit. Pressing the Interrupt button again cancels the interrupt and the previous operation is resumed. In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the Interrupt button. 8 Stop button Press this button to stop the current copy job or communications. In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the Stop button.

8 1.1 Main Components and Their Functions Getting to Know Your Copier

No. Name Functions 9 Start button Press this button to start copying or scanning. In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the Start button. 10 numeric keypad Press these buttons to enter the number of copies, passwords and other numerical values. In text descriptions, these buttons are indicated as the numeric keypad. 11 Clear button Press this button if you have entered the wrong numerical value on the numeric keypad. In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the Clear button. 1 About Control Panel Buttons In steps, buttons on the control panel are indicated as bold. We recommend remembering the following button names as they are used frequently in text descriptions.

1 2

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

4 3

No. Name Functions 1 Features buttons You can perform copy and scanner operations by pressing these buttons. Press the Features button to return to the copy, scanner and fax feature screens from the Features screen or Machine Status screen. The screen displayed at this time is the screen that was displayed before the Job Status screen or Machine Status screen was displayed. The screen does not change even if you press the Features button while in the copy, scanner or fax feature selection screens or if you are performing operations in the System Adminis- tration Mode. Use the Menu button to select copy, scanner and fax features. In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the Features button. 2 Password/System Set- Pressing this button displays the screen for entering the password tings button to enter the System Administration Mode or to enter account passwords when using the totals management feature. In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the Password/Sys- tem Settings button.

9 1.1 Main Components and Their Functions Getting to Know Your Copier

No. Name Functions 3 Job Status button Pressing this button allows you to confirm or cancel currently executing or completed jobs, or to confirm or print saved documents. In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the Job Status button. 4 Machine Status button Pressing this button allows you to confirm the machine status, meters and the state of consumables, and output reports. In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the Machine Status button. 1 1.1.3 How to Use the Touch Panel Display

The Touch Panel Display is located at the center of the control panel. Messages required for operation and feature buttons are displayed on this display. You can directly touch the buttons and tabs displayed in the Touch Panel Display to set features or to instruct operations in screens. This section describes how to select details displayed in screens and feature buttons in the mainly used screen. In text descriptions, the Touch Panel Display is simply referred to as the display for simplicity. Also, details displayed on the Dis- play are called the screen.

Some tabs and feature buttons are not displayed depending on whether or not optional accessories are installed, setup status and model.

10 1.1 Main Components and Their Functions Getting to Know Your Copier

Display (default screen) The Copy (Basic Copying) screen is the default screen that is displayed when the machine is turned on after shipment. Select the Menu button in the Copy screen. The Menu screen is displayed. Perform this operation if the Copy screen or Scanner screen is not displayed.

Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto 1 Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain More... More... More... More...

Menu Back:

Copy Scan Fax

The Menu button is displayed on machines installed with the scan or fax feature. The Fax button on the Menu screen is displayed on machines installed with the fax feature. For details about the fax feature, see the User Guide (Facsimile). You can change the default screen that is first displayed. For details about changing the default screen, see “5.4.3 Setting Screen Defaults” (P. 126).

11 1.1 Main Components and Their Functions Getting to Know Your Copier

Display (Copy screen) The following describes the names and functions of parts on the Touch Panel Display while referring to the Copy screen.

Message area Tab Remaining amount of memory

Copy Memory 100% Ready to copy. Quantity 1 Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Number of copies 1 Features Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11'' Plain More... More... More... More...

Selection buttons Message area Displays the machine status, operating instructions and other messages.

Tab Lightly touching a tab displays the Basic Copying, Added Features, Image Quality and Others menu screens.

Remaining copy memory Displays the remaining amount of memory. When making copies in the Memory mode, scanned documents are stored in internal memory before they are delivered.

To make copies in the Memory mode, 128 MB memory kit must be installed.

Number of copies Enter the number of copies on the numeric keypad. You can set any number of copies within the range 1 to 999. To return the number of copies to 1, press the Clear button.

Select button Lightly press with your finger to select the desired feature. When a desired feature is selected, the button will be highlighted, “...” following a button such as More... indicate that the feature has an additional setup screen.

12 1.1 Main Components and Their Functions Getting to Know Your Copier

Example of Feature Buttons

Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Margin Shift Border Erase Auto S1: No Shift : 2mm : 2mm Center Output Tray S2: No Shift : 0mm Original Size Mixed Size Originals Bound Originals Auto Size Detect Off Off Feature buttons

Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation 1 Up Off On during Auto Portrait Original-Left Entry field 1 Bound Originals Cancel Save

Off Center Erase Load originals as Both Pages below. Left Page then Right Left Page (0-50) Right Page Only then Left 0 mm Right Page Top Page Only then Bottom

Selection buttons Scroll buttons

Feature buttons Select the desired button to display the setup screen for that feature. When a feature is set, the setup mark ( ) is displayed and the set item(s) is displayed. Also, the button is displayed highlighted when the setup item button for a feature is selected.

Bound Originals Bound Originals Off Left Page then Right Both Pages Both Pages Both Pages

Scroll buttons, Input area Press to scroll the display to select numerical values or features. The available setting range is displayed in parentheses (). The numerical value that you set is displayed in the input area. (0-50) (0-50) 034mm mm

Unavailable buttons Items that cannot be selected due to unavailable combinations of features or buttons having a range that cannot be set are displayed in light gray .

Cancel button,Save button The Cancel button cancels features or numerical values specified on screen and closes the current screen. The Save button sets features or numerical values specified on screen and closes the current screen.

13 1.1 Main Components and Their Functions Getting to Know Your Copier

Error status display screen If a paper jam occurs or you are replacing consumables, and you continue making copies in this state, various trouble may occur. If this happens, a screen such as the one below is displayed. Cancel this error state by following the instructions in the on-screen message. When the error state is canceled, the screen returns to the screen that was active before the error occurred.

Paper Jam Close

1. Open the top cover on the left side of the printer and 1 remove the jammed sheet. 2. Close the cover.

XXX-XXX

Power Saver screen When the machine enters the Low Power mode or the Sleep mode, the display goes out, and the Power Saver button lights. To make copies, press the Power Saver button again.

For details about the Power Saver feature, see “1.3 Power Saver Mode” (P. 19).

If the display is dark even though the Power Saver button is not lit, a probable cause is that the machine is off or the Brightness Adjustment Dial is set to a dark setting. Turn the machine on or check the Brightness Adjustment Dial setting.

14 1.1 Main Components and Their Functions Getting to Know Your Copier

Password entry screen When the administrator’s password has been set, and you press the Password/ System Settings button, the System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed. The Enter Password screen is also displayed when the totals management feature is active. Enter the password when the System Administrator - Password Entry screen or the Password Entry screen is displayed. System Administrator - Password Entry Cancel 1 Password

Confirm

For details about the entering passwords, see “5.2 Entering and Exiting the System Administration Mode” (P. 111). For details on how to activate the totals management feature, see “6.2 Confirming the Totals Management Feature” (P. 196).

15 is in position | button Switching on/off the Power on/off Switching Switching On the Power Switching On the to turn the power on. to turn a reset state (button pressed in). a reset state (button pressed Press the power switch to the Press the power switch to Theprocedure the power for turning on is as follows. Make sure that the Clear All

2 1 Procedure For details about the Power Saver feature,Power see “1.3 Saver Mode”(P. 19). 1.2.1 When the power is turned off, all information stored to the machine’s memory will be erased. 1.2 Switch power on the before operating the The machine copier. is ready to make copies about 45 seconds after the switched power is on. Turn the copier day or when it is left unused off at the end of the for a long period of time. that with a Power Saver feature The copier is provided automatically cuts off the electricity while. for a left unused is to the machine it

Getting to Know Your Copier

16 1 1.2 Switching on/off the Power Getting to Know Your Copier

3 When the power turns on, the message “Please wait...” is displayed on the display.

Control ROM : XXX.X.XX Please wait... Frame ROM : XXX.X.XX

The “Please wait...” message indicates that the machine is warming up. The machine cannot be used while it is warming up. After about 30 seconds, the machine becomes ready for use.

After a while, the Copy screen is dislayed.

Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11'' Plain More... More... More... More...

1.2.2 Switching Off the Power

The following describes the procedure for turning the power off.

When the power is turned off, all information stored to the machine’s memory will be erased.

Procedure

1 Before turning the power off, make sure that all copy or print jobs have completely finished. Also, make sure that the Online and Job in Mem- ory indicators are output.

Never turn the power off in the following instances: While data is being received While jobs are being printed While jobs are being copied While a scan is being executed

17 1.2 Switching on/off the Power Getting to Know Your Copier

2 Press the power switch to the position. This turns the power off.

Power off processing is performed internally on the machine for a while after the power switch is turned off. So, do not unplug the power cord from the power outlet immediately after turning the Power switch off. 1 Before you turn the power back on after turning it off, first make sure that the display has gone out.

1.2.3 About the Breaker (Clear All)

This machine is provided with a circuit Power switch breaker. In the event of a current leakage, the breaker will automatically cut off the power circuit to prevent any leakage or fire Clear All from occurring. Clear All is normally in a Test button pressed-in state as shown in the figure on the right. When the machine is to be left unused for a long period of time or is to be moved, lightly press the Test button with the tip of a ball-pen or other fine-tipped object to cancel the pressed-in state of the Clear All button.

Once a month, check the breaker for correct operation. Also, make sure that it is earthed. If not, the breaker cannot detect current leakage which can cause electric shock. If you notice any unusual conditions, contact our Customer Support Center.

The Clear All button automatically turns the power off when current leakage is detected. Normally, do not operate this button. Before you cancel the pressed-in state of the Clear All button, first make sure that the power switch is off.

For details about operating and inspecting the circuit breaker, see “Power and Earth Connections” CAUTION in “Safety Notes” (P. xxi).

18 Getting to Know Your Copier 1 19 Power Saver Mode Saver Power Setting the Power Saver Feature Setting the Power Set the time up to the Low Power Mode within the range the 6 to 240 minutes and time up to the in 1-minute increments. 234 minutes the range 0 to Sleep Mode within Power Mode. - Low Sleep Mode is the Sleep mode to Mode Power the Low from time The

The procedure for setting the Power Saver feature is as follows. Power Saverfeature is as the The procedurefor setting To activate the Power Saver the Sleep Modefeature, set button to Enabled, and set the times up to migration to the Low Mode Power and migration to the Sleep Mode.

In this mode, the power is lowered more than in the Low Power mode. In this mode, the power is lowered more than Power the press the machine, To use panel lights. on the control Power Saver button the The display goes out, and is canceled. feature Saver that the Power to indicate goes out button saver Power The button. Saver In this mode, the power to the control panel and fuser unit is lowered to save power. and fuser unit is lowered to save In this mode, the power to the control panel Power the press the machine, To use panel lights. on the control Power Saver button the The display goes out, and is canceled. feature Saver that the Power to indicate goes out button saver Power The button. Saver Sleep mode consumption : 10W) (power Low Power mode Low Power mode (power consumption : 84W (when facsimile is installed : 87W)) 1.3.1 1.3 Saver feature thatautomatically cut off the elec- will with a Power installed This machine is a certain duration.unused for it is left if tricity to the machine The feature has Power Saver two a modes, Low Power mode and Sleep mode. The enters the Low Power mode aftermachine time has elapsed if the machine the preset is time. period of fixed for a left unused preseta further time elapses.the Sleep mode if enters The machine then 1.3 Power Saver Mode Getting to Know Your Copier

Procedure

1 Press Password/System Settings. The System Settings screen or System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed. The Pass- word Entry screen is also displayed when the totals management feature is active.

The System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed when an System Administrator’s password has been set. When the System Administrator’s password has not been set, and you press 1 Password/System Settings button, the Administrator-System Settings screen is displayed. When the System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed, enter the password referring to “5.2.1 Entering the System Administration Mode” (P. 111).

2 Select System Settings.

System Settings Close

System Settings Setup Menu System Administrator Password

Auditron Administration

The System Settings screen is displayed. 3 Select Common Settings.

System Settings Close

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings

Print Mode Settings Scan Mode Settings

The Common Settings screen is displayed.

20 1.3 Power Saver Mode Getting to Know Your Copier

4 Select Others.

Common Settings Close

Machine Clock/Timers Audio Tones Screen Defaults

Paper Tray Printing Priority Image Quality Attributes Adjustment

Reports Diagnostics Others

The Others screen is displayed. 1 5 Select 1. Sleep Mode, and select Change Settings.

Others Close Items Current Settings 1. Sleep Mode Disabled 2. Job Offset (Center Tray) Offset Per Set

Change Settings

The 1. Sleep Mode screen is displayed. 6 Select Enable, and select Save. 1. Sleep Mode Cancel Save

Enable

Disable

The screen returns to the Others screen, and the setting value of 1. Sleep Mode is displayed as Enable. 7 Select Close.

Others Close Items Current Settings 1. Sleep Mode Enabled 2. Job Offset (Center Tray) Offset Per Set

Change Settings

The screen returns to the Common Settings screen.

21 1.3 Power Saver Mode Getting to Know Your Copier

8 Select Machine Clock/Timers.

Common Settings Close

Machine Clock/Timers Audio Tones Screen Defaults

Paper Tray Printing Priority Image Quality Attributes Adjustment

Reports Diagnostics Others

1 The Machine Clock/Timers screen is displayed. 9 Select .

Machine Clock/Timers Close Items Current Settings 1. Date 2001/10/22 (Y/M/D) 2. Time 3:45 PM 3. Time Zone GMT +9:00 1/2 4. Daylight Savings Adjust Off Change 5. Auto Clear 60 Settings

The following page is displayed, and the 8. Auto Power Saver is selected. 10 Make sure that 8. Auto Power Saver is selected, and select Change Settings.

Machine Clock/Timers Close Items Current Settings 6. Auto Job Release 600 7. Auto Print 10 8. Auto Power Saver 15 mins.+ 45 mins. 2/2

Change Settings

The 8. Auto Power Saver screen is displayed.

11 Select the Auto Power Saver time by .

8. Auto Power Saver Cancel Save

From Last Selection From Low Power Mode to Low Power Mode to Sleep Mode

(6-240) (0-234) 15 mins. 45 mins.

22 1.3 Power Saver Mode Getting to Know Your Copier

From Last Selection to Low Power Mode Set the time to move to the Low Power Mode after the last operation.

The default for From Last Selection to Low Power Mode is 15 minutes. The Low Power Mode cannot be set to Disabled.

From Low Power Mode to Sleep Mode Set the time to move to the Sleep Mode from the Low Power Mode. 1 The default for From Low Power Mode to Sleep Mode is 45 minutes. 12 Select Save.

13 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settingsscreen is displayed. The screen returns to the System Settings screen. 14 Select Exit to exit the System Administration Mode. 1.3.2 Exiting the Power Saver Mode

The following describes how to exit the Power Saver mode.

The Power Saver mode is exited in the following instances: By pressing the Power Saver button By reception of print data

Procedure

1 Press Power Saver. The Power saver button goes out to indicate that the Power Saver feature is canceled.

23 Scan (retrieve from mail box)

Printer (receive)

Internet Fax send

FAX receive ∗ ∗

FAX send ∗ ∗

FAX/Internet Fax receive print

Printer (print)

Copy (print) ××× ××× ××× : Combined use OK : Combined use not OK installed Kit is Additional FAX G3 : ∗ Mail Scan ×

Store FAX/Internet Fax to memory

Scan (read by job template)

Scan (save to mail box)

Copy (read) ××××× ××××× ××××× ××××× ×××××

Possible Combinations of Combinations Possible Features

Desired Additional Feature Featuresin Use Scan (save to mailbox) This involves scanningdocuments and savingscanned datathe to copier’s mailbox. For details about saving to mailbox, see “Chaptersee mailbox, to saving about details For User the of Scanner” 2 “Part in Mailbox” With 3 Scanning (Printer/Scanner). Guide FAX receive Internet Fax send (receive) Printer from mail box) Scan (retrieve Mail Scan (print) Copy (print) Printer FAX/Internet Fax receive print FAX send Copy (read) Copy Scan (save to mail box) Scan (readjob by template) to memory Fax Store FAX/Internet 1.4 that can be processedfeatures This machine has simultaneously is while another feature being processed. Such features include using the document feed unit to scan copy docu- sendingand only, scanning for on the scanner scanning documents during printing, ments faxes. on However, depending the configuration of the machine, or the combination of it options unablemay be to process simultaneously. can be processed simulta- that possible combinations of features table below shows The neously.

Getting to Know Your Copier

24 1 1.4 Possible Combinations of Features Getting to Know Your Copier

Scan (read by job template) This involves scanning a document after specifying the file (job template) set with scanning conditions, information about the transfer destination server and other information.

For details about how to scan using job templates, see “Chapter 4 Scanning With CentreWare Scanning Ser- vices” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

Store FAX to memory This involves saving fax documents to the mailbox or reserve polling box.

For details about fax memory features, see “Chapter 8 Using Additional Features” of the User Guide (Facsim- 1 ile).

FAX receive print This involves printing fax documents received and saved to mailbox.

For details about fax receive print, see “Chapter 6 Receiving Jobs” (P. 61)” and “8.16 Checking/Printing/ Deleting Documents in Mailbox” of the User Guide (Facsimile).

Printer (receive) This involves receiving print data output from a software application on the machine.

For details about printing, see “Chapter 3 Basic Printing” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/ Scanner).

Scan (retrieve from mailbox) This involves uploading scanned documents saved to mailbox to a personal computer.

For details about uploading scanned documents saved to mailboxes, see “3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Com- puter” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

Mail Scan This involves carrying out scan of the document by the machine, and is simultaneously transmitted by mail.

Internet Fax This involves transmitting and receiving the data read with this machine as an attaching document of an E-mail.

25 2Loading Paper

2.1 Loading Paper...... 28 2.1.1 Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4 ...... 28 2.1.2 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) ...... 30 2.2 Changing the Size of Paper in Trays ...... 33 2.3 Changing Paper Settings ...... 35 2.4 Confirming Trays Set on the Machine ...... 40 MAX Maximum Full Line s performance, we recommend using only paper s performance, we ’ Loading Paper Loading Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4 Loading Paper in When pulling out the paper tray, do it out the When pulling with too much slowly. If pulled out force, the tray can hit and injure your knees. Load and align the edge of the paper against the left edge of the tray with the side to be copied or printed on facing up. line. fill the maximum not load paper exceeding Do or machine trouble. might cause paper jams Doing so Pull out the tray towards you until it Pull out the tray towards you stops. Following describes the procedure for loading paper in trays 1 to 4. amessage is When the machineof paper during copying or printing, runs out displayed on the control panel display. Add paper according to the displayed instructions. orCopying printing is automatically resumed when paper is added. For detailson changing paperthesize and orientation, “2.2 Changingsee the Size of PaperTrays” in (P. 33).

2 1 Procedure

2.1.1 2.1 Tray). in tray 5 (Bypass 4 and to to load paper in trays 1 describeshow Following For details about paperthat can be on used this machine, see the Paper Recommendations for details on paper types suitable for copying and loadind in each tray. Use of inappropriate print quality, malfunctionscausereduced other trouble. paper may resultin paper jams, and To make full and effect use of this machine Xerox. Fuji recommended by Support paper not recommendedIf you want to use Customer Fuji Xerox,by contact our Center.

Loading Paper

28 2 2.1 Loading Paper

3 Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop. Copying or printing is automatically resumed when paper is loaded correctly. Loading Paper

About Types of Paper Loaded in Trays 1 to 4 Plain paper, recycled paper and bond paper of G.S.M/ 64 to 105 g/m2 can be loaded in trays 1 to 4. The machine automatically detects the size and orientation of loaded paper. The paper type, however, must be set. Normally, plain paper is 2 set to each of the trays. When loading recycled paper or bond paper in trays, change the paper type setting. Plain paper, recycled paper and bond paper can also be named, and set as user-defined paper. Up to five paper types can be set as user-defined paper.

For details about changing the paper type in trays, see “ Paper Type” (P. 128) in “5.4.4 Setting Paper Tray Attributes”.

Auto Tray Switching If you set Paper Source on the Paper/Output tab to Auto in the PCL6 printer driver’s Properties screen when making prints, the machine automatically selects the corresponding paper tray according to the size and orientation of the document to print. This is called Automatic Tray Selection. When making copies, automatic tray selection is active if Auto is selected for both the paper type and ratio selection. If the machine judges that there are two or more corresponding trays in automatic tray selection, the machine gives higher priority to the tray having the highest Paper Type Priority set at Tray Paper Type. During automatic tray selection, trays whose Paper Type Selection setting is set to Off are not targeted in Automatic Tray Selection. Also, if the Paper Priority setting is exactly the same, automatic tray selection is determined by Tray Priority.

29 2.1 Loading Paper

For example Setting Paper Priority Document PPC paper 1st Recycled paper 1st High-grade paper Off Setting Tray Priority Custom 1 Off Custom 2 Off Tray 1 1st Custom 3 2nd Tray 2 2nd

Loading Paper Custom 4 Off Tray 3 3rd Custom 5 Off Tray 4 4th Apply Setting Recycled paper Tray Paper Type Recycled paper High-grade paper Tray 1 Recycled paper 1st Recycled paper PPC paper Tray 2 High-grade paper Off PPC paper Tray 3 PPC paper PPC paper 1st Tray 4 User paper 3 2nd

When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, select the tray containing the paper of 2 the same size and orientation that was being used for copying or printing, and continue copying or printing (Auto Tray Switch feature). During this operation, a tray containing paper of type whose Paper Priority setting is set to Off cannot be switched to.

For details on setting Paper Type, Paper Type Priority, Paper Tray Priority, and setting the paper substitute feature, see “5.4.4 Setting Paper Tray Attributes” (P. 127). The same settings can also be made from CentreWare Internet Services. See “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

2.1.2 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)

Use Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) to make copies or prints on paper of size or type that cannot be loaded in trays 1 to 4. The following describes how to load paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray). To make detailed instructions during printings, specify the instructions using the Tray/Output tab in the printer driver. When doing this, also specify the type of paper to load.

For details about printing, see “Chapter 3 Basic Printing” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). For details about copying, see “Chapter 2 Making Copies” (P. 275) in “Part 2 Copier”.

30 2.1 Loading Paper

Procedure

1 Open tray 5 (Bypass Tray).

If necessary, extend the extension flap. The extension 1 Loading Paper flap can be extended in two stages.

When pulling out the extension flap, do it gently.

2 Check the position of the paper guides 2 at the front side of tray 5 (Bypass Tray). Normally, set the paper guide to the Normal position.

If the paper guide is at the 12" (305 mm) position, return it to the Normal position, When making copies or prints on paper wider than A3 (297 mm) such as 12" x 18" paper, move the paper guides to accommodate the paper. For details about how to move the paper guides, see “ Moving the position of the paper guide” (P. 32). 3 Load paper with the side to be copied or printed on facing down, and insert the paper lightly along the paper guide on the front side of the machine until it comes to a stop.

Do not load mixed size paper into the tray. This may cause a paper jam. Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line. Doing so might cause paper jams or machine trouble.

When making copies or printing on thick-stock paper and the paper is not fed into the machine, apply a curl to the leading edge of the paper as shown in the figure on the right. Note, however, that excessively bending or folder the paper might cause paper jams.

31 2.1 Loading Paper

4 Lightly push the paper guide against the paper you loaded. Loading Paper

5 Select copying or printing. For details about making copies, see “2.1 Overview of Basic Copy Features” (P. 276) in “Part 2 Copier” of the User Guide (Copier). When making prints, select Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) at Select Paper 2 Tray on the Tray/Output tab, and select the paper type from Bypass Paper Type.

Moving the position of the paper guide When making copies or prints on paper wider than A3 (297 mm) such as 12" × 18" paper, move the paper guides to 12" (305 mm) position.

After you have finished making copies or prints, be sure to return the paper guides to the Normal position.

Procedure

1 Slide the paper guide on the front side of tray 5 (Bypass Tray) to the 12" (305 mm) position.

32 Loading Paper 2 33 Changing the Size of the Size Changing in Trays Paper

When pulling the do it When pulling tray, out paper much with too out If pulled slowly. force,can hit and injure your the tray knees. Move the paper guide in as far as possible while holding the grip on the paper guide lever on the inner side of the tray. Remove any paper if loaded on the tray. the Remove any paper if loaded on Pull out the tray towards you until it Pull out the tray towards stops.

3 2 1 Fordetails oncopyto how on non-standard seeMaking size paper, “2.4 Copieson Non-standard SizePaper” (P. 288) in “Part 2 Copier”. For details about printing on non-standard size paper, see “4.2 Printing Non-Stan- (Printer/Scanner). the Guide User 1 Printer” of dard Paper Size” in “Part Paper quality is already set to trays 1 to 4. Eight paper types, plain paper, bond paper, recycled paper, and paper, cus- recycled plain paper, bond paper, Paper quality is already set types, to 1 to 4. Eight paper trays tom paper 1 to 5, can be set as the paper quality. the setting plain paper is set. When changing Normally to a dif- high type of paper to be loaded to maintain quality settings to match the change the paper ferent paper quality, see “ about how to set the paper quality, print quality. For details Paper Tray Attributes”. Paper Type” (P. in “5.4.4 Setting 128)

Procedure 2.2 Following describes how to change the paper size on trays 1 to 4. or size print on non-standard make copies standard-sizeonly paper. To Trays 1 to 4 accept paper,5 (Bypass Tray). use tray 2.2 Changing the Size of Paper in Trays

4 Move the paper guide to the right while holding the grip on the paper guide lever on the right inside the tray. Loading Paper

5 Load and align the edge of the paper against the left front edge of the tray with the side to be copied or printed on 2 facing up.

Do not load mixed size paper into the tray. This may cause a paper jam. Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line. Doing so might cause paper jams or machine trouble. 6 Move the two paper guide levers while holding their grips so that they lightly contact the edges of the paper.

Exerting excessive pressure when aligning the paper levers against the edges of the paper might cause paper jams. Make sure that the paper guides fit flush into the holes on the scale. Otherwise, the paper size might not be automatically detected. In this case, slide the paper guides back and then re-align them with the scale. 7 Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop.

Affix the paper size label to the front of the paper tray.

8 After changing the paper size, set the paper type (plain paper, bond paper, recycled paper, custom paper 1 to 5) for the paper tray.

For details about how to set the paper type, see “2.3 Changing Paper Settings” (P. 35).

34 Loading Paper 2 35 Close Close System Administrator Password Network Settings . . Setup Menu Scan Mode Settings Copy Mode Settings . Changing Paper Settings Paper Changing Common Settings System Settings Common Settings Print Mode Settings System Settings Auditron Administration Password/System Settings System Settings System Settings The System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed when a System Administration Mode has been set. When the administrator’spassword hasandbeenyou notset, press the Pass- button, Settingsword/System the System Settings is displayed. screen When the System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed, enter the password, see (P. Mode” Administration System the Entering “5.2.1 111).

Select Select is displayed. The Common Settings screen Select Select screen is displayed. The System Settings Press Press Enter displayed. The is Entry screen - Password Administrator System or The System Settings screen active. is feature totals management Password screen is also displayed when the

3 2 1 Procedure

For details about how to set names to custom paper 1 to 5, see “names to custompaper 1 to 5, to set about how details For Attributes”. Tray Paper Name” (P.Paper Custom 127) in “5.4.4 Setting 2.3 andhow how to change thepaperFollowing describes set image size on trays 1 to 4 to quality processing by individual paper type. Eightpaper types, paper, plainpaper, bond recycled paper,paper and custom 1 to 5 can be set. For custom paper 1 to 5, the user assigns any name to plain paper, bond paper, and recycled paper. desired image the be obtained by setting can type suited to thepaper Imagequality best processing to particular paper types. 2.3 Changing Paper Settings

4 Select Paper Tray Attributes.

Common Settings Close

Machine Clock/Timers Audio Tones Screen Defaults

Loading Paper Paper Tray Printing Priority Image Quality Attributes Adjustment

Reports Diagnostics Others

The Paper Tray Attributes screen is displayed. 5 Select Paper Type. 2 Paper Tray Attributes Close

Custom Paper Name Paper Type Paper Tray Priority

Paper Type Priority Image Quality Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults

The Paper Type screen is displayed. 6 Select the paper tray whose paper type setting is to be changed at Items, and select Change Settings. The following example shows how to change the Tray 1.

Paper Type Close Items Current Settings 1. Tray 1 0 2. Tray 2 0 3. Tray 3 0 4. Tray 4 0 Change 5. Tray 5 (Bypass) 0 Settings

The 1. Tray 1 screen is displayed.

36 2.3 Changing Paper Settings

7 Enter the setting value of the paper type to be changed using numeric keypad, and select Save.

1. Tray 1 Cancel Save Loading Paper

Current Value : 0

New Value : 1

The screen returns to the Paper Type screen.

For details about how to set the paper type, see “ Paper Type” (P. 128) in “5.4.4 Setting Paper 2 Tray Attributes”. 8 Make sure that the Current Settings at the Items you changed is the newly entered value, and select Close.

Paper Type Close Items Current Settings 1. Tray 1 1 2. Tray 2 0 3. Tray 3 0 4. Tray 4 0 Change 5. Tray 5 (Bypass) 0 Settings

The screen returns to the Paper Tray Attributes screen. 9 Select Image Quality.

Paper Tray Attributes Close

Custom Paper Name Paper Type Paper Tray Priority

Paper Type Priority Image Quality Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults

The Image Quality screen is displayed.

37 2.3 Changing Paper Settings

10 Select the paper type whose image processing setting is to be changed at Items, and select Change Settings. The following example shows how to change Bond.

Image Quality Close Loading Paper Items Current Settings 1. Bond Paper 2 2. Plain Paper 2 3. Recycled Paper 4 1/2 4. Custom Paper 1 2 Change 5. Custom Paper 2 2 Settings 2 The 1. Bond screen is displayed. 11 Enter the setting value of the image quality processing to be changed using the numeric keypad, and select Save.

1. Bond Cancel Save

Current Value : 2

New Value : 1

The screen returns to the Image Quality screen.

For details about how to set image processing, see “ Image Quality” (P. 130) in “5.4.4 Setting Paper Tray Attributes”. 12 Make sure that the Current Settings at the Items you changed is the newly entered value, and select Close.

Image Quality Close Items Current Settings 1. Bond Paper 1 2. Plain Paper 2 3. Recycled Paper 4 1/2 4. Custom Paper 1 2 Change 5. Custom Paper 2 2 Settings

The screen returns to the Paper Tray Attributes screen.

38 2.3 Changing Paper Settings

13 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed. The screen returns to the System Settings screen. 14 Select Exit to exit the System Administration Mode. Loading Paper

39 . Close Close Print Mode On-line Paper Type Plain Plain Plain Plain Plain Faults A4 A3 A4 Paper Size Size Detect 8.5 11’’ Paper Tray Consumables . Balance 100% 25% 75% 50% in the Machine Status screen. Billing Meter/ Print Report Confirming Trays Set on Set on Trays Confirming Machine the Tray Status OK OK OK OK -- Paper Tray Machine Information Machine Status

Machine Status Paper Tray Items Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Tray 5 Tray status Remaining amount of paper Paper size Paper type When you have finished confirming the status, select Status screen. Machine to the returns screen The button. screen by pressing the Features the copy can return to You The Paper Tray screen is displayed. screen Tray Paper The in this screen. You can confirm the tray status Press is displayed. screen Machine Status The Select

4 3 2 1

Procedure 2.4 The trays set on the machine are displayed in a list Infor confirmation. this list, you can con- settings: and following statuses firm the

Loading Paper

40 2 3Daily Care

3.1 Confirming Machine Status...... 42 3.2 Replacing Consumables ...... 45 3.2.1 About Consumables/Maintenance Parts ...... 45 3.2.2 Confirming the Status of Consumables ...... 46 3.2.3 Replacing Toner Cartridges...... 48 3.2.4 Replacing the Toner Collection Bottle B ...... 51 3.2.5 Replacing Drum Cartridges A1, A2, A3, A4 ...... 55 3.2.6 Replacing the Staple Cartridge...... 58 3.3 Cleaning the Copier ...... 62 3.3.1 Cleaning External Covers ...... 62 3.3.2 Cleaning Internal Components (Raster Output Scanners) ...... 63 3.3.3 Cleaning the DADF and Document Glass ...... 66 3.4 Executing Automatic Gradation Adjustment...... 67 Confirming Machine 3.1 Status

Machine status can be confirmed on screen. The following items can be confirmed on screen:

Serial number Machine configuration Software version

Procedure Daily Care 1 Press Machine Status. The Machine Status screen is displayed. 2 Select Machine Information in the Machine Status screen. Billing Meter/ Machine Status Consumables Faults 3 Print Report

Machine Information Paper Tray Print Mode On-line

The Machine Information screen is displayed. 3 The Serial Number can be confirmed in this screen.

Machine Information Close

For enquiry on maintenance and operation Machine Configuration Refer to the card pasted on the machine or call your local Service Represantative. 79832133

Serial Number Software Version 017011968 XX. XX. XX

42 3.1 Confirming Machine Status

4 If necessary, check the machine configuration or software version. To check the machine configuration 1 Select Machine Configuration.

Machine Information Close

For enquiry on maintenance and operation Machine Configuration Refer to the card pasted on the machine or call your local Service Represantative. 79832133

Serial Number Software Version Daily Care 017011968 XX. XX. XX

The Machine Configuration screen is displayed. 2 Check the machine configuration using .

Machine Configuration Close

Items Contents 3 1. Configuration Code XXXXXXXX 2. Auto Document Feeder Available Page 3. Paper Tray 4 Trays (3-Tray Unit) 1/4 4. High Capacity Tray Unavailable 5. Side Output Tray Unavailable

The following items can be confirmed in the Machine Configuration screen:

Configuration Code Auto Document Feeder Paper Tray High Capacity Tray Side Output Tray Output Device Offset Output Module Duplex Module Hard Disk Page Memory Size System Memory Size PostScript, HP-GL/2 HP-GL/2 FAX Main Board FAX Extended Board 1 FAX Extended Board 2

Output Device refers to installation of the finisher (option). If the finisher is installed, Finisher is displayed.

43 3.1 Confirming Machine Status

To check the software version 1 Select Software Version.

Machine Information Close

For enquiry on maintenance and operation Machine Configuration Refer to the card pasted on the machine or call your local Service Represantative. 79832133

Serial Number Software Version 017011968 XX. XX. XX

Daily Care The Software Version screen is displayed. 2 Check the software version using .

Software Version Close

Items Contents 1. System Main ROM(Standard ROM) XX. XX. XX 2. UI Control ROM 3 XX. XX. XX Page 3. UI Frame ROM XX. XX. XX 1/2 4. Input Device ROM XX. XX. XX 5. Output ROM XX. XX. XX

The following items can be confirmed in the Software Version screen:

System Main ROM (Standard ROM) UI Control ROM UI Frame ROM Input ROM Output ROM Auto Document Feeder ROM Fax Main Board ROM Fax Extended Board 1 ROM Fax Extended Board 2 ROM

5 Select Close repeatedly until the screen returns to the Machine Status screen to exit this procedure.

You can return to the Copy screen by pressing the Features button.

44 3.2 Replacing Consumables

Following describes the various consumables for this machine, and how to handle and replace them. On this machine, you can confirm the status of consumables on screen.

3.2.1 About Consumables/Maintenance Parts

This machine is provided with the following consumables and maintenance parts: Daily Care

Types of Consumables/Maintenance Parts Ensure that the following consumables and maintenance parts are used as they have been made according to standards that match this machine’s specifications. Consumable/Maintenance Part Product code Qty/box 3 Toner cartridge Y CT200209 1/box Toner cartridge M CT200208 1/box Toner cartridge C CT200207 1/box Toner cartridge K CT200206 1/box Drum cartridge A1A2A3A4 CT350150 1/box Toner collection bottle B CWAA0485 1/box staple cartridge F CWAA0455 5000 staples × 3 sets/1 box

We recommend having a spare toner cartridge ready. When it is time to replace the Fuser Unit, Transfer Belt Cleaner, or Secondary Bias Roll, or Trans- fer Belt, contact our Customer Support Center.

45 3.2 Replacing Consumables

Handling Consumables/Maintenance Parts Do not store boxes for consumables/maintenance parts upright. Do not unpack consumables/maintenance parts before use. Avoid storing consumables/maintenance parts in the following locations: • Locations subject to high temperature and high humidity • Near a fire • In the direct sunlight • Dusty locations Follow the instructions and warning notes on the boxes or containers for the Daily Care consumables/maintenance parts before using them. We recommend having spare consumables/maintenance parts ready. Check the product code of the consumables/maintenance parts and contact our Customer Support Center to place your orders. Use of toner cartridges, toner collection bottles, or staple cartridges not recom- 3 mended by Xerox may effect print quality or impair machine performance. Use only toner cartridges, toner collection bottles and staple cartridges recommended by Xerox on this machine.

3.2.2 Confirming the Status of Consumables

The status of consumables can be confirmed in the Consumables screen. The status of consumables, for instance toner, is indicated by 0 to 100% to express an amount. The status of other consumables is indicated as “Good”, “Replace soon.”, “Replace now.” or other messages. The following describes the procedure for checking the status of consumables.

Procedure

1 Press Machine Status. The Machine Status screen is displayed.

46 3.2 Replacing Consumables

2 Select Consumables.

Billing Meter/ Machine Status Consumables Faults Print Report

Machine Information Paper Tray Print Mode On-line

The Consumables screen is displayed. Daily Care 3 Confirm the status of consumables. Billing Meter/ Consumables Faults Machine Status Print Report Consumables Status 1. Yellow Toner (Y) 0% 100% 2. Magenta Toner (M) 0% 100% Page 3 3. Cyan Toner (C) 0% 100% 1/3 4. Black Toner (K) 0% 100% 5. Yellow Drum Cartridge (A4) OK

The following items can be confirmed in the Consumables screen: The staple cartridge is displayed only when the finisher is installed.

Yellow Toner (Y) Magenta Toner (M) Cyan Toner (C) Black Toner (K) Yellow Drum Cartridge (A4) Magenta Drum Cartridge Cyan Drum Cartridge Black Drum Cartridge Waste Toner Container Fuser Cartridge Staple cartridge Transfer Belt Cleaner Secondary Bias Transfer Roll Transfer Belt

When a semi-used toner cartridge (e.g. toner cartridge removed from a different DocumentCentre C400/320/240 body) is used, the actual remaining amount of toner may differ from the indicated remaining amount of toner. We recommend using a new toner cartridge when replacing a used toner cartridge.

When it is time to replace the Fuser Cartridge, Transfer Belt Cleaner, or Secondary Bias Transfer Roll, or Transfer Belt, contact our Customer Support Center.

47 3.2 Replacing Consumables

3.2.3 Replacing Toner Cartridges

This machine is provided with toner cartridges in four colors, Yellow (Y), Magenta (M), Cyan (C), and Black (K), Each cartridge contains toner (image forming powder) of the corresponding color. Toner in these cartridges decreases slightly each time that a copy or print is made. When it is time to replace a toner cartridge, a message is displayed on the display. Confirm the position of the toner cartridge indicated on the display, and replace the toner cartridge of the corresponding color. Daily Care

When you continue to make copies using a new cartridge, and the message “Replace consumables soon.” is displayed. When copying or printing on a Xerox standard document, the standard life for a Yellow (Y), Magenta (M) or Cyan (C) cartridge is about 2,500 pages or about 3,500 pages for a Black (K) cartridge. The message “There is consumable requiring replacement.” will be displayed. 3 After this message is displayed, the machine will stop after a while, and copying or printing will no longer be possible.

Do not throw toner cartridges into an open fire. Toner remaining in the cartridge can cause an explosion and you can get burnt.

When replacing toner cartridges, toner may spill and dirty the floor. So, we recommend laying paper on the floor before replacing toner cartridges. Used toner cartridges require proper disposal. Return used toner cartridges to our Customer Sup- port Center. Use of toner cartridges not recommended by Xerox may prevent print quality or impair machine performance. Use only toner cartridges recommended by Xerox on this machine. When there is little toner remaining in a toner cartridge, the machine may stop during printing and display a message. If this happens, replace the toner cartridge for the indicated color to continue copying or printing. Toner cartridges can be replaced with the machine still on. When the power is turned off, all information stored to the machine’s memory will be erased.

After the message “Replace consumables soon.” is displayed, the copy or print density sometimes drops slightly. When a semi-used toner cartridge is used, and the message “Replace consumables soon.” is displayed, the amount of sheets that can be copied or printed sometimes differs considerably. The number of pages that can be printed is the number of pages when using A4 ( ). The number of pages that can be printed is only an estimate and varies depending on the content, paper size, variety, and the computer environment.

48 3.2 Replacing Consumables

Procedure

1 Make sure that the machine has stopped before opening the front cover. Daily Care

2 Turn the toner cartridge of the color indicated in the message to the left up to the key mark (open). 3 “Y” stands for Yellow, “M” for Magenta, “C” for Cyan, and “K” for Black.

3 Gently pull the toner cartridge towards you to remove.

Do not throw toner cartridges into an open fire. Toner remaining in the cartridge can cause an explosion and you can get burnt.

Pull out toner cartridges gently. Otherwise, toner may fly out of the cartridges. Return used toner cartridges to our Customer Support Center for disposal. 4 Prepare a new toner cartridge of the same color as the cartridge that you removed, and lightly shake the cartridge three or four times up and down to the left and right as shown in the figure on the right.

49 3.2 Replacing Consumables

5 Insert the toner cartridge as far as possible with the arrow (↑) on the cartridge facing up.

Daily Care 6 Turn the toner cartridge to the right up to the key mark (closed).

7 Close the front door.

A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover is even slightly open.

50 3.2 Replacing Consumables

3.2.4 Replacing the Toner Collection Bottle B

Toner remaining in the drum after copying or printing is collected and accumulated in the toner collection bottle. When the toner collection bottle fills up, a message is displayed on the display.

If you continue making copies or prints without replacing the toner collection bottle, a message is displayed, and the machine stops after copying or printing about 900 pages. When replacing the toner collection bottle, use the cleaning Daily Care rod packaged in the toner collection bottle box to clean the Raster Output Scan- ners (D1, D2, D3, and D4) to prevent uneven color density during copying or printing.

Never throw toner, a toner collection bottle or a toner cartridge into an open flame. It can cause an explosion and you can get burnt. 3

When replacing toner collection bottles, collected toner may spill and dirty the floor. So, we recommend laying paper on the floor before replacing toner collection bottles. Post-consumer toner collection bottles require disposal. Return used toner collection bottles to our Customer Support Center. Use of toner collection bottles not recommended by Xerox may effect print quality or impair machine performance. Use only toner collection bottles recommended by Xerox on this machine. Toner collection bottles can be replaced with the machine still on. When the power is turned off, all information stored to the machine’s memory will be erased.

The number of pages that can be printed is the number of pages when using A4 ( ). The number of pages that can be printed is only an estimate and varies depending on the content, paper size, variety, and the computer environment.

Procedure

1 Prepare a new toner collection bottle. Remove the new bottle, orange vinyl cap, and cleaning rod from the box.

51 3.2 Replacing Consumables

2 Make sure that the machine has stopped before opening the front cover.

Daily Care 3 Open the black cover on the front of the machine body (B) downwards by holding the orange knobs on the left and right. 3

4 Holding the center section of the toner collection bottle, pull the bottle out until it comes to a stop.

Place the toner collection bottle on the opened out black cover. Be careful when doing this as toner spills out of the toner collection bottle when it is placed at an angle.

5 Cover the top of the toner collection bottle with the vinyl cap (provided) to prevent toner from spilling out.

52 3.2 Replacing Consumables

6 Store the used toner collection bottle in the empty box holding it firmly with both hands.

Never throw toner, a toner collection bottle or a toner cartridge into an open flame. It can cause an explosion and you can get burnt. Daily Care

Return used toner cartridges to our Customer Support Center for disposal. 7 Gently insert the cleaning rod (provided) that you removed from the box into cleaning slots D1 to D4 (square holes) 3 with the pad facing down.

8 When the cleaning rod has gone in as far as possible, gently draw it out towards you. Clean each of the four locations.

It is almost impossible to see dirt on the pad.

9 Store used cleaning rods in the box together with the used toner collection bottle.

53 3.2 Replacing Consumables

10 Push the new toner collection bottle in as far as possible making sure that its center section is properly aligned.

Daily Care 11 Close the black cover by holding the orange knobs on the left and right.

12 Close the front door.

A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover is even slightly open.

54 3.2 Replacing Consumables

3.2.5 Replacing Drum Cartridges A1, A2, A3, A4

This machine is provided with four drum cartridges (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black). A drum cartridge is a unit containing the photosensitive elements for forming printed images. When it is time to replace a drum cartridge, a message is displayed on the display. Confirm the position (A1, A2, A3, A4) of the indicated drum cartridges, and replace the corresponding drum cartridge. Daily Care If you continue using this machine without replacing the cartridge, and copying or printing reaches the following page number after the message is displayed, the machine will stop, and copying or printing will no longer be possible. DocumentCentre C240 About 1,500 pages for Yellow, Magenta and Cyan, and about 1,600 pages for Black DocumentCentre C320 3 About 1,800 pages for Yellow, Magenta and Cyan, and about 2,000 pages for Black DocumentCentre C400 About 2,200 pages for Yellow, Magenta and Cyan, and about 2,500 pages for Black

Never heat the drum cartridge, or scratch its surface. A heated or scratched drum can be hazardous to your health.

Use of drum cartridges not recommended by Xerox may prevent print quality or impair machine performance. Use only drum cartridges recommended by Xerox on this machine.

Do not expose drum cartridges to the direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent light- ing. Do not touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so might prevent clean-looking prints from being made. Used drum cartridges require disposal. Return used toner cartridges to our Customer Support Cen- ter. Drum cartridges can be replaced with the machine still on. When the power is turned off, all information stored to the machine’s memory will be erased. The number of pages that can be printed is the number of pages when using A4 ( ). The number of pages that can be printed is only an estimate and varies depending on the content, paper size, variety, and the computer environment.

55 3.2 Replacing Consumables

Procedure

1 Make sure that the machine has stopped before opening the front cover. Daily Care

2 Lift up the stopper on the left front of the machine while pressing the bottom of 3 the stopper upwards.

3 Pull down the handle. This unlocks the drum cartridge lock so that the four drum cartridges can be accessed.

4 Gently draw out the drum cartridge (A1, A2, A3, A4) indicated on the display by gripping its handle. The following example shows how to replace drum A4.

When pulling out a drum cartridge, take care not to drop it on the floor. Drum cartridge

56 3.2 Replacing Consumables

5 Draw out the drum cartridge while holding its underside as shown in the figure on the right.

Take care not to touch toner on the drum cartridge.

6 Remove the new drum cartridge from its box, and put the used drum Daily Care cartridge into the polyethylene bag provided in the package.

Do not place the drum cartridge upright. Return used drum cartridges to our Customer Support Center for disposal. 3 7 Place the new drum cartridge (with protective cover) on the handle, and insert the end of the drum cartridge into the machine. Insert the drum cartridge up to the arrow mark as shown in the figure on the right.

8 Peel off the seal from the top side of the drum cartridge with the end of the cartridge inserted into the machine.

9 Push in the drum cartridge as far as possible by sliding the orange knob on the top of the cartridge away from you. Put the protective cover into the box as it is.

57 3.2 Replacing Consumables

10 Lift up the handle to return it to its original position.

Daily Care 11 Pull down the stopper to lock the handle in place.

12 Close the front door.

A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover is even slightly open.

3.2.6 Replacing the Staple Cartridge

When the Staple Finisher (option) is installed and it is time to replace the staple cartridge, a message is displayed on the display. When this message is displayed, replace the staple cartridge with a new one.

Use of staple cartridges not recommended by Xerox may effect print quality or impair machine performance. Use only staple cartridges recommended by Xerox on this machine.

Check the product code of the staple cartridge and contact our Customer Support Center.

58 3.2 Replacing Consumables

Procedure

1 Make sure that the machine has stopped, and then open the front cover on the Staple Finisher. Daily Care

2 Hold the staple cartridge by its lever as shown in the figure on the right, and draw out the staple cartridge to the right towards you. 3

3 Lift up to remove the staple cartridge.

4 Press in both sides of the staple cartridge marked “PUSH”.

59 3.2 Replacing Consumables

The staple case in the staple cartridge can now be drawn out.

If there are still staples inside the staple case, the case will not rise up even if you press in both sides marked “PUSH”.

5 Insert your fingertip into the round sec- Daily Care tion on the cartridge to remove the staple case.

3 6 Push a new staple case into the staple cartridge.

7 Push the top of the staple cartridge down as shown in the figure on the right.

8 Remove the tab from the new staple case as shown in the figure on the right.

60 3.2 Replacing Consumables

9 Return the staple cartridge to its original position and push in until you hear it click into place.

10 Close the Staple Finisher front cover. Daily Care

A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the Staple Finisher’s front cover is even slightly open. 3

61 3.3 Cleaning the Copier

Following describes how to clean the copier. This section is divided into separate descriptions that individually deal with how to clean external covers, internal components, document cover/DADF, and document glass.

3.3.1 Cleaning External Covers

Following describes how to clean external covers. Daily Care Before you start to clean the machine, be sure to switch off and unplug the machine. Access to a live machine’s interior for cleaning can cause electric shock. Do not use benzene, paint thinner or other volatile liquids or insect repellant sprays as they might discolor, deform or crack covers. Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to malfunction or damage documents when they are being copied or printed.

3 Procedure

1 Wipe external covers with a firmly wrung soft cloth moistened with water. If it is difficult to remove dirt from external covers, moisten a soft cloth with a small amount of neutral detergent, and gently wipe the covers.

Never use cleaning agents other than water or neutral detergent.

2 Wipe off any excess water from external covers with a soft cloth.

62 3.3 Cleaning the Copier

3.3.2 Cleaning Internal Components (Raster Output Scanners)

Following describes how to clean internal components (ROS: Raster Output Scanners). Normally, clean Raster Output Scanners after you have replaced the toner collection bottle. Also, clean Raster Output Scanners when image-quality defects such as white or color streaks appear during copying or printing. Daily Care

A cleaning rod is provided on the rear of the front door. Before you clean the Raster Output Scanners, first remove the toner collection bottle. Toner spills out of the toner collection bottle when it is placed at an angle. So, we recommend laying paper on the floor before replacing Raster Output Scanners. Procedure 3

1 Make sure that the machine has stopped before opening the front cover.

2 Open the black cover on the front of the machine body (B) downwards by holding the orange knobs on the left and right.

63 3.3 Cleaning the Copier

3 Holding the center section of the toner collection bottle pull the bottle out until it comes to a stop.

To prevent the toner collection bottle from tilting and spilling toner, place the bottle at another location away from the machine. Lay paper on the floor and place the toner collection bottle on top of that paper. Daily Care 4 Remove the cleaning rod (provided) from the rear of the front door. Gently insert the cleaning rod into cleaning slots D1 to D4 (square holes) with the 3 pad facing down.

5 When the cleaning rod has gone in as far as possible, gently draw it out towards you. Clean each of the four locations.

It is almost impossible to see dirt on the pad.

6 Push in the toner collection bottle that you removed as far as possible making sure that its center section is properly aligned.

64 3.3 Cleaning the Copier

7 Close the black cover by holding the orange knobs on the left and right.

8 Return the cleaning rod to its original Daily Care position on the rear of the front door.

9 Close the front cover.

A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover is even slightly open.

65 3.3 Cleaning the Copier

3.3.3 Cleaning the DADF and Document Glass

Following describes how to clean the document cover/DADF (belt section) and the document glass. Dirt on the document cover/DADF (belt section) or document glass sometimes causes dirt to appear on copies or prints, and sometimes prevents correct detection of the document size. To ensure that clean copies and prints are made, clean the machine about once every month.

Daily Care Do not used benzene, paint thinner or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint or coating on plastic parts. Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to malfunction or damage documents when they are being copied or printed.

Procedure 3 1 Wipe off any dirt from the document cover/DADF (belt section) with a dry cloth moistened with water.

2 Wipe off any dirt from the document glass with a soft cloth moistened with water.

3 Wipe wet parts with a soft, dry cloth to dry.

66 Executing Automatic Gra- 3.4 dation Adjustment

This machine can automatically adjust gradation when the reproducibility of density or color in copies and prints has deteriorated. The following procedures are available for automatic gradation adjustment: We recommend executing all four kinds of screen types. When the compensation of one screen type is completed, specify the following screen type and repeat the procedure.

Copy Job - High Resolution Screen This screen adjusts gradations when making copies of text documents.

Copy Job - High Gradation Screen Daily Care This screen adjusts gradations when making copies of photo documents.

Print Job - High Resolution Screen This screen adjusts gradations when printing text documents.

Print Job - High Gradation Screen This screen adjusts gradations when printing photo documents. 3

If color tones shift despite the periodic execution of automatic gradation adjustment, contact our Customer Sup- port Center. Default copy settings in the System Administration Mode change as follows when gradation adjustment is executed. Copy density = Normal or Auto (The default setting value of this feature returns to Normal when it is Light to Dark, and returns to Auto when it is Auto.), Color Shift = Normal, Color Saturation = Normal, Color Balance = 0, Sharpness = Normal

Procedure

The System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed when an System Administrator’s password has been set. When the System Administrator’s password has not been set, and you press the Password/System Settings button, the System Settings screen is displayed. When the System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed, enter the password see “5.2.1 Entering the System Administration Mode” (P. 111).

67 3.4 Executing Automatic Gradation Adjustment

2 Select System Settings.

System Settings Close

System Settings Setup Menu System Administrator Password

Auditron Administration

The System Settings screen is displayed. Daily Care 3 Select Common Settings.

System Settings Close

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings 3 Print Mode Settings Scan Mode Settings

The Common Settings screen is displayed. 4 Select Image Quality Adjustment.

Common Settings Close

Machine Clock/Timers Audio Tones Screen Defaults

Paper Tray Printing Priority Image Quality Attributes Adjustment

Reports Diagnostics Others

The Image Quality Adjustment screen is displayed. 5 Select Auto Gradation Adjustment. Image Quality Adjustment Close

Image Quality Auto Gradation Adjustment

The Auto Gradation Adjustment screen is displayed.

68 3.4 Executing Automatic Gradation Adjustment

6 Load A4 size paper in tray 5 (Bypass Tray). Move the paper guide to gently touch the edge of the paper you loaded.

7 Select the screen to use for gradation adjustment and select Start. Daily Care In the following example, Copy Job - Text is used.

Auto Gradation Adjustment Close

Copy Job - Text Copy Job - Photo 3 Print Job - Text

Print Job - Photo Start

The message “Outputting Adjustment Chart Copy Job - Text” is displayed, and the document for gradation adjustment (Adjustment Chart) is output.

The Chart Adjustment screen is displayed.

Chart Adjustment Follow the steps to perform Auto Gradation Adjustment by the machine. 1. Place the Adjustment Chart face down with both Magenta patches against the left edge of the Document Glass. Stop 2. Place 5 sheets of white paper or more over the chart. 3. Lower the Document Cover and press Start on this screen. Start

69 3.4 Executing Automatic Gradation Adjustment

8 Place the Magenta color patch of the Adjustment Chart that was output Magenta patches against the left side of the document glass.

Place the Adjustment Chart on the document glass.

After placing the adjustment chart,

Daily Care 9 place five sheets of white paper on top of it and close the document cover.

10 Select Start.

Chart Adjustment Follow the steps to perform Auto Gradation Adjustment by the machine.

1. Place the Adjustment Chart face down with both Magenta patches against the left edge of the Document Glass. Stop 2. Place 5 sheets of white paper or more over the chart.

3. Lower the Document Cover and press Start on this screen. Start

The message “Executing gradation adjustment Copy Job - Text” is displayed, and the machine automatically adjusts the gradation. It takes about 20 seconds to execute gradation adjustment. After a while, the Auto Gradation Adjustment screen is displayed. 11 To continue automatic gradation adjustment using other screens, repeat steps 6 to 10. 12 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.

13 Select Exit to exit the System Administration Mode.

14 Make a copy and check its image quality.

70 4Troubleshooting

4.1 Troubleshooting...... 72 4.2 Initial Checks...... 73 4.3 Poor Print Quality...... 81 4.4 Confirming Error Information...... 85 4.4.1 Printing Error History Reports ...... 85 4.5 Paper Jams ...... 86 4.5.1 Paper Jams at the Top Left Cover...... 87 4.5.2 Paper Jams at the Left Center Cover ...... 89 4.5.3 Paper Jams at the Bottom Left Cover...... 90 4.5.4 Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4...... 91 4.5.5 Paper Jams on the High Capacity Tray...... 92 4.5.6 Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) ...... 94 4.5.7 Paper Jams on the Duplex Unit ...... 95 4.5.8 Paper Jams on the Light Finisher ...... 96 4.6 Document Jams ...... 100 4.6.1 Document Jams in the Left Cover (Top) ...... 100 4.6.2 Paper Jams on Document Tray and Document Glass Sec- tion...... 101 4.7 Stapler Faults ...... 103 4.1 Troubleshooting

This Chapter describes the actions to take when trouble occurs on this machine. If a paper jam or machine trouble occurs, a message is displayed on the display. Remedy this by following the message on the display. This chapter describes actions to take for the following types of trouble:

Initial Checks If you think some trouble is occurring on the machine, check the machine status again. This section describes symptoms, causes, and the action to take to remedy the trouble. See “4.2 Initial Checks” (P. 73). Also, see “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” (P. 219).

Troubleshooting Poor Print Quality Check this section when print quality is poor. This section describes symptoms, causes, and the action to take to remedy poor print quality. See “4.3 Poor Print Quality” (P. 81).

Confirming Error Information This section describes how to confirm error information. See “4.4 Confirming Error Information” (P. 85). 4 Also, see “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” (P. 219). Paper Jams Check this section when a paper jam occurs in the machine. This section describes how to remedy paper jams in the tray section, left side of the main body, and finisher. See “4.5 Paper Jams” (P. 86).

Document Jams Check this section when a document jam occurs in the machine. This section describes how to remedy document jams on the DADF and document tray. See “4.6 Document Jams” (P. 100).

Stapler Faults Check this section when the finisher is installed. This section describes remedies to take when stapling trouble occurs. See “4.7 Stapler Faults” (P. 103).

Error Codes (***-***) Check this section when an error code is displayed on the display. See “Appendix E Error Codes Displayed on the Display” (P. 443) in “Part 3 Appendix”.

If the problem persists even after you have tried the remedies described in the sections above, contact our Customer Support Center.

72 4.2 Initial Checks

If you think some trouble is occurring on the machine, check the machine status again. If the problem is not solved, see “4.3 Poor Print Quality” (P. 81).

Precision components and high-voltage power supplies are used on this machine. Never open or remove machine covers that are screwed shut unless specifically instructed in the User Guide. A high-voltage component can cause electric shock. When opening the panels and covers that are screwed shut to install or detach optional accessories, be sure to follow instructions in the respective the User Guide. Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts. Doing so might cause fire or smoke. Troubleshooting

Information when printing that is not executed successfully is saved to a “Job History Report”. If printing is not executed successfully, the machine outputs a “Job History Report” so that you can check the processing status of the print job. Unsuccessfully processed print data is sometimes discarded. For details on how to print a “Job History Report”, see “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” (P. 219). 4 Symptoms Check Remedy Power is not Is the Clear All button or the power Turn the Clear All button or the power switched On. switch on the machine off? switch on.

“1.2 Switching on/off the Power” (P. 16) Is the power cord plugged into the Turn the power switch off and then firmly power outlet? plug in the power cord. Then turn the Is the power cord connector on the power switch on. machine side disconnected?

“1.2 Switching on/off the Power” (P. 16) Is power of the correct voltage being Make sure that the power supply is 220/ supplied? 240 V, 15 A. Make sure that power of capacity compatible with the specified maximum power consumption of the machine (1280/1300 W) is being supplied.

“ Safety Notes” (P. xvii) Display is dark. Is the Power Saver button lit? The machine is in the Power Saver mode. Press the Power Saver button on the control panel to cancel the Power Saver mode.

“1.3 Power Saver Mode” (P. 19)

73 4.2 Initial Checks

Symptoms Check Remedy Display is dark. Is the Brightness Adjustment Dial set Adjust the brightness of the display by too dark? the Brightness Adjustment Dial.

“1.1.2 Control Panel” (P. 8) Cannot print. Is a message displayed on the control Follow the instructions displayed to solve Cannot copy. panel’s display? the problem. When the machine is connected to a The default setting for bi-directional com- personal computer by a parallel inter- munications on this machine is Enabled. face, the personal computer does not Printing is possible when the personal support bi-directional communica- computer supports bi-directional com- Troubleshooting tions. munications. In this instance, set bi- directional communications to Disabled on the control panel and print again.

For details, see “1.4 Setting Port” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scan- ner). Insufficient memory? Set the Print Mode to Speed Priority, try printing again using Ensure Printing, 4 increase the print page buffer, or increase by adding on 128 MB memory.

For details, see “1.5 Memory Allocation” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/ Scanner).

When there is insufficient memory, the port setting is automatically reset to Stop and the machine is restarted. For details about adding on memory, contact our Customer Support Center. Is the printer mode “Offline”? Press Machine Status and confirm the Printer Mode in the Machine Status screen. If Printer Mode is “Offline”, select Online in the Printer Mode screen.

74 4.2 Initial Checks

Symptoms Check Remedy “Online” does not Is the interface cable disconnected? Turn the power switch off, unplug the light even though power cord from the power outlet, and you instructed it to check the interface cable connection. print.

For details, see “1.2 Connecting Interface Cable” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). Is the personal computer’s environ- Check the printer driver and other envi- ment correctly set? ronment settings on the personal computer. Is the required interface set? Check the status of the interface port. Troubleshooting

For details, see “1.2 Connecting Interface Cable” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). Printing is not per- Is paper of the size specified for print- Follow the instructions displayed to load formed even ing loaded on the tray? paper of correct size and instruct it to though printing was print again. instructed on tray 5 (Bypass Tray). 4 “2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) “Printing” is dis- Was the client turned off after you Press the Job Status button and instruct played even turned the machine on? cancellation of the print job. though you instructed it to print. (when the parallel Before turning the machine on, make sure interface is used) that the client is on.

“7.2 Confirming Jobs” (P. 245) Unsatisfactory print A probable cause is an image defect. Remedy the trouble referring to “Poor quality Print Quality” described later.

“4.3 Poor Print Quality” (P. 81) Text is not printed Non-standard fonts are used for print- Check the application or printer driver correctly (text is ing. settings. If PostScript (option) is being corrupted). used, download the required fonts. Online lights and Data remaining in machine memory. Cancel printing, or purge remaining data. copies are not delivered with Online still lit. “7.2 Confirming Jobs” (P. 245)

75 4.2 Initial Checks

Symptoms Check Remedy Cannot insert or Did you open a cover or turn power off Turn the power off without unnecessarily remove trays. during printing? inserting or removing a tray. Wait several seconds and then turn the power switch on. Make sure that the machine is online (ready to receive data) and then insert or remove the tray. The copy is dirty. Is the document glass or the docu- Clean the document glass or the document cover dirty? ment cover.

“3.3 Cleaning the Copier” (P. 62) Troubleshooting Is the document made of highly trans- If the document is highly transparent, parent material like a transparency? marks on the document cover will be copied. Place a white sheet of paper on the document and make a copy. Is the document colored, of a rough Either adjust the copy density or image texture or a blueprint? quality and then retry copying.

See “3.16 Selecting the Original Type - Original Type” (P. 365), “3.18 Adjusting 4 Copy Density and Contrast - Lighter/ Darker/Contrast” (P. 371) of “Part 2 Copier”. Are you making copies of glossy print- Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the ing paper? document glass, and shadows are sometimes copied and reproduced as dirt. Place a transparency or highly transparent film under the document and retry copying. The copy is too Is the copy density set to Dark? Adjust the copy density. dark. The copy is too Is the density of the document too light. light? See “3.18 Adjusting Copy Density and Con- trast - Lighter/Darker/Contrast” (P. 371) in Is the copy density set to Light? “Part 2 Copier”. The copy shifts Is the paper shifting or is the leading Align the edges of the paper, and load slightly. edge of the paper not loaded flush the paper again so that is flush against with the tray corners? the tray corners.

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28)

76 4.2 Initial Checks

Symptoms Check Remedy Images on the copy Is the document loaded correctly? Load the document correctly. are skewed.

See “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270) in “Part 2 Copier”. Is paper loaded correctly in the tray? Load paper correctly. Are the paper guides in tray 5 (Bypass Tray) set so that they are contacting the paper? “2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) Is the DADF document guide at the Load the document correctly, and align correct position? the document guide with the edge of the Troubleshooting document.

See “1.2.2 Loading Copies on the DADF” (P. 271) in “Part 2 Copier”. Is the paper tray set properly? Firmly push in the tray as far as possible to set it properly.

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) Part of the image is Is the paper damp? If the paper is damp, either some parts 4 missing on the of the copy are not shown or the copy is copy. smudged and unclear. Replace with paper from a new ream.

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) Is the loaded paper folded or wrin- Remove the defective paper and replace kled? with paper from a new ream.

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) Is the document pasted together or A probable cause is that the pasted or folded in? folded in section is curling back, and has risen up from the surface of the document glass. Place a stack of white sheets on the document to hold the document down flat against the document glass. A stripe pattern Is too large a document enlargement Stripes sometimes appear in copies at appears in copies. ratio set? some enlargement ratios. Adjust the copy enlargement ratio.

See “3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge” (P. 306) in “Part 2 Copier”.

77 4.2 Initial Checks

Symptoms Check Remedy Copies are not Is the document glass or the docu- Clean the document glass or the docu- made at the ment cover dirty? ment cover. desired size.

“3.3 Cleaning the Copier” (P. 62) Is the document made of highly trans- Place the document on the document parent material like a transparency? glass, and place a white sheet on top of the document before making a copy. Is the document at the correct posi- Load the document correctly. tion?

Troubleshooting Is the document loaded correctly? See “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270) in “Part 2 Copier”. Is the document guide at the correct Properly set the document guide. position?

See “1.2.2 Loading Copies on the DADF” (P. 271) in “Part 2 Copier”. Is the document folded or bent? Straighten and properly reset the docu- 4 ment. See “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270) in “Part 2 Copier”. Is the document a non-standard size? Enter the document size.

See “3.10 Specifying the Document Scan- ning Size Before Making Copies - Original Size” (P. 343) in “Part 2 Copier”.

78 4.2 Initial Checks

Symptoms Check Remedy Paper is often Is paper loaded properly in the tray? Load paper correctly. jammed or wrinkled. “2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) Is the paper tray set properly? Firmly push in the tray as far as possible to set it properly.

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) Is the paper damp? Replace with paper from a new ream. Troubleshooting

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) Is the paper curled? Either turn the paper so that the curl is facing down in the tray, or replace with paper from a new ream.

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) Are there any torn pieces of paper still Open the door of the machine or slide remaining inside the machine or is out the tray to remove the torn paper or there a foreign object in the machine? the foreign object. 4

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) Is out-of-spec paper loaded in the Replace with paper that meets machine tray? specifications.

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) Paper Recommendations Is paper loaded in the tray past its Load paper in the tray so that it does not maximum fill line? exceed the maximum fill line.

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) Is the paper guide set correctly? Load the document correctly, and apply the paper guide to a paper lightly. Documents are not Are the documents too small? The minimum size of the document that fed into the DADF. can be loaded on the DADF is A5.

See “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270)” in “Part 2 Copier”.

79 4.2 Initial Checks

Symptoms Check Remedy An error message Check the position of the paper Set the paper guides to the correct posi- is displayed after guides at the front side of tray 5 tions. paper is loaded in (Bypass Tray). tray 5 (Bypass Tray) and the Start “2.1.2 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass button is pressed. Tray)” (P. 30) Documents are Is the right type of document used? Properly load a document that can be often jammed. Are you trying to copy irregular handled by the DADF. shaped documents, business cards, transparencies, or thin documents? See “Chapter 1 Loading Documents” Troubleshooting (P. 265) in “Part 2 Copier”. Are you trying to copy documents Remove sticky labels, paper clips or affixed with sticky labels, paper clips adhesive tape from the document before or adhesive tape? copying. Is the document guide at the correct Properly set the document guide. position?

See “1.2.2 Loading Copies on the DADF” (P. 271) in “Part 2 Copier”. Is part of the document ripped, and a Open the DADF cover and check inside. 4 piece of paper remaining in the DADF? “4.6 Document Jams” (P. 100) Is an A5-size document loaded hori- Load the A5-size ( ) document verti- zontally on the DADF when the Mixed cally. Size Originals feature is in use? A corner of the doc- Is the document curled? Flatten out the curl and load the docu- ument is folded. ment again. Color copies can- Is Output Color set to Black? Select Full Color at Output Color. not be made.

See “3.2 Selecting the Color to Copy - Out- put Color” (P. 295) in “Part 2 Copier”. Is a message prompting toner car- Replace with the toner cartridge of the tridge replacement displayed on the color indicated in the message. display?

“3.2.3 Replacing Toner Cartridges” (P. 48) Tonal reproduction Is tonal reproduction poor? Perform automatic gradation adjustment in color copies is in the System Administration Mode. poor, resulting in unsatisfactory image quality. “3.4 Executing Automatic Gradation Adjust- ment” (P. 67)

80 4.3 Poor Print Quality

When print quality is poor, choose the closest symptom in the following table, and perform the required remedy. If image quality is not improved by performing the relevant remedy, contact our Customer Support Center.

Symptoms Check Remedy Prints are faint. Is the paper damp? Replace with paper from a new ream. (smudged, unclear)

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) The drum cartridge is depleted or Replace with a new drum cartridge. damaged. Troubleshooting

“3.2.5 Replacing Drum Cartridges A1, A2, A3, A4” (P. 55) There is hardly any toner left in the Replace with a new toner cartridge. toner cartridge.

“3.2.3 Replacing Toner Cartridges” (P. 48) Black or colored dots The drum cartridge is depleted or Replace with a new drum cartridge. 4 are printed. damaged.

“3.2.5 Replacing Drum Cartridges A1, A2, A3, A4” (P. 55)

Black or colored lines The drum cartridge is depleted or Replace with a new drum cartridge. are printed. damaged.

“3.2.5 Replacing Drum Cartridges A1, A2, A3, A4” (P. 55) Internal components (ROS: Raster Clean internal components. Output Scanners) are dirty.

“3.3.2 Cleaning Internal Components (Raster Output Scanners)” (P. 63)

81 4.3 Poor Print Quality

Symptoms Check Remedy Dirt appears at equal Dirt on the paper feed path. Make several prints. intervals. The drum cartridge is depleted or Replace with a new drum cartridge. damaged.

“3.2.5 Replacing Drum Cartridges A1, A2, A3, A4” (P. 55)

Troubleshooting White dots appear in The paper in use is unsuitable. Load suitable paper. black filled areas.

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) The drum cartridge is depleted or Replace with a new drum cartridge. damaged.

“3.2.5 Replacing Drum Cartridges A1, A2, 4 A3, A4” (P. 55) Printed toner Is the paper damp? Replace with paper from a new ream. smudges when rubbed with your finger. “2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) Toner is not fused to the paper. The paper in use is unsuitable. Load suitable paper. The paper is dirtied with toner. “2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28)

The entire paper The drum cartridge is depleted or Replace with a new drum cartridge. area is printed black. damaged.

“3.2.5 Replacing Drum Cartridges A1, A2, A3, A4” (P. 55) A probable cause is a high-voltage Contact our Customer Support Center. power supply malfunction.

82 4.3 Poor Print Quality

Symptoms Check Remedy Nothing is printed. Two or more sheets of paper are Fan paper well before loading it. being fed simultaneously. (double- feed) “2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) There is no toner left in the toner car- Replace with a new toner cartridge. tridge.

“3.2.3 Replacing Toner Cartridges” (P. 48) A probable cause is a high-voltage Contact our Customer Support Center.

power supply malfunction. Troubleshooting White areas or white A probable cause is a dirty Raster Clean the Raster Output Scanner. or colored stripes Output Scanner. appear. “3.3.2 Cleaning Internal Components (Raster Output Scanners)” (P. 63) Is the paper damp? Replace with paper from a new ream.

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) 4 The paper in use is unsuitable. Load suitable paper.

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) The entire page is When the print was made using tray Either load paper of the correct size in printed faint. 5 (Bypass Tray), the size of the actu- tray 5 (Bypass Tray), or fan the paper ally loaded paper differed from the thoroughly before loading it again. paper size selected on the printer driver. Or, two or more sheets of paper are being fed simultaneously. “2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28)

83 4.3 Poor Print Quality

Symptoms Check Remedy Paper becomes wrin- The paper in use is unsuitable. Replace with paper from a new ream. kled. Paper is being added while it is being Text is blurred. fed. “2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) Is the paper damp? Troubleshooting

4 White or color The drum cartridge is depleted or Replace with a new drum cartridge. patches appear damaged. along the feed direction of the paper. “3.2.5 Replacing Drum Cartridges A1, A2, A3, A4” (P. 55) There is no toner left in the toner car- Replace with a new toner cartridge. tridge.

“3.2.3 Replacing Toner Cartridges” (P. 48) A probable cause is a dirty Raster Clean the Raster Output Scanner. Output Scanner.

“3.3.2 Cleaning Internal Components (Raster Output Scanners)” (P. 63) Text or images are The paper guide in the paper tray is Set the horizontal and vertical paper printed at an angle. not set at the correct position. guides to the correct positions.

“2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28)

84 Confirming Error Informa- 4.4 tion

Following describes how to confirm the information of errors that have occurred on the machine. 50 of the latest occurring errors are printed on error history reports. These reports list the date and time of occurrence, error code and error category.

4.4.1 Printing Error History Reports

Following describes how to print error history reports.

Procedure Troubleshooting

1 Press Machine Status. The Machine Status screen is displayed. 2 Select Faults.

Billing Meter/ Machine Status Consumables Faults Print Report 4 Machine Information Paper Tray Print Mode On-line

The Faults screen is displayed. 3 Select Error History Report. Billing Meter/ Machine Status Consumables Faults Print Report

Error History Report

4 Press Start. The error history report is printed out.

Printing of error history reports can also be instructed at Job Management in the Billing Meter/Print Report screen. For details on how to print out error history reports and the items printed in these reports, see “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” (P. 219).

85 4.5 Paper Jams

When paper jams inside the machine, the machine stops and an alarm sounds. A message also is displayed on the display. Follow the instructions displayed and remove the jammed paper. Gently remove the paper taking care not to tear it. If paper is torn while it is being removed from the machine, remove all torn pieces making sure that none remain inside the machine. If a paper jam message is displayed again after you have remedied the paper jam, paper is probably jammed at another location. Remedy this by following the message on the display. When you have finished remedying a paper jam, printing is automatically resumed from the state before the paper jam occurred. If a paper jam occurred during copying, press the Start button. Copying is resumed from the state before the paper jam occurred. Troubleshooting

When removing jammed paper, make sure that no bits and pieces of jammed paper are left in the machine. A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire. If a piece of paper is stuck in a hidden area or paper is wrapped around the fuser unit or rollers, do not remove it forcefully. You can get injured or burnt. Switch off the machine immediately, and contact our Customer Support Center.

4 This section describes how to remedy paper jams that occur at the following locations: Top left cover Left center cover Bottom left cover Trays 1, 2, 3, 4 High Capacity Tray Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) Duplex Unit Finisher top cover Finisher interface Center Tray exit

When a paper jam occurs, paper is sometimes torn and remains inside the machine if you draw out a tray without checking the paper jam position. This may cause machine malfunctions. Check where the paper jam occurred before remedying the problem. If a piece of jammed paper remains inside the machine, the paper jam message will not disappear from the display. Paper jams can be remedied with the machine still on. When the power is turned off, all information stored to the machine’s memory will be erased. Do not touch components inside the machine. This can cause print defects.

86 4.5 Paper Jams

4.5.1 Paper Jams at the Top Left Cover

The following describes how to remedy paper jams that occur at the top left cover of the body.

When removing jammed paper, images are sometimes transferred to the transfer belt (black film belt) on the machine body inside the top left cover. Do not touch this transfer belt. Doing so might adversely effect image quality, or damage the transfer belt, necessitating belt replacement.

Procedure Troubleshooting

1 Gently open the top left cover while lift- ing up the release lever.

When the Face Up Side Tray Kit (option) is installed, and over 50 sheets of paper have been delivered onto the tray, remove the paper from the tray before opening the top left cover. If delivered sheets are left on the tray, it will become heavy when the top left cover is returned to its original position.

2 If the edge of the jammed paper can be reached at the output tray, pull the jammed paper in the direction of the feed-out area.

Never touch a labeled area found on the fuser unit or nearby indicating “High Temperature” and “Caution”. You can get burnt.

87 4.5 Paper Jams

3 Remove the jammed paper.

If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine.

Never touch a labeled area found on the fuser unit or nearby indicating “High Temperature” and “Caution”. You can get burnt. Troubleshooting

4 If you cannot remove paper jammed inside the fuser unit, lift up the lever and remove the jammed paper.

After you have removed the jammed paper, return the 4 lever to its original position.

Never touch a labeled area found on the fuser unit or nearby indicating “High Temperature” and “Caution”. You can get burnt.

5 Press the center section of the top left cover to gently close the cover, and lift up tray 5 (Bypass Tray).

88 4.5 Paper Jams

4.5.2 Paper Jams at the Left Center Cover

Following describes how to remedy paper jams that occur at the left center cover of the main body.

Procedure

1 Gently open the left center cover while pulling the release lever. Troubleshooting

2 Remove the jammed paper. 4 If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine.

3 Gently close the left center cover.

89 4.5 Paper Jams

4.5.3 Paper Jams at the Bottom Left Cover

Following describes how to remedy paper jams that occur at the bottom left cover of the main body.

Procedure

1 Gently open the bottom left cover while pulling the release lever. Troubleshooting

2 Remove the jammed paper. 4 If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine.

3 Gently close the bottom left cover.

90 4.5 Paper Jams

4.5.4 Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4

Following describes how to remedy paper jams that occur on trays 1 to 4.

Procedure

1 Draw out the tray where the paper jam occurred. Troubleshooting Paper is sometimes torn and remains inside the machine if you draw out a tray without checking the paper jam position. This may cause machine malfunction. Check where the paper jam occurred before remedying the problem.

2 Remove the jammed paper. 4 If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine.

3 Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop.

91 4.5 Paper Jams

4.5.5 Paper Jams on the High Capacity Tray

The following describes how to remedy paper jams that occur when using the optional High Capacity Tray for trays 3 and 4.

Paper jam in tray 3 (high capacity)

Procedure Troubleshooting 1 Draw out tray 3 (high capacity).

Paper is sometimes torn and remains inside the machine if you draw out a tray without checking the paper jam position. This may cause machine malfunction. Check where the paper jam occurred before remedying the problem. 4 2 Remove the jammed paper.

If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine.

3 Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop.

92 4.5 Paper Jams

Paper jam in tray 4 (high capacity)

Procedure

1 Draw out tray 4 (high capacity).

Paper is sometimes torn and remains inside the machine if you draw out a tray without checking the paper jam position. This may cause machine malfunction. Check

where the paper jam occurred before remedying the Troubleshooting problem.

2 Remove the jammed paper.

If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine. 4

3 If paper is jammed in the paper feed section, open the inside cover and remove the paper.

4 Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop.

93 4.5 Paper Jams

4.5.6 Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)

Following describes how to remedy paper jams that occur on tray 5 (Bypass Tray).

Procedure

1 Inspect the inside part (paper feed entrance) of tray 5 (Bypass Tray), and

Troubleshooting remove any jammed paper.

When two or more sheets of paper are loaded, remove all of the sheets from the tray.

If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine. 4 2 Fan the paper you removed making sure that all four corners are neatly aligned.

3 Insert the paper into the tray with the printing side facing down until its leading edge lightly comes up against the paper feed entrance.

94 4.5 Paper Jams

4.5.7 Paper Jams on the Duplex Unit

Following describes how to remedy paper jams that occur on the duplex unit. Procedure

1 Open the Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) and gently open the duplex unit cover.

1 Troubleshooting 2

2 Remove the jammed paper.

If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside 4 the machine.

3 Close the duplex unit cover, and lift up tray 5 (Bypass Tray).

95 4.5 Paper Jams

4.5.8 Paper Jams on the Light Finisher

Following describes how to remedy paper jams that occur inside the Light Fin- isher when the Light Finisher (option) is installed.

Paper Jams on the Light Finisher Top Cover

Procedure Troubleshooting 1 Press the button on the Light Finisher top cover.

4 Open the Light Finisher top cover.

2 Remove the jammed paper.

If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine.

96 4.5 Paper Jams

3 Close the Light Finisher top cover.

Paper Jams on the Light Finisher Interface Troubleshooting

Procedure

1 Move the Light Finisher to the right.

2 Open the top cover on the Light Finisher interface.

3 Remove the jammed paper.

If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine.

97 4.5 Paper Jams

4 Close the staple cartridge cover.

5 Return the Light Finisher to the main Troubleshooting body.

4 Paper Jams on the Center Tray Exit

Procedure

1 Move the Light Finisher to the right.

2 Remove the jammed paper.

If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine.

98 4.5 Paper Jams

3 If the jammed paper is hidden from view, open the exit cover and check inside.

4 Return the Light Finisher to the main body. Troubleshooting

99 4.6 Document Jams

If a document jams on the DADF, the machine stops, and an error message is displayed on the display. Remedy the document jam according to the instructions displayed, and then load the document again on the DADF.

4.6.1 Document Jams in the Left Cover (Top)

Following describes how to remedy document jams on the left cover (top) of the DADF.

Troubleshooting Procedure

1 Pull up the handle at the center of the left cover on the DADF, and open the cover until it comes to a stop. The inside cover also rises up interlocked with the outer cover.

4 Unlatch the document scanner cover completely to stabi- lize it. Gently open the covers. 2 Remove the jammed paper.

100 4.6 Document Jams

3 Close the left cover of the DADF until you hear it click into place.

4 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled or folded, and load the Troubleshooting document again following the instructions displayed on the display. After removing the jammed document, load the entire document again including delivered document sheets. Already scanned document sheets will automatically be skipped, and scanning will resume from the previous document sheet.

Torn, wrinkled or folded documents may cause document 4 jams and damage. To scan such documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies.

4.6.2 Paper Jams on Document Tray and Docu- ment Glass Section

A message is displayed on the display if a document jams occurs on the document tray of the DADF or on the document glass section. Follow the instructions displayed to remedy the problem.

Procedure

1 If there is document jammed on the document tray, remove it gently.

101 4.6 Document Jams

2 Gently lift up the DADF.

3 Remove the jammed paper. Troubleshooting

4 4 Gently return the DADF.

5 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled or folded, and load the document again following the instructions displayed on the display. After removing the jammed document, load the entire document again including delivered document sheets. Already scanned document sheets will automatically be skipped, and scanning will resume from the previous document sheet.

Torn, wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies.

102 4.7 Stapler Faults

This section describes how to remedy stapler faults. Follow the procedures on the following pages when copies are not stapled or when staples are bent. Contact our Customer Support Center if the problem persists after you have tried the following solutions.

To staple copies, the Light Finisher (option) must be installed, and 128 MB Memory kit must be installed.

Bent staple Unstapled Troubleshooting

If staples are stapled on the copies in the manner shown in the figures below, contact our Customer Support Center.

One side of staple rising up Staple bent in reverse direction 4

Flattened staple Entire staple rising up

Staple rising up with center pressed in

103 4.7 Stapler Faults

Procedure

1 Make sure that the machine has stopped, and then open the front cover on the Light Finisher. Troubleshooting

2 Hold the staple cartridge by its lever as shown in the figure on the right, and draw out the staple cartridge to the right towards you. 4

3 Lift up to remove the staple cartridge.

4 After removing the staple cartridge, check the inside of the finisher for any remaining staples.

104 4.7 Stapler Faults

5 Pull up the lever on the front of the staple cartridge.

6 Remove the jammed staples together with the staple sheet. Troubleshooting

When removing jammed staples, also remove the staple sheet. Do not remove unused staples from the staple cartridge.

Be careful when removing jammed staples to avoid hurting your fingers. 4

7 Close the lever on the front of the staple cartridge until you hear it click into place.

8 Return the staple cartridge to its original position until you hear it click into place.

105 4.7 Stapler Faults

9 Close the Light Finisher’s front cover.

A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the Light Finisher’s front cover is even slightly open. If the staples cannot be removed after carrying out the above procedures, contact our Customer Support Cen- ter. Troubleshooting

106 5System Administration Mode Settings

5.1 Overview of System Administration Mode ...... 108 5.2 Entering and Exiting the System Administration Mode ...... 111 5.2.1 Entering the System Administration Mode...... 111 5.2.2 Exiting the System Administration Mode ...... 112 5.2.3 Setting System Settings in the System Administration Mode ...... 113 5.3 Setting and Changing System Administrator’s Passwords...... 117 5.3.1 Setting New Passwords ...... 117 5.3.2 Changing Passwords ...... 119 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)...... 122 5.4.1 Machine Clock/Timers ...... 123 5.4.2 Setting Audio Tones...... 125 5.4.3 Setting Screen Defaults ...... 126 5.4.4 Setting Paper Tray Attributes ...... 127 5.4.5 Printing Priority ...... 132 5.4.6 Image Quality/Auto Gradation Adjustment ...... 133 5.4.7 Reports ...... 137 5.4.8 Initializing the Hard Disk (Diagnostics) ...... 138 5.4.9 Migration to Sleep Mode and Offset Settings (Others) ... 138 5.5 Copy Mode Settings...... 139 5.5.1 Basic Copying Presets...... 139 5.5.2 Copy Defaults ...... 141 5.5.3 Copy Control...... 153 5.5.4 Original Size Defaults ...... 154 5.5.5 Reduce/Enlarge Presets...... 155 5.5.6 Custom Colors...... 156 5.6 Network Settings...... 157 5.6.1 Port Settings ...... 158 5.6.2 Protocol Settings...... 164 5.7 Print Mode Settings...... 166 5.7.1 Allocate Memory...... 167 5.7.2 Others (Print Mode Settings) ...... 170 5.8 Scan Mode Settings...... 171 5.8.1 Basic Scanning Presets...... 172 5.8.2 Scan Defaults ...... 173 5.8.3 Scan Size Default ...... 178 5.8.4 Output Size Default...... 179 5.8.5 Reduce/Enlarge Presets...... 180 5.8.6 Others (Scan Mode Settings) ...... 181 5.9 Registering/Changing Mailboxes ...... 184 Overview of System 5.1 Administration Mode

The System Administration Mode allows you to change machine default settings, and image quality and machine settings to suit your particular requirements. When the machine enters the System Administration Mode, the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed. If you press the User Mode button, you can make copies or scan documents in the System Administration Mode. You can also output printer and copier meter reports. System Administration Mode Settings If you select the System Settings button, the System Settings screen is displayed and you can make further changes to the system settings.

System Adminstrator Menu

User Mode System Settings

System Settings Close

System Settings Setup Menu System Administrator Password

Auditron 5 Administration

The following describes an overview of the System Settings screen.

For details on the totals management feature, see “Chapter 6 Managing Totals and Outputting Reports” (P. 187). For details on how to enter and exit the System Administration Mode, see “5.2 Entering and Exiting the System Administration Mode” (P. 111).

108 5.1 Overview of System Administration Mode

System Settings System Settings groups together five features Common Settings, Copy Mode Set- tings, Network Settings, Print Mode Settings and Scan Mode Settings. The default settings of each of these features can be changed.

Common Settings System Administration Mode Settings This feature is for making settings relating to the system date/timer, audio tones, screen defaults, paper/ trays attributes, printing priority, image quality Adjustment, reports, initialize hard disk, and other hardware specification related settings. Copy Mode Settings This feature is for setting the default values for each of the copy feature settings, copy control, and how buttons are displayed. Network Settings This feature is for setting the communications port, protocol and other settings. Print Mode Settings This feature is for setting memory assignments and printer operation. Scan Mode Settings This feature is for setting scanner default settings and how buttons are displayed.

For details about Common Settings, see “5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)” (P. 122). For details about Copy Mode Settings, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139). For details about Network Settings, see “5.6 Network Settings” (P. 157). 5 For details about Print Mode Settings, see “5.7 Print Mode Settings” (P. 166). For details about Scan Mode Settings, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” (P. 171). Fax Mode Settings is displayed for models installed with a fax feature. For details about Fax Mode Settings, see the User Guide (Facsimile). Registering/Changing Mailboxes Mailboxes for storing documents can be registered and changed.

For details about registering and changing Mailboxes, see “5.9 Registering/Changing Mailboxes” (P. 184). For more details, also see “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). For models installed with a fax feature, also see the User Guide (Facsimile).

109 5.1 Overview of System Administration Mode

Setting/Changing System Administration Mode The password for entering the System Administration Mode can be set and changed. The default System Administrator’s password is set to “11111”. A System Administrator’s password must be set to prevent unintentional changes to settings and ensure security. System Administration Mode Settings

For details about setting and changing System Administrator’s passwords, see “5.3 Setting and Changing System Administrator’s Passwords” (P. 117).

Auditron Administration This feature allows you to register accountal data and set copy limits. You can also initialize the data of printer meter reports. For details on the totals management feature, see “Chapter 6 Managing Totals and Outputting Reports” (P. 187) .

How to Enter Text The screen for entering text is sometimes displayed during machine operations. The following describes how to enter text.

Document Centre C400/320 Cancel Save 5 a b c d e f g 1 2 3 Backspace Alphanumeric h j j k l m n 4 5 6 Space

o p q r s t u 7 8 9 Shift

Symbol v w x y z 0

Entering alphabet characters and Select the Alphanumeric button. You can numbers ...... select between upper- and lower-case characters by selecting the Shift button. To return to the previous state, select the Shift button again. Entering symbols...... Select the Symbol button. Entering spaces...... Select the Space button. 1 Deleting characters...... Select the Backspace button. This deletes one character at a time.

The display might differ according to the ROM versions.

110 Entering and Exiting the Sys- 5.2 tem Administration Mode

This section describes how to enter, exit and set the System Administration Mode. When the System Administrator’s password has been set, and you press the Password/Sys- tem Settings button, the System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed. The Enter Password screen is also displayed when the totals management feature is active. Enter the password when the System Administrator - Password Entry screen or the Enter Password screen is displayed. System Administration Mode Settings

5.2.1 Entering the System Administration Mode

Following describes the procedure for entering the System Administration Mode. The default System Administrator’s password is set to “11111”.

For details on how to set the password for entering the System Administration Mode, see “5.3 Setting and Changing System Administrator’s Passwords” (P. 117).

The machine cannot enter the System Administration Mode when an error message is displayed on the display.

Procedure 5

1 Press Password/System Settings. The System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed. 2 Enter the password, and select Confirm.

System Administrator - Password Entry Cancel

Password

***** Confirm

The machine enters the System Administration Mode, and the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed.

The password you entered is displayed as ∗. If you made a mistake when entering the password, press the Clear button and enter the password again. To cancel password entry, select the Cancel button.

111 5.2 Entering and Exiting the System Administration Mode

3 Select either User Mode or System Settings.

System Adminstrator Menu

User Mode System Settings System Administration Mode Settings

When the User Mode button is selected If you select the User Mode button, you can make copies or scan documents in the System Adminis- tration Mode. If you press Machine Status button or Job Status button while still in User Mode in the System Administration Mode, printer or copier meter reports can be output. When the System Settings button is selected When you select the System Settings button, you can change the settings of each feature.

For details on how to set features, see “5.2.3 Setting System Settings in the System Administration Mode” (P. 113). 5 5.2.2 Exiting the System Administration Mode Following describes the procedure for exiting the System Administration Mode. The following example is for when system settings have been changed.

1 When you have finished entering and changing settings, select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed. 2 Select Close.

System Settings Close

System Settings Setup Menu System Administrator Password

Auditron Administration

This exits the System Administration Mode.

112 5.2 Entering and Exiting the System Administration Mode

5.2.3 Setting System Settings in the System Administration Mode

This section describes the basic operations in the System Administration Mode.

The following example is for Setting the System Clock (setting the time). Proce- System Administration Mode Settings dures for other items also follow the procedure described below.

Procedure

1 Press Password/System Settings. The System Settings screen or System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed.

The System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed. Perform the following operation when the System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed.

The System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed when a System Administrator’s password has been set. When the System Administrator’s password has not been set, and you press Password/System Settings, the System Settings screen is displayed. When the System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed, enter the password referring to “5.2.1 Entering the System Administration Mode” (P. 111). 5

1 Enter the password, and select Confirm.

System Administrator - Password Entry Cancel

Password

***** Confirm

The machine enters the System Administration Mode, and the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed.

When you enter the password, the Confirm button can be selected.

113 5.2 Entering and Exiting the System Administration Mode

2 Select System Settings.

System Adminstrator Menu

User Mode System Settings System Administration Mode Settings

The System Settings screen is displayed. 2 Select System Settings.

System Settings Close

System Settings Setup Menu System Administrator Password

Auditron Administration

The System Settings screen is displayed. 5 3 Select Common Settings. System Settings Close

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings

Print Mode Settings Scan Mode Settings

The Common Settings screen is displayed. 4 Select Machine Clock/Timers.

Common Settings Close

Machine Clock/Timers Audio Tones Screen Defaults

Paper Tray Printing Priority Image Quality Attributes Adjustment

Reports Diagnostics Others

The Machine Clock/Timers screen is displayed.

114 5.2 Entering and Exiting the System Administration Mode

5 Select 1.Date, and select Change Settings.

Machine Clock/Timers Close Items Current Settings 1. Date 2002/7/22 (Y/M/D ) 2. Time 3:45 PM 3. Time Zone GMT +9:00 1/2 System Administration Mode Settings 4. Daylight Savings Adjust Off Change 5. Auto Clear 60 Settings

The 1.Date screen is displayed. 6 Select the Date Format. 1. Date Cancel Save Date Format Year Month Day (2000-2099) (1-12) (1-31)

Y/M/D 2002 //7 15

M/D/Y

D/M/Y

7 Enter the Year, Month and Day using . 1. Date Cancel Save 5 Date Format Year Month Day (2000-2099) (1-12) (1-31)

Y/M/D 2002 //7 15

M/D/Y

D/M/Y

If you select the Cancel button, the settings are not changed, and the display returns to the previous screen. 8 Select Save. The screen returns to the Machine Clock/Timers screen. 9 To continue setting other items, repeat the above procedure.

10 When you have finished changing settings, select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.

115 5.2 Entering and Exiting the System Administration Mode

11 Select Exit.

System Settings Exit

System Settings Setup Menu System Administrator Password System Administration Mode Settings

Auditron Administration

This exits the System Administration Mode.

116 Setting and Changing System 5.3 Administrator’s Passwords

This section describes how to set and change passwords for entering the System Adminis- tration Mode. The default System Administrator’s password is set to “11111”. When a password is set, you can no longer enter the System Administration Mode unless that password No. is entered again. When a password is set, you can also output meter reports and a list of registered mailboxes in the System Administration Mode. System Administration Mode Settings A System Administrator’s password must be set to prevent unintentional changes to settings and ensure security.

When a password is not set, passwords can no longer be applied to mailboxes and other items.

5.3.1 Setting New Passwords

The following describes the procedure for setting a new password from a state where the System Administrator’s password has not been set. The default Sys- tem Administrator’s password is set to “11111”. You can set any 4- to 12-digit number as a password. Procedure 5 1 Press Password/System Settings. The System Settings screen is displayed. 2 Select System Administrator Password.

System Settings Close

System Settings Setup Menu System Administrator Password

Auditron Administration

The System Administrator Password screen is displayed.

117 5.3 Setting and Changing System Administrator’s Passwords

3 Select On, and enter the new password using the numeric keypad.

System Administrator Password Close

New Password Off Confirm Password System Administration Mode Settings On Reset Enter

4 Select Enter.

System Administrator Password Close

New Password ***** Off Confirm Password

On Reset Enter

5 Enter the same password again as in step 3, and select Enter.

System Administrator Password Close

5 New Password ***** Off Confirm Password

On Reset Enter

Enter the same number at steps 3 and 5. If you made a mistake when entering the password, select the Reset button, and repeat the procedure from step 3. 6 Select Close. The screen returns to the System Settings screen. 7 Select Exit to exit the System Administration Mode.

118 5.3 Setting and Changing System Administrator’s Passwords

5.3.2 Changing Passwords

This section describes the procedure for changing an already set System Admin- istrator’s password.

Procedure System Administration Mode Settings

1 Press Password/System Settings. The System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed. 2 Enter the password using the numeric keypad, and select Confirm.

System Administrator - Password Entry Cancel

Password

***** Confirm

The System Administration Mode screen is displayed.

The password you entered is displayed as ∗. If you made a mistake when entering the password, press the Clear button and enter the password again. 5 To cancel password entry, select the Cancel button. The screen returns to the setup item screen. 3 Select System Settings.

System Adminstrator Menu

User Mode System Settings

The System Settings screen is displayed.

119 5.3 Setting and Changing System Administrator’s Passwords

4 Select System Administrator Password.

System Settings Close

System Settings Setup Menu System Administrator Password System Administration Mode Settings Auditron Administration

The System Administrator Password screen is displayed. 5 Select On, and enter the new password using the numeric keypad.

System Administrator Password Close

New Password Off Confirm Password

On Reset Enter

6 Select Enter. 5 System Administrator Password Close New Password ***** Off Confirm Password

On Reset Enter

7 Enter the same password again as in step 5, and select Enter.

System Administrator Password Close

New Password ***** Off Confirm Password

On Reset Enter

Enter the same number at steps 5 and 7. If you made a mistake when entering the password, select the Reset button, and repeat the procedure from step 5.

120 5.3 Setting and Changing System Administrator’s Passwords

8 Select Close. The screen returns to the System Settings screen. 9 Select Exit to exit the System Administration Mode. System Administration Mode Settings

121 Setting the System Set- 5.4 tings (Common Settings)

This section describes hardware specification related setting item Common Settings in the System Administration Mode.

System Settings Close

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings System Administration Mode Settings

Print Mode Settings Scan Mode Settings

Common Settings Close

Machine Clock/Timers Audio Tones Screen Defaults

Paper Tray Printing Priority Image Quality Attributes Adjustment

Reports Diagnostics Others

For details on how to enter the System Administration Mode, see “5.2.1 Entering the System Administration Mode” (P. 111). For details on how to exit the System Administration Mode, see “5.2.2 Exiting the System Administration Mode” (P. 112). 5 For details on Copy Mode Settings, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139). For details on Network Settings, see “5.6 Network Settings” (P. 157). For details on Print Mode Settings, see “5.7 Print Mode Settings” (P. 166). For details on Scan Mode Settings, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” (P. 171). On machines installed with the fax feature, Fax Mode Settings and fax-related items are also displayed. For details about Fax Mode Settings and fax-related items, see the User Guide (Facsimile).

122 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

5.4.1 Machine Clock/Timers

Set the date and timer until a feature such as the Power Saver or reset is activated. Machine Clock/Timers allows you to set the following items: System Administration Mode Settings

1. Date 5. Auto Clear 2. Time 6. Auto Job Release 3. Time Zone 7. Auto Print 4. Daylight Savings 8. Auto Power Saver

1. Date Set the date of the machine’s system clock to 2000 to 2099 (year), 1 to 12 (month) and 1 to 31 (day) using numbers. You can select from three date formats: Y/M/D, M/D/Y, and D/M/Y. The date set here is printed on lists and reports. (The default date format is D/M/Y.)

2. Time Set the time (hours/minutes) of the machine’s system clock in the 12-hour system or 24-hour system. Set hours within 0 to 23 (24-hour system) or 1 to 12 (12-hour system), and minutes within 0 to 59 using numbers. When the 12-hour clock is being used, morning (AM) or afternoon (PM) can also be set. The time set here is printed on lists and reports. (Default is 12 Hour Clock, AM, and 0 Hours 00 Minutes.) 5 3. Time Zone Set the time zone. Set the time difference from GMT.

4. Daylight Savings Set the months and dates for starting and ending the daylight savings.

5. Auto Clear Set whether or not to return the control panel to the default screen when it is not operated for a fixed period of time. Set the time to wait before returning to the default screen to within the range 60 to 240 seconds (1 to 4 minutes) in 60-second increments. Enter the setting value using the numeric keypad. (Default is 60 (seconds).) Setting Value Description 0 Auto Clear is not set. 60 to 240 Set the time to wait before returning to the default screen in 60-second increments.

123 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

6. Auto Job Release Set to release the current job to enable execution of the next job when an unusual condition (document jam, paper jam, etc.) occurs on the machine during copying or scanning. At this time, the job can be executed only at sections on the machine that are functioning normally. Set the time until the job is released to within 240 to 5940 seconds (4 to 99 minutes) in 60-second increments.

System Administration Mode Settings Enter the setting value using the numeric keypad. (Default is 600 (seconds).) Setting Value Description 0 Do not automatically release the job. 240 to 5940 Set the time until the job is released in 60-second increments.

7. Auto Print Set whether or not to automatically enable execution of print jobs when the machine is not operated for a fixed period of time. Set the time until execution of print jobs is enabled to within 1 to 240 seconds in 1-second increments. Enter the setting value using the numeric keypad. (Default is 10 seconds.) Setting Value Description 0 The time is not set. Output is started immediately when the machine is ready. 1 to 240 Set the print start time in 1-second increments.

8. Auto Power Saver 5 The Power Saver feature has two modes, a Low Power Mode and a Sleep Mode. When the preset time has elapsed, the mode changes as follows to lower the machine’s power consumption. Last Selection → Low Power Mode → Sleep Mode

At this item, set the time until the machine enters the Low Power Mode and the time until the machine enters the Sleep Mode. Set the time up to the Low Power Mode within the range 6 to 240 minutes and the time up to the Sleep Mode within the range 0 to 234 minutes in 1-minute increments. As each of these times are time settings from the last selection, the time from the Low Power mode to the Sleep mode is Sleep Mode-Low Power Mode. (Default for From Last Selection to Low Power Mode is 15minutes, for From Low Power Mode to Sleep mode is 45minutes.)

The Low Power Mode cannot be set to disabled. Set this item so that the total of the setting values is within 15 to 240 minutes.

For details about the Power Saver mode, see “1.3 Power Saver Mode” (P. 19). When setting the time up to the Sleep Mode, set Sleep Mode to Enable referring to “5.4.9 Migration to Sleep Mode and Offset Settings (Others)” (P. 138).

124 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

5.4.2 Setting Audio Tones

Set whether or not to sound tones, for example, at completion of a job or when a machine fault occurs. Audio Tones allows you to set the following items: System Administration Mode Settings

1. Control Panel Select Tone 5. Non-Copy Job Complete Tone 2. Control Panel Alert Tone 6. Alert Tone 3. Machine Ready Tone 7. Fault Tone 4. Copy Job Complete Tone 8. Low Toner Alert Tone

1. Control Panel Select Tone Set the tone to sound when a button displayed on the display is normally selected. You can select Off to not sound a tone, or select one of Loud, Normal or Soft as the volume. (Default is Normal.)

2. Control Panel Alert Tone Set the tone to sound when an inoperable button is selected or a button is selected when an error has occurred. You can select Off to not sound a tone, or select one of Loud, Normal or Soft as the volume. (Default is Normal.)

3. Machine Ready Tone Set the tone to sound when the machine is ready to copy or print, for example, after the power is 5 turned on. You can select Off to not sound a tone, or select one of Loud, Normal or Soft as the volume. (Default is Normal.)

4. Copy Job Complete Tone Set the tone to sound when copying has ended successfully. You can select Off to not sound a tone, or select one of Loud, Normal or Soft as the volume. (Default is Normal.)

5. Non-Copy Job Complete Tone Set the tone to sound when a job other than copying has ended successfully. You can select Off to not sound a tone, or select one of Loud, Normal or Soft as the volume. (Default is Normal.)

6. Alert Tone Set whether or not to sound a tone when a job has ended abnormally. You can select Off to not sound a tone, or select one of Loud, Normal or Soft as the volume. (Default is Normal.)

125 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

7. Fault Tone Set the tone to sound when a fault (e.g. document or paper jam) has occurred and the job is held in an abnormal state. You can select Off to not sound a tone, or select one of Loud, Normal or Soft as the volume. (Default is Normal.) System Administration Mode Settings 8. Low Toner Alert Tone Set the tone to sound when it is time to replace a drum cartridge or toner cartridge. You can select Off to not sound a tone, or select one of Loud, Normal or Soft as the volume. (Default is Normal.)

5.4.3 Setting Screen Defaults

Set the default screen display when the power is turned on. Screen Defaults allows you to set the following items:

1. Screen Default at Power On 2. Features Screen Default

1. Screen Default at Power On 5 Select one of Features, Job Status or Machine Status screen to set as the default screen display when the power is turned on. (Default is Features.)

2. Features Screen Default Select one of Menu, Copy or Scan as the default screen display when the Features button is pressed. (Default is Copy.)

The Fax can be set for models installed with a fax feature.

126 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

5.4.4 Setting Paper Tray Attributes

Set the type and priority of paper loaded in trays, image quality processing settings by paper type, and other paper or tray related settings. When the Paper Tray Attributes button is selected, the following additional items are displayed. System Administration Mode Settings

Paper Tray Attributes Close

Custom Paper Name Paper Type Paper Tray Priority

Paper Type Priority Image Quality Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults

Custom Paper Name Names can be assigned to custom paper 1 to 5 when using only plain paper, bond paper and recycled paper. For example, color paper can be named by application, “Colored Paper” for colored paper and “Cover Paper” for bond paper. Names registered to user paper are displayed in the Paper supply screen. 5 1. to 5. Custom Paper 1 to 5 Set a name up to 12 characters long for custom paper 1 to 5 using alphanumerics and symbols.

For details on how to enter characters, see “ How to Enter Text” (P. 110) at “5.1 Overview of System Administration Mode”.

127 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

Paper Type Set the type of paper to be loaded in trays 1 to 4 and Tray 5 (Bypass).

1. to 4. Trays 1 to 4 Set the type of paper to be loaded in trays 1 to 4. System Administration Mode Settings Plain paper, recycled paper, bond paper, and custom paper 1 to 5 can be loaded in these trays. Enter the setting values using numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as Plain Paper.)

5. Tray 5 (Bypass) Set the type of paper to be loaded in Tray 5 (Bypass). The setting made here will become the default setting value when making copies and the setting when the paper type is not notified by the client when making prints. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as Plain Paper.) Setting Value Description 14 Bond paper 0 Plain paper 3 Recycled paper 161 Custom paper 1 162 Custom paper 2 163 Custom paper 3 5 164 Custom paper 4 165 Custom paper 5 16 Lightweight paper: This can be set only when Tray 5 (Bypass) is used. 5 Transparency: This can be set only when Tray 5 (Bypass) is used. 1 Heavyweight paper 1: This can be set only when Tray 5 (Bypass) is used. 8 Heavyweight paper 2: This can be set only when Tray 5 (Bypass) is used. 12 Heavyweight paper 1: (side 2) This can be set only when Tray 5 (Bypass tray) is used. 13 Heavyweight paper 2: (side 2) This can be set only when Tray 5 (Bypass tray) is used. 17 Labels: This can be set only when Tray 5 (Bypass) is used.

Various image quality settings can be selected for Bond paper, Plain paper, Recycled paper and Custom paper 1 to 5. For details, see “ Image Quality” (P. 130).

128 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

Paper Tray Priority Set the order of priority of trays 1 to 4 that are selected by Auto Tray Switching. Tray 5 (Bypass) is not covered by the Auto Tray Switching feature.

For details about Auto Tray Switching, see “ Auto Tray Switching” (P. 29) at “2.1 Loading Paper”. System Administration Mode Settings

1. Paper Tray Priority Select Tray 1 to Tray 4 as Paper Tray Priorities 1 to 4. The same tray cannot be set twice in each tray priority. (The defaults are as follows in order Tray 1→Tray2→Tray3→Tray 4.)

Paper Type Priority The order of priority can be set to Bond, Plain, Recycled, and Custom paper 1 to 5 as the priority at Auto Tray Switching. This setting has higher priority over the tray priority. As the same priority can be set to different paper types, tray priority is covered in the case of same priorities.

For details about Auto Tray Switching, see “ Auto Tray Switching” (P. 29) at “2.1 Loading Paper”. 1. to 8. Bond, Plain, Recycled, Custom paper 1 to 5 priority 5 Set the priority for each of these paper types at Auto Tray Switching. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. When 255 is set, the tray to which that paper type is selected is not covered by Auto Tray Switching. (Defaults are as follows. Bond paper:3 as 3rd priority, Plain paper:1 as Highest priority, Recycled paper:2 as 2nd priority, Custom paper 1 to 5:255 as Auto Tray Switching Off.) Setting Value Description 255 Auto Tray Switching Off 1 Highest priority 2 2nd priority 3 3rd priority 4 4th priority 5 5th priority 6 6th priority 7 7th priority 8 8th priority

129 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

Image Quality Various image quality settings can be selected for Bond paper, Plain paper, Recycled paper and Custom paper 1 to 5.

1. to 8. Image processing of Bond, Plain, Recycled, and Custom paper 1 to 5 System Administration Mode Settings Various image quality settings can be selected for Bond, Plain, Recycled and Custom paper 1 to 5. When the machine is making copies or prints, it controls image quality by the paper type currently set at Paper Type and image processing currently set to each paper type. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. The letters in the setting value brackets corre- spond to the [Image Quality] in [Paper Settings] for CentreWare Internet Services. (Defaults are as follows. Recycled Paper: 4, and all other paper types: 2.)

Setting Value Description 1 Image quality best suited to color-exclusive Bond paper (A) 2 Image quality best suited to paper generally used in offices (B) 4 Image quality best suited to Recycled paper (C) 8 Select this setting when image quality is uneven when printing on (D) poor-texture paper. 16* Printing is processed at a low screen ruling as well as by the setting of 8 5 (E) above. Select this setting when unevenness in image quality is conspicuous even when printing at 8 above. Note, however, that this image quality processing setting is enabled only if Photo or Presentation is selected at Recommended Image Quality Type for printing when Print Mode is set to Speed Priority, and Print Mode is set to Normal and Image Quality Mode is set to Recommended. 32 Select this setting when image quality is uneven when printing on (F) poor texture paper of weight 90g/m2. 64* Printing is processed at a low screen ruling as well as by the setting (G) of 32 above. Select this setting when unevenness in image quality is conspicuous even when printing at 32 above. Note, however, that this image quality processing setting is enabled only if Photo or Pre- sentation is selected at Recommended Image Quality Type for printing when Print Mode is set to Speed Priority, and Print Mode is set to Standard and Image Quality Mode is set to Recommended. 128 Our Customer Support Center will set this when you are printing on (S) paper that falls under none of the above categories.

* 16 and 64 are valid numerical values when printing from the printer. When making copies at this settings, the result will be the same as 8 and 32, respectively.

“Poor texture paper” refers to paper whose surface demonstrates conspicuous unevenness in transparency when viewed against a strong light source.

130 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults When making copies on Tray 5 (Bypass), set the paper size that is displayed in the Tray 5 (Bypass) screen at Paper Supply. Paper sizes can be assigned to tray 5 standard size buttons 1 to 11. When frequently making copies on non-standard size paper, you need not enter the paper size each time you make a copy if the paper size is preset. System Administration Mode Settings Setting frequently used paper sizes in descending order makes operations even easier.

1. to 11. Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults 1 to 11 11 sizes can be registered to these buttons from the following sizes: Buttons are registered in order from Tray 5 Standard Size Button 1 from the top of the Tray 5 (Bypass) screen at Paper Supply.

A Series B Series Dis- A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , A6 , B4 , B5 , B5 , B6 play Inch Size Display 12 × 8" , 11 × 17" , 11 × 15" , 8.5 × 14" , 8.5 × 13" , 8.5 × 11" , 8.5 × 11" , 5.5 × 8.5" , 5.5 × 8.5"

Other 8K , 16K , 16K Enter Size Set the X (horizontal) within the range 140 to 482.6 mm and the Y (vertical) direction within the range 100 to 305 mm in 1mm increments. 5

(The defaults are as follows in order from Tray 5 Standard Size Button 1.) A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , B4 , B5 , 12 × 18" , 11 × 17" , 8.5 × 11"

131 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

5.4.5 Printing Priority

Set which job to give priority to when a copy and printer job arrive simultaneously. This setting allows you to overtake jobs to ensure more efficient processing. System Administration Mode Settings Jobs are processed in the order in which they arrive when the priority is the same. Note, however, that processing is sometimes not performed as set here depending on the machine’s processing state.

1. Copy Job Set the copy priority. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 38 as 3rd Priority.)

2. Print Job Set the printer priority. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 48 as No Priority.) Setting Value Description 18 Highest priority 28 2nd priority 5 38 3rd priority 48 No Priority

3. Received Fax Set the priority of fax received documents. This item is displayed when the Internet Fax (iFAX) or the Scan To Email feature is installed. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 48 as No Priority.) Setting Value Description 18 Highest priority 28 2nd priority 38 3rd priority 48 No Priority

132 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

4. Promoted Job Set whether or not to automatically overtake a job if there is another job that can be started when something on the machine prevents execution of a job (e.g. when a tray runs out of paper during copying or printing). Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below.

(Default is 0 as Overtake Disabled.) System Administration Mode Settings

Setting Value Description 0 Disables overtaking of jobs. 1 Enables overtaking of jobs.

5.4.6 Image Quality/Auto Gradation Adjust- ment

You can set image quality and Auto Gradation Adjustment. When the Image Quality Adjustment button is selected, the following additional items are displayed.

Image Quality Adjustment Close 5

Image Quality Auto Gradation Adjustment

Image Quality Various image quality settings can be selected for when the machine is scanning documents. Image Quality allows you to set the following items:

1. Photo & Text Recognition 5. Color Copy Auto Exposure 2. Output Color Recognition 6. B/W Copy Auto Exposure 3. Photo Reproduction Level 7. Image Enhancement 4. Photo Image Quality

133 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

1. Photo & Text Recognition The level at which the machine judges text or photos during document scanning can be changed when making copies by Text & Photo at Original Type. When More Text is selected, very fine characters become more easily recognizable as text. When More Photo is selected, halftone images such as newspapers and flyers become more easily

System Administration Mode Settings recognizable as photos. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 3 as Normal.) Setting Value Description 1 More Text 2Text 3Normal 4Photo 5 More Photo

2. Output Color Recognition The level at which the machine judges B/W and color during document scanning can be changed when making copies by Auto at Output Color. When More B/W is selected, the document becomes more easily recognizable as a black-and-white document. When More Color is selected, the documents becomes more easily recognizable as a color document. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. 5 (Default is 3 as Normal.) Setting Value Description 1 More B/W 2B/W 3Normal 4 Color 5 More Color

3. Photo Reproduction Level You can adjust the color reproduction of images judged by the machine as photos when making copies by Text & Photo at Original Type. When Text is selected, the high concentration part of the image are enhanced to reproduce a sharper- looking copy. Select Text to take the copy carried out clearly. When Photo is selected, the tones in photo areas in the image are reproduced smoother. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 3 as Normal.) Setting Value Description 1Text 3Normal 5Photo

134 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

4. Photo Image Quality This item can be set when more than 128 Mbytes of page memory and 512 Mbytes of system memory have been installed. By selecting Speed Priority, copies will be made without falling speed in Photo mode with Original Type.

When copying in Photo mode with Original Type, you can make copies that are closer to the origi- System Administration Mode Settings nal’s quality by selecting Image Quality Priority. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as Speed Priority.) Setting Value Description 0 Speed Priority 1 Image Quality Priority

By selecting Image Quality Priority, the copy speed may be reduced to achieve image quality that is closer to the original.

5. Color Copy Auto Exposure Set how background color is removed when making copies in color. Set how the machine detects the density of background color and processes to remove the background color. When Speed Priority is selected, a part of the document is sampled to detect the background color level. When Image Quality Priority is selected, the machine pre-scans the document, and samples the entire document to detect the background color level. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. 5 (Default is 1 as Speed Priority.)

6. B/W Copy Auto Exposure Set how background color is removed when making copies in black-and-white. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 1 as Speed Priority.) Setting Value Description 0 Image Quality Priority 1 Speed Priority

7. Image Enhancement Smoothing is performed on the print data to reproduce smoother images. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 1 as On.) Setting Value Description 0Off 1On

135 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

Auto Gradation Adjustment This feature compensates for tones when color tones shift in color prints. Com- pensating color tones maintains the quality of color prints made by this machine at a fixed level. System Administration Mode Settings For details about Auto Gradation Adjustment, see “3.4 Executing Automatic Gradation Adjustment” (P. 67).

Copy Job - High Resolution Screen This screen compensates tones when making copies of text documents.

Copy Job - High Gradation Screen This screen compensates tones when making copies of photo documents.

Print Job - High Resolution Screen This screen compensates tones when printing text documents.

Print Job - High Gradation Screen This screen compensates tones when printing photo documents. 5

136 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

5.4.7 Reports

Set whether or not to automatically output information (Job History Report) regarding processed print jobs or to print reports/lists or one side or on two sides. Reports allows you to set the following items: System Administration Mode Settings

1. Job History Report 8. 2 Sided Report

1. Job History Report Set whether or not to automatically output information (Job History Report) regarding processed print jobs. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as Off.) Setting Value Description 0 Automatic printing of Job History Reports off 1 Automatic printing of Job History Reports on. When the job storage area fills up with 50 jobs that have not been output, the past 50 jobs are automatically printed starting from the oldest job. Currently executing or queued print jobs are not recorded on Job History Reports.

Job History Reports are output for each service (copying, printing or scanning). 5 8. 2 Sided Report Set whether to print reports/lists or one side or on two sides. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as Off.) Setting Value Description 0Off 1On

137 5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)

5.4.8 Initializing the Hard Disk (Diagnostics)

This feature initializes data on hard disk.

Initialize Hard Disk System Administration Mode Settings This feature initializes data on hard disk. Addon fonts, forms for HP-GL/2 and SMB folders are erased by initializing the hard disk. Security print jobs and logs are not erased.

5.4.9 Migration to Sleep Mode and Offset Set- tings (Others)

This section describes how to make other settings. Others allows you to set the following items:

1. Sleep Mode 2. Job Offset (Center Output Tray) 3. Job Offset (Finisher Tray) 5 1. Sleep Mode Set whether or not to move to the Sleep Mode. When migration to the Sleep Mode is inhibited by this setting, timers at 8. Auto Power Saver (P. 124) under “5.4.1 Machine Clock/Timers” cannot be set. (Default is Enable.) Migration to the Low Power mode cannot be inhibited.

For details about the Power Saver mode, see “1.3 Power Saver Mode” (P. 19). For details about setting the migration to Sleep Mode timer, see 8. Auto Power Saver (P. 124) under “5.4.1 Machine Clock/Timers”.

2. Job Offset (Center Output Tray) Set Job Offset. Printing with the position of prints shifted by job (individually instructed print job) or by set (copies) is called “Offset”. If the output position of the previous job or set is towards you, then the next job or set will be output shifted away from you. Set whether operation by this offset feature is by Offset Per Set or Offset Per Job (Default is Offset Per Set.)

3. Job Offset (Finisher Tray) Set whether operation by this offset feature is by Offset Per Set or Offset Per Job when the Light Fin- isher is installed. (Default is Offset Per Set.)

138 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

The section describes Copy Mode Settings the setup item for specifications relating to copy features like defaults when making copies and control operations.

System Settings Close

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings System Administration Mode Settings

Print Mode Settings Scan Mode Settings

Copy Mode Settings Close

Basic Copying Copy Defaults Copy Control Presets

Original Size Reduce/Enlarge Custom Colors Defaults Presets

For details on how to enter and exit the System Administration Mode, see “5.2 Entering and Exiting the System Administration Mode” (P. 111). 5 5.5.1 Basic Copying Presets

Items assigned to the Paper Supply buttons in the Basic Copying screen can be changed. Setting frequently used trays and scan ratios frees you from unnecessary operations each time you make a copy. The following items can be set at Basic Copying Presets in the Copy Mode Set- tings screen:

1. Paper Tray - 2nd Button 4. Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd Button 2. Paper Tray - 3rd Button 5. Reduce/Enlarge - 4th Button 3. Paper Tray - 4th Button

139 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

1. to 3. Paper Tray - 2nd to 4th Buttons The 2nd to 4th button from the top downwards can be changed for each of the five feature buttons displayed at Paper Supply in the Basic Copying screen. Trays 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 (Bypass) can be set. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Defaults are as follows from the top. 2nd button:1 as Tray 1, 3rd button:2 as Tray 2, 4th

System Administration Mode Settings button:3 as Tray 3.) Setting Value Description 1Tray 1 2Tray 2 3Tray 3 4Tray 4 5 Tray 5 (Bypass)

4. to 5. Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd to 4th Buttons The 3rd to 4th button from the top downwards can be changed for each of the five feature buttons displayed at Reduce/Enlarge in the Basic Copying screen. Select the desired ratio from the ratios registered to the R/E Preset buttons. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Defaults are as follows from the top. 3rd button:2 as 70.7%, 4th button:7 as 141.4%. Setting Value Description 1 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 1 5 2 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 2 3 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 3 4 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 4 5 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 5 6 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 6 7 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 7

For details on setting the R/E Preset buttons, see “5.5.5 Reduce/Enlarge Presets” (P. 155).

140 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

5.5.2 Copy Defaults

Set the defaults for the various copy features. The machine returns to the defaults set here when the power is turned on, when the machine exits the Power Saver mode, or when the Clear All button is pressed. Setting frequently used features and values to their defaults frees you from unnecessary opera- System Administration Mode Settings tions each time you perform a specific operation. Copy Defaults allows you to set the following items:

1. Output Color 16. Original Type (Black) 2. Single Color 17. Auto Exposure 3. Dual Color - Color Image 18. Lighter/Darker 4. Dual Color - B/W Image 19. Contrast 5. Reduce/Enlarge 20. Sharpness 6. Paper Supply 21. Color Saturation 7. 2 Sided 22. Color Shift 8. Output 23. Color Balance - Yellow 9. Output Destination 24. Color Balance - Magenta 10. Margin Shift - Side 1 25. Color Balance - Cyan 11. Margin Shift - Side 2 26. Color Balance - Black 12. Border Erase - Top & Bottom 27. Original Orientation 13. Border Erase - Left & Right 28. Image Rotation 14. Center Erase 29. Rotation Direction 5 15. Original Type (Auto/Full Color)

1. Output Color Set the default of Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select from No Default, Auto, Full Color, Black, Dual Color, and Single Color. (Default is Black.)

When No Default is selected, the machine stands by for selection of the Output Color and copying cannot be started unless the Output Color is selected in the Basic Copying screen. When Black is selected in the Basic Copying screen, the copy result will be of the same image quality as Half- tone under Text & Photo. When Output Color’s Dual Color or Single Color is selected in the Basic Copying screen, the Original Type setting will be invalid.

For details about the Output Color, see “3.2 Selecting the Color to Copy - Output Color” (P. 295) in “Part 2 Copier”.

141 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

2. Single Color Set the default of Single Color in the Basic Copying screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 1 as Red.)

System Administration Mode Settings 3. Dual Color - Color Image Set the default of Color Image under Dual Color setting in the Basic Copying screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 1 as Red.)

4. Dual Color - B/W Image Set the default of Black/White Image under Dual Color setting in the Basic Copying screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as Black.) Setting Value Description 0 Black (This can be set only when Dual Color is selected.) 1Red 2Green 3Blue 4 Yellow 5 Magenta 5 6Cyan 7 Specified color currently set to Custom Color 1 8 Specified color currently set to Custom Color 2 9 Specified color currently set to Custom Color 3 10 Specified color currently set to Custom Color 4 11 Specified color currently set to Custom Color 5 12 Specified color currently set to Custom Color 6

For details about Custom Color, see “5.5.6 Custom Colors” (P. 156).

142 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

5. Reduce/Enlarge Set the default of Reduce/Enlarge in the Basic Copying screen. Set the ratio from a total of nine standard ratios: seven buttons registered to the R/E Preset buttons, 100% and Auto %. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below.

(Default is 0 as 100%.) System Administration Mode Settings Setting Value Description 0 100% 1 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 1 2 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 2 3 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 3 4 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 4 5 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 5 6 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 6 7 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 7 8Auto %

When the Paper Tray default is set to Auto, Auto % cannot be set at Reduce/Enlarge.

For details on setting the R/E Preset buttons, see “5.5.5 Reduce/Enlarge Presets” (P. 155). For details about Reduce/Enlarge, see “3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge” (P. 306) in “Part 2 Copier”. 5

6. Paper Supply Set the default of Paper Supply in the Basic Copying screen. When the Reduce/Enlarge default is set to Auto %, Auto cannot be set at Paper Tray. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as Auto.) Setting Value Description 0Auto 1Tray 1 2Tray 2 3Tray 3 4Tray 4 5 Tray 5 (Bypass)

When Tray 5 (Bypass) is set at 6. Paper Supply, and Finisher Tray is set at 9. Output Destination, the set details are canceled, and the Paper Supply setting in the Basic Copying screen is set to Auto.

For details about Paper Supply, see “3.5 Selecting the Paper to Use for Copying - Paper Supply” (P. 317) in “Part 2 Copier”.

143 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

7. 2 Sided Set the default of 2 Sided in the Added Features screen. This item can be set only on machines installed with the 2 Side Copy feature. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as 1 → 2 Sided.)

System Administration Mode Settings Setting Value Description 01 → 1 Sided 11 → 2 Sided 22 → 1 Sided 32 → 2 Sided

For details about 2 Sided, see “3.3 Making One sided/Two sided Copies - 2 Sided” (P. 299) in “Part 2 Copier”.

8. Output Set the default of Output/Stapling in the Added Features screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as Auto.) Setting Value Description 0Auto 1Collated 5 2 Uncollated

128 MB Memory kit is not installed, Uncollated operation is performed even if Collated is set.

For details about Output, see “3.6 Sorting Copies Before Output - Output” (P. 324) in “Part 2 Copier”.

144 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

9. Output Destination Set the default output destination during copying or printing. This item is displayed when the finisher or Face Up Side Tray is installed. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as Center Output Tray.)

Setting Value Description System Administration Mode Settings 0 Center Output Tray 1 Side Output Tray 2 Finisher Tray

When Tray 5 (Bypass) is set at 6. Paper Supply, and Finisher Tray is set at 9. Output Destination, the Paper Supply setting in the Basic Copying screen is set to Auto.

10. Margin Shift - Side 1 Set the default of Side 1 under Margin Shift in the Added Features screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as No Shift.) Setting Value Description 0No Shift 1 Auto Center 2 Corner Shift (Top Right) 3 Corner Shift (Bottom Right) 5 4 Corner Shift (Top Left) 5 Corner Shift (Bottom Left) 6 Corner Shift (Top Center) 7 Corner Shift (Bottom Center) 8 Corner Shift (Left Center) 9 Corner Shift (Right Center)

For details about the Margin Shift, see “3.8 Moving the Position of Images in the Copy - Margin Shift” (P. 333) in “Part 2 Copier”.

145 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

11. Margin Shift - Side 2 Set the default of Side 2 under Margin Shift in the Added Features screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 10 as Mirror Shift with Side 1.) Setting Value Description System Administration Mode Settings 0No Shift 1 Auto Center 2 Corner Shift (Top Right) 3 Corner Shift (Bottom Right) 4 Corner Shift (Top Left) 5 Corner Shift (Bottom Left) 6 Corner Shift (Top Center) 7 Corner Shift (Bottom Center) 8 Corner Shift (Left Center) 9 Corner Shift (Right Center) 10 Mirror Shift with Side 1

For details about the Margin Shift, see “3.8 Moving the Position of Images in the Copy - Margin Shift” (P. 333) in “Part 2 Copier”. 5 12. Border Erase - Top & Bottom Set the defaults for the top and bottom border erase dimensions of the document. (Default is 5 mm.) Setting Value Description 0 None 1 to 50 Set the top and bottom border erase dimensions in 1 mm increments.

For details about setting top and bottom border erase, see “3.9 Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Doc- ument - Border Erase” (P. 340) in “Part 2 Copier”.

146 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

13. Border Erase - Left & Right Set the defaults for the left and right border erase dimensions of the document. (Default is 5 mm.) Setting Value Description 0 None System Administration Mode Settings 1 to 50 Set the left and right border erase dimensions in 1-mm increments.

For details about setting left and right border erase, see “3.9 Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Docu- ment - Border Erase” (P. 340) in “Part 2 Copier”.

14. Center Erase Select the default value for the Center Erase. The Center Erase is assigned referenced to the center line of the printed image. (Default is 0 mm.) Setting Value Description 0 None 1 to 50 Set the center erase dimensions in 1-mm increments.

For details about setting center erase, see “3.9 Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document - Border Erase” (P. 340) in “Part 2 Copier”. 5 15. Original Type (Auto/Full Color) Set the default of Original Type in the Image Quality screen when Auto or Full Color is selected as the Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table in No.16. (Default is 1 as Text & Photo (Halftone).)

147 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

16. Original Type (Black) Set the default of Original Type in the Image Quality screen when Black is selected as the Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 1 as Text & Photo (Halftone).)

System Administration Mode Settings Setting Value Description 0Text* 1 Text & Photo (Halftone) 2 Text & Photo (Photograph) 3 Text & Photo (Color Copies) 4 Photo (Halftone) 5 Photo (Photograph) 6 Photo (Color Copies) 7 Other Color Originals (Map) 8 Other Color Originals (Highlighted Originals) 9 Other Color Originals (Inkjet Originals)

When Output Color’s Dual Color or Single Color is selected in the Basic Copying screen, the Original Type setting will be invalid.

For details about original types, see “3.16 Selecting the Original Type - Original Type” (P. 365) in “Part 2 5 Copier”.

17. Auto Exposure Set the default of Auto Exposure when Text & Photo, Text, and Other Color Originals is selected at Original Type in the Image Quality screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 1 as On.) Setting Value Description 0Off 1On

For details about Auto Exposure see “3.16 Selecting the Original Type - Original Type” (P. 365) in “Part 2 Copier”.

148 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

18. Lighter/Darker Set the default of Lighter/Darker under Lighter/Darker/Contrast in the Image Quality screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 3 as Normal.) Setting Value Description System Administration Mode Settings 0 Light (+3) 1 Light (+2) 2 Light (+1) 3Normal 4 Darker (+1) 5 Darker (+2) 6 Darker (+3)

For details about the Lighter/Darker, see “3.18 Adjusting Copy Density and Contrast - Lighter/Darker/Con- trast” (P. 371) in “Part 2 Copier”.

19. Contrast Set the default of Contrast under Lighter/Darker/Contrast in the Image Quality screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 2 as Normal.) Setting Value Description 5 0 Higher 1High 2Normal 3 Low 4 Lower

For details about Contrast, see “3.18 Adjusting Copy Density and Contrast - Lighter/Darker/Contrast” (P. 371) in “Part 2 Copier”.

149 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

20. Sharpness Set the default of Sharpness under Sharpness/Color Saturation in the Image Quality screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 2 as Normal.) Setting Value Description System Administration Mode Settings 0 Sharper 1Sharp 2Normal 3Soft 4 Softer

For details about Sharpness, see “3.19 Adjusting the Sharpness and Saturation of Images - Sharpness/Color Saturation” (P. 373) in “Part 2 Copier”.

21. Color Saturation Set the default of Color Saturation under Sharpness/Color Saturation in the Image Quality screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 2 as Normal.) Setting Value Description 0 Higher 1High 5 2Normal 3 Low 4 Lower

For details about Color Saturation, see “3.19 Adjusting the Sharpness and Saturation of Images - Sharpness/ Color Saturation” (P. 373) in “Part 2 Copier”.

22. Color Shift Set the default of Color Shift in the Image Quality screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 2 as Normal.) Setting Value Description 0 Coolest 1 Cool 2Normal 3Warm 4Warmest

For details about Color Shift, see “3.20 Adjusting Tone - Color Shift” (P. 375) in “Part 2 Copier”.

150 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

23. to 26. Color Balance - Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black Set the defaults of each of the density levels Low Density, Medium Density and High Density for each of Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black at Color Balance in the Image Quality screen. (Default is 0 for all of Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and Black.) System Administration Mode Settings The value set here is also applied to the Black/White and Single Color modes.

For details about Color Balance, see “3.21 Adjusting Color Balance - Color Balance” (P. 378) in “Part 2 Copier”.

27. Original Orientation Set the default of Original Orientation in the Others screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as “Head to Top”.) Setting Value Description 0 Head to Top 1 Head to Left

For details about Original Orientation, see “3.31 Specifying the Document Orientation - Original Orientation” (P. 417) in “Part 2 Copier”.

28. Image Rotation 5 Set the default of Image Rotation in the Added Features screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 1 as “On during Auto”.) Setting Value Description 0Always On 1 On during Auto 2Off

For details about Image Rotation, see “3.15 Making Copies With the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizon- tally - Image Rotation” (P. 362) in “Part 2 Copier”.

151 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

29. Rotation Direction Set the default of the Rotation Direction when Always On or On during Auto is selected at Image Rotation in the Added Features screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 1 as “Portrait Original Left Edge”.)

System Administration Mode Settings Setting Value Description 0* Auto (This item can be selected when the finisher is installed.) 1 Portrait Original - Left Edge 2 Portrait Original - Right Edge *When the finisher is installed, 0 as Auto becomes the default.

152 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

5.5.3 Copy Control

Make settings related to control of copy operations. Copy Control allows you to set the following items:

1. Auto Paper Off System Administration Mode Settings 2. Memory Full Procedure 3. Maximum Stored Pages

1. Auto Paper Off Set the tray (tray that is switched to when Auto % or Independent X-Y% is selected in Reduce/ Enlarge when Auto is selected at Paper Supply in the Basic Copying screen) when Auto at Paper Supply in the Basic Copying screen is canceled. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 1 as Select Tray 1.) Setting Value Description 1 Select Tray 1 2 Select Tray 2 3 Select Tray 3 4 Select Tray 4 5 For details about Auto Tray Switching, see “ Auto Tray Switching” (P. 29) at “2.1 Loading Paper”.

2. Memory Full Procedure Set the processing method when the hard disk runs out of memory during a job, for example, when sorting copies. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as Disabled.) Setting Value Description 0 Disabled (Discard stored documents.) 1 Enables stored data.

For details about Memory Full Procedure, see “6. Auto Job Release” in “5.4.1 Machine Clock/Timers” (P. 123) .

3. Maximum Stored Pages Set the Maximum Stored Pages when copying documents. You can set any number of pages within the range 1 to 999. Enter the number of pages on the numeric keypad. (Default is 999.)

153 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

5.5.4 Original Size Defaults

Set the document sizes to be displayed when selecting size at Original Size in the Added Features screen. Document sizes other than Auto Size Detect can be assigned to Original Size System Administration Mode Settings buttons 1 to 11. When frequently making copies of non-standard size documents, you need not enter the document size each time you make a copy if the non-standard document size is preset. When setting non-standard sizes, set the size at Enter Size within the range 15 to 432 mm for the X (horizontal) direction and 15 to 297 mm for the Y direction (vertical) in 1 mm increments. The size set at Enter Size is displayed as OOO × OOO mm.

1. to 11. Original Size Defaults 1 to 11 The following table shows the size of documents that can be set to Original Size Defaults. Select the desired button to select the desired Original Size.

A Series B Series Dis- A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , A6 , A6 , B4 , B5 , B5 , play B6 , B6 Inch Size Display 11 × 17" , 11 × 15" , 8.5 × 14" , 5 8.5 × 13" , 8.5 × 11" , 8.5 × 11" , 5.5 × 8.5" , 5.5 × 8.5"

Other Photo 2L, Photo L, 8K , 16K , 16K Enter Size Set the size in the X (horizontal) direction within the range 15 to 432 mm and in the Y (vertical) direction within the range 115 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments.

(The defaults are as follows in order from Original Size Default 1 (top left).) A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , B4 , B5 , B5 , 11 × 17" , 8.5 × 11" , 8.5 × 11"

154 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

5.5.5 Reduce/Enlarge Presets

Set the ratios that are displayed at Reduce/Enlarge Presets at Reduce/Enlarge in the Basic Copying screen. 18 different ratios can be assigned to R/E Preset 1 to 7. System Administration Mode Settings

1. to 7. R/E Preset 1 to 7 Assign the desired ratios to R/E Presets 1 to 7. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. The defaults are as follows in order from Preset ratio button 1: 3 or 50.0%, 7 or 70.7%, 8 or 81.6%, 9 or 86.6%, 10 or 115.4%, 11 or 122.5%, 13 or 141.4%. Setting Value Description 1 25.0% 2 35.3% 3 50.0% 4 57.7% 5 61.2% 6 64.7% 7 70.7% 8 81.6% 9 86.6% 5 10 115.4% 11 122.5% 12 129.4% 13 141.4% 14 163.2% 15 173.2% 16 200.0% 17 282.8% 18 400.0%

155 5.5 Copy Mode Settings

5.5.6 Custom Colors

Set user registered colors that are used in Single Color or Dual Color at Output Color. Colors can be set to Custom Color 1 to 6. System Administration Mode Settings

1. to 6. Custom Color 1 to 6 Assign Custom colors made by mixing Yellow (0 to 100), Magenta (0 to 100) and Cyan (0 to 100) to Custom Color buttons 1 to 6. (Default is 0.)

The table below shows the components of main colors. Refer to this table when registering Custom Colors. Note that the colors printed in this User Guide may differ slightly from the colors printed on color copies.

Yellow Yellow 0% Magenta Magenta Magenta Magenta 30% Magenta Magenta Magenta Magenta 0% 30% 60% 100% 0% 30% 60% 100%

Cyan Cyan 0% 0%

Cyan Cyan 5 30% 30% Cyan Cyan 60% 60%

Cyan Cyan 100% 100%

Yellow Yellow 60% Magenta Magenta Magenta Magenta 100% Magenta Magenta Magenta Magenta 0% 30% 60% 100% 0% 30% 60% 100%

Cyan Cyan 0% 0%

Cyan Cyan 30% 30%

Cyan Cyan 60% 60%

Cyan Cyan 100% 100%

Adjust registered colors so that the total of the Yellow, Magenta and Cyan percent combinations is 240% or less.

156 5.6 Network Settings

Network Settings provides two features Port Settings for setting the type of interface for the machine connected to the client, and Protocol Settings for setting communications conditions.

System Settings Close System Administration Mode Settings Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings

Print Mode Settings Scan Mode Settings

Network Settings Close

Port Settings Protocol Settings

For details on how to enter the System Administration Mode, see “5.2.1 Entering the System Administration Mode” (P. 111). For details on how to exit the System Administration Mode, see “5.2.2 Exiting the System Administration Mode” (P. 112). 5 Network settings can be made in further detail if CenterWare Internet Services is used. For details, see “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

157 5.6 Network Settings

5.6.1 Port Settings

Port Settings involves setting the interface of the machine connected to the client. Port Settings allows you to set the following items:

System Administration Mode Settings Parallel IPP SNMP LPD EtherTalk FTP Client NetWare Salutation Internet Services SMB Port 9100

Parallel Set the following items when using the parallel interface:

1. Port Status 5. Adobe Communication Protocol 2. Print Mode 6. Bi-directional Communication 3. PJL 7. Input Prime 4. Auto Eject Time

Port Status Set whether to Enabled or Disabled the parallel interface state when the power is turned on. (Default is Enabled.)

5 When the port is set to Enabled, the port state is sometimes automatically set to Disabled if there is insufficient memory. If this happens, either set the state of the unused port to Disabled, or change the assigned memory size.

Print Mode Set the method used to process print data (applied print language). (Default is Auto.) Auto...... The machine automatically judges in which print language the data received from the client is described, and prints the data appropriately matched to the data. PCL, PostScript, HP-GL/2, TIFF ...... The data received from the client is processed as each of these respective data types. PostScript is displayed when the PostScript Software® Kit is installed.

When Auto is set, that data is erased if the machine judged that the data was in a print language not installed on the machine, or the data did not conform to the targeted print language.

158 5.6 Network Settings

PJL On this machine, PJL commands that are not reliant on print language can be used. PJL commands are used for controlling print jobs, and are required when printing by a printer driver. Set whether to enable or disable PJL commands that are sent from the client. If PJL commands are used, the print language of the next data to arrive can be specified whichever print language the machine is using for processing print data at that time. Normally, set this item to Enabled. (Default is Enabled.) System Administration Mode Settings

When a print language not installed on this machine is specified by the PJL command, the data will be erased.

Auto Eject Time Set the time to wait until automatically ejecting data remaining in the machine’s memory when data is not being received. Any time can be set within the range 5 to 1275 seconds in 5-second increments. When the next data is not received within the time set here after the last data was received, the machine judges that the job has ended. (Default is 30 seconds.)

Adobe Communication Protocol Set the PostScript communications protocol. This item is displayed when the PostScript Software Kit is installed. (Default is Standard.) Standard ...... Set this when the communications protocol is ASCII format. Binary ...... Set this when the communications protocol is binary format. With some data, the data is processed for printing faster than the Standard setting. TBCP ...... Set this when the communications protocol is a mixture of ASCII format and binary format, and these formats are switched by specific control codes. 5

Set the protocol to match the format of the data output by the client’s printer driver. Normally, use at the default setting Standard. The setting here is enabled only when the Print Mode is set to PostScript.

Bi-directional Communications Set whether or not to enable Bi-directional Communications (IEEE1284) on the parallel interface. (Default is Enabled.)

Input Prime Set whether to enable or disable INPUT_PRIME control (hardware reset). When the INPUT_PRIME signal is received, reset processing is performed. (Default is Enabled.)

With some clients, the INPUT_PRIME signal is output and reset processing is performed each time printing is performed. So, the details of menu operations specified on the control panel are sometimes not reflected in the printed result. If this happens, the details of menu operations can be reflected by setting this item to Disabled.

This setting is used with HP/GL-2.

159 5.6 Network Settings

LPD Set the following items when using LPD:

Port Status Set whether to Enabled or Disabled the Port Status when the power is turned on.

System Administration Mode Settings When LPD is used, set to Enabled. (Default is Enabled.)

When the Port Status is set to Enabled, the port status is sometimes automatically set to Disabled if there is insufficient memory. If this happens, either set the status of the unused port to Disabled, or change the assigned memory size.

The IP address must be set to start the LPD port.

NetWare Set the following items when using NetWare.

Port Status Set whether to Enabled or Disabled the NetWare port status when the power is turned on. When Net- Ware is used, set to Enabled. (Default is Disabled.)

When the port status is set to Enabled, the port status is sometimes automatically set to Disabled if there is insuf- 5 ficient memory. If this happens, either set the status of the unused port to Disabled, or change the assigned memory size.

160 5.6 Network Settings

SMB Set the following items when using SMB.

Port Status Set whether to Enabled or Disabled the SMB port status when the power is turned on. (Default is Enabled.) System Administration Mode Settings

IPP Set the following items when using IPP:

Port Status Set whether to Enabled or Disabled the IPP port status when the power is turned On. When IPP is used, set to Enabled. (Default is Disabled.)

The IP address must be set to start the IPP port.

When the port status is set to Enabled, the port status is sometimes automatically set to Disabled if there is insufficient memory. If this happens, either set the status of the unused port to Disabled, or change the assigned memory size. 5 EtherTalk Set the following items when using EtherTalk. This item is displayed when the PostScript Software Kit is installed.

Port Status Set whether to Enabled or Disabled the EtherTalk port status when the power is turned on. When EtherTalk is used, set to Enabled. (Default is Disabled.)

161 5.6 Network Settings

Salutation Set the following items when using Salutation. Salutation must be set when using scanning features.

Port Status Set whether to Enabled or Disabled the Salutation port status when the power is turned on. When Salutation is used, set to Enabled. System Administration Mode Settings (Default is Disabled.)

Port 9100 Set this item when using Port 9100. Set to Enabled when using Port 9100.

Port Set whether to set the Port 9100 port status to Enabled or Disabled when the machine is turned on. (Default is Disabled.)

If the machine runs out of memory when the port status is set to Enabled, the port status is sometimes automatically set to Disabled. If this happens, either set the status of the unused port to Disabled, or change the assigned memory size.

SNMP 5 Set the following items when using SNMP. SNMP must be set when using applications for remote managing two or more printers. Printer information is managed by SNMP, and the application col- lects printer information from SNMP.

Port Status Set whether to Enabled or Disabled the SNMP port status when the power is turned on. (Default is Enabled.)

162 5.6 Network Settings

FTP Client Set the following items when using FTP Client. The FTP Client must be set when using CentreWare Scan Services (option).

Port Status Set whether to Enabled or Disabled the FTP Client port status when the power is turned on. When System Administration Mode Settings FTP Client is used, set to Enabled. (Default is Disabled.)

Internet Services (CentreWare Internet Services) Set whether or not to use Internet services.

Port Status When Enabled is set, CentreWare Internet Services can be used to display the machine status or job status, or change machine settings via a Web browser. (Default is Enabled.)

When the port status is set to Enabled, the port status is sometimes automatically set to Disabled if there is insufficient memory. If this happens, either set the status of the unused port to Disabled, or change the assigned memory size. The IP addresses of both the client and the machine are required to start up Internet services. 5

163 5.6 Network Settings

5.6.2 Protocol Settings

Protocol Settings is a feature for setting the various conditions required for communications. Protocol Settings allows you to set the following items: System Administration Mode Settings

1. Ethernet Board Setting 4. TCP/IP - Subnet Mask 2. TCP/IP - Get IP Address 5. TCP/IP - Gateway Address 3. TCP/IP - IP Address 6. TCP/IP - IP Add. for Download 7. TCP/IP - IP Filter

Display of the Current Settings for TCP/IP - IP Address, TCP/IP - Subnet Mask, and TCP/IP - Gateway Address differs according to the network environment you are using.

Ethernet Board Setting Set the baud rate and connector type on the Ethernet interface. (Default is Auto(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX).) Auto(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T is automatically selected. 100BASE-TX Select this when fixing Ethernet to 100BASE-TX for use. 10BASE-T 5 Select this when fixing Ethernet to 10BASE-T for use. When the token ring is implemented, the following items will be displayed.

1. Token Ring - Transmit Rate Set the transmission rate for the token ring. (Default is 4 as Auto.) 2. Token Ring - Max Packet Size Set the maximum packet size for the token ring. (Default is 1500 as 1500Bytes.) 3. Token Ring - Source Routing Set the source routing for the token ring. (Default is 0 as Off.)

164 5.6 Network Settings

TCP/IP

Get IP Address Set whether to automatically acquire or manually specify the information (IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address) required for TCP/IP from a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server, a BOOTP server or a RARP server. For details about manually set addresses, consult your

network administrator. System Administration Mode Settings (Default is DHCP server.)

The IP Address setting screen is displayed when DHCP server or BOOTP server is changed to Manual. Manu- ally set the IP address in this screen.

IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address These items are used to confirm the automatically acquired address or to manually set addresses. Enter addresses in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. Specify the IP address and gateway address within the range 0 to 255. Note, however, that 224 and 225.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set. Specify the subnet mask by a combination of the numbers 0, 128, 192, 224, 248, 252, and 255. Note that 0 cannot be set in the middle of a subnet mask. If you do not wish to set the gateway address, enter “0.0.0.0”.

When the IP Address is set, the Subnet Mask and Gateway Address can be set. Setting an erroneous IP Address can adversely affect the entire network. Set the Gateway Address only when it must be clearly indicated. The Gateway Address need not be set in environments where it is set dynamically. IP Address for Downloading 5 Set the IP address that is required for downloading software upgrades for this machine by the firm- ware utility. Enter addresses in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. xxx stands for any numerical value within the range 0 to 255. Note, however, that 224 and 225.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set.

Setting an erroneous IP Address can adversely affect the entire network.

IP Filter Set whether or not to restrict acceptance of printing from the LPD protocol by the IP address. When On is set, only printing from registered IP addresses is accepted. (Default is Off.)

This setting is disabled when the accepted IP Address is not set even if On is set.

For details on setting restricted IP Addresses, see “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Inter- net Services)” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

165 5.7 Print Mode Settings

Printer Settings involve setting the following items:

Memory size for each interface Others for setting the effective printing area and the paper substitute feature

System Administration Mode Settings System Settings Close

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings

Print Mode Settings Scan Mode Settings

Print Mode Settings Close

Allocate Memory Others

5 For details on how to enter and exit the System Administration Mode, see “5.2 Entering and Exiting the System Administration Mode” (P. 111). Network settings can be made in further detail if CenterWare Internet Services is used. For details, see “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

166 5.7 Print Mode Settings

5.7.1 Allocate Memory

Allocate Memory involves setting the size of receive buffer memory (where data sent from the client is temporarily stored) for each interface. Allocate Memory allows you to set the following items: System Administration Mode Settings

1. PCL5e Memory 6. Receiving Buffer - NetWare 2. PostScript Memory 7. Receiving Buffer - SMB Spool 3. HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory 8. Receiving Buffer - IPP Spool 4. Receiving Buffer - Parallel 9. Receiving Buffer - EtherTalk 5. Receiving Buffer - LPD Spool 10. Receiving Buffer - Port 9100

With LPD, SMB and IPP, set whether or not to spool to memory, where to spool to when spooling is enabled, and the assigned memory size when spooling to memory (LPD and SMB only). The size of the receive buffer can be changed according to the current state of use and your particular requirements. If the receive buffer size is increased, clients supporting each of the respective interfaces are sometimes resolved more quickly. The maximum value that can be set changes according to the amount of remaining free memory.

When the memory size is changed, memory is reset, and all data currently stored in each memory 5 area is erased. Memory assignments exceeding the total memory size are not possible. If the setting values exceed the size of mounted memory when the power is turned on, the values are automatically adjusted by the system. For details about memory assignments, see “1.5 Memory Allocation” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

When the port is set to Disabled, each of the corresponding items is not displayed. Depending on the amount of data sent from the client, the client resolution time sometimes does not change even if memory is increased.

PCL5e Memory Specify the size of memory used by PCL5e. Set any size within the range 2.50 to 32.00MB in 0.25MB increments. (Default is 5.00 MB.)

PostScript Memory

Specify the size of memory used by PostScript. This item is displayed when the PostScript® Soft- ware Kit is installed. Set any size within the range 8.00 to 32.00 MB in 0.25 MB increments. The maximum value that can be set changes according to the amount of remaining free memory. (Default is 16.00 MB.)

167 5.7 Print Mode Settings

HP - GL/2 Auto Layout Memory Specify the size of memory used for HP-GL/2 Set any size within the range 64 to 5120 KB in 32 KB increments. The maximum value that can be set changes according to the amount of remaining free memory. (Default is 64 KB.) System Administration Mode Settings Receive Buffer - Parallel Set the receive buffer on the parallel interface. Set any size within the range 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments. (Default is 64 KB.)

Receive Buffer - LPD Off Spooling is not performed. While LPD printing from a certain client is being processed, data cannot be received on the same interface from other clients. Set the memory size of LPD-exclusive receive buffer within 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments. The default memory size is 256 KB. Memory Spooling is performed. Memory is used as the receive buffer for spooling. When you have selected this parameter setting, set the size of the receive buffer memory for spooling within the range 512 KB to 32.00 MB in 0.25 MB increments. The default memory size is 1.00 MB. Print data larger than the memory size set here cannot be received. In this case, select Hard Disk or Off. Hard Disk Spooling is performed. The hard disk is used as the receive buffer for spooling. 5 (Default is Off.) Receive Buffer - NetWare Set the receive buffer for NetWare. Set any size within the range 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments. (Default is 256 KB.)

Receive Buffer - SMB Off Spooling is not performed. While SMB printing from a certain client is being processed, data cannot be received on the same interface from other clients. Set the memory size of SMB-exclusive receive buffer within 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments. The default memory size is 256 KB. Memory Spooling is performed. Memory is used as the receive buffer for spooling. When you have selected this parameter setting, set the size of the receive buffer memory for spooling within the range 512 KB to 32.00 MB in 0.25 MB increments. The default memory size is 1.00 MB. Print data larger than the memory size set here cannot be received. In this case, select Hard Disk or Off. Hard Disk Spooling is performed. The hard disk is used as the receive buffer for spooling. (Default is Off.)

168 5.7 Print Mode Settings

Receive Buffer - IPP Off Spooling is not performed. While IPP printing from a certain client is being processed, data cannot be received on the same interface from other clients. Set the memory size of IPP-exclusive receive buffer within 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments.

The default memory size is 256 KB. System Administration Mode Settings Hard Disk Spooling is performed. The hard disk is used as the receive buffer for spooling. (Default is Off.)

Receive Buffer - EtherTalk Set the receive buffer for EtherTalk. Set any size within the range 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments. (Default is 256 KB.)

Receive Buffer - Port 9100 Set the receive buffer for Port 9100. Set any size within the range 64 to 1024 KB in 32 KB increments. (Default is 256 KB.)

169 5.7 Print Mode Settings

5.7.2 Others (Print Mode Settings)

Others is for making printer-related settings. The following items can be set at Others:

System Administration Mode Settings 1. Print Area 3. Banner Sheet 2. Substitute Tray 4. Banner Sheet Tray

1. Print Area Set whether or not to extend the printing area. (Default is Normal.)

2. Substitute Tray Set whether or not to switch to paper loaded in a different tray and print on that paper when the tray selected at Auto Tray Switching runs out of paper. To swap with other paper, specify the size of the paper. Display Message Displays the paper supply message without swapping with other paper. Use Larger Size Swap with paper of the next size of paper larger than the currently selected size, and prints at 100%. Use Nearest Size Swap with a size of paper nearest to the currently selected size and prints on that paper. Printed images are sometimes automatically reduced in size as necessary. 5 (Default is Display Message.)

If the paper size is specified by the client, the client setting is given priority.

3. Banner Sheet Set whether or not to output copies with a separator sheet (Banner Sheet) attached to distinguish output print jobs. When outputting a banner sheet, you can select from Start Sheet (before the print job), End Sheet (after the print job), and Start Sheet & End Sheet (before and after the print job). (Default is Off.)

Banner sheets are not stapled when the staple feature has been set. Banner sheets are added to meters when they are output.

4. Banner Sheet Tray Select the tray to be used for the banner sheet from Tray 1 to Tray 5 (Bypass). (Default is Tray 1.)

170 5.8 Scan Mode Settings

Settings made here are enabled on scanner features.

System Settings Close

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings System Administration Mode Settings

Print Mode Settings Scan Mode Settings

Scan Mode Settings Close

Basic Scanning Scan Defaults Scan Size Presets Defaults

Output Size Reduce/Enlarge Others Defaults Presets

For details on how to enter and exit the System Administration Mode, see “5.2 Entering and Exiting the System Administration Mode” (P. 111). Scanner settings can be made in further detail if CenterWare Internet Services is used. For details, see “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). 5

171 5.8 Scan Mode Settings

5.8.1 Basic Scanning Presets

You can change the ratios to be assigned to buttons that are displayed at Reduce/Enlarge in the Scan Option screen. Setting frequently used scan ratios frees you from unnecessarily setting the scan System Administration Mode Settings ratio each time you scan a document. The following items can be set on Basic Scanning Presets:

1. Reduce/Enlarge - 2nd Button 2. Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd Button 3. Reduce/Enlarge - 4th Button

Reduce/Enlarge 2nd to 4th Button Set the ratios to be displayed for the 2nd to 4th trays from the top down for each of the feature buttons displayed at Reduce/Enlarge in the Scan Option screen. Select available ratios from those currently registered to the Reduce/Enlarge Presets buttons. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Defaults are as follows: 2 for the 2nd button from the top, 4 for the 3rd button, and 7 for the 4th button.) Setting Value Description 1 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 1 2 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 2 5 3 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 3 4 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 4 5 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 5 6 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 6 7 Ratio currently set to R/E Preset 7

For details on the R/E Preset buttons, see “5.8.5 Reduce/Enlarge Presets” (P. 180). For details about how to set the Reduce/Enlarge buttons, see “3.3.7 Reduce/Enlarge” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

172 5.8 Scan Mode Settings

5.8.2 Scan Defaults

Set the defaults for scanner features. The machine returns to the defaults set here when the power is turned on, when the machine exits the Power Saver mode, or when the Clear All button is pressed. Setting frequently used features and values to their defaults frees you from unnecessary operations each time System Administration Mode Settings you perform a specific operation. Scan Defaults allows you to set the following items:

1. Output Color 7. Original Orientation 2. Scan Resolution 8. Original Type 3. Mixed Size Originals 9. Lighter/Darker 4. Border Erase - Top & Bottom 10. Contrast 5. Border Erase - Left & Right 11. Auto Exposure 6. Center Erase

1. Output Color Set the default of Output Color in the Basic Scanning screen. Select one of Auto, Full Color, Grayscale or Black/White to select. (Default is Black.)

For details about the Output Color, see “3.3.1 Output Color” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User 5 Guide (Printer/Scanner).

2. Scan Resolution Set the default of Scan Resolution in the Basic Scanning screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as 200 dpi.) Setting Value Description 0 200 dpi 1 300 dpi 2 400 dpi 3 600 dpi

When the resolution is set to 3 or 600 dpi, at least 256 MB of memory is required on this machine to scan at Full Color for the Output Color.

For details about the Scan Resolution, see “3.3.2 Scan Resolution” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

173 5.8 Scan Mode Settings

3. Mixed Size Originals Set the default of Mixed Size Originals in the Scan Options screen. Set whether or not to use the mixed size originals feature when using the DADF for scanning. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as Off.)

System Administration Mode Settings Setting Value Description 0 Off 1On

For details about mixed size originals, see “3.3.5 Mixed Size Originals” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

4. Border Erase - Top & Bottom Set the defaults for the top and bottom edge erase dimensions. (Default is 2 mm.) Setting Value Description 0 None 1 to 50 Set the top and bottom edge erase dimensions in 1 mm increments.

For details about setting top and bottom edge erase, see “3.3.9 Border Erase” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User 5 Guide (Printer/Scanner). 5. Border Erase - Left & Right Set the defaults for the left and right edge erase dimensions. (Default is 2 mm.) Setting Value Description 0 None 1 to 50 Set the left and right edge erase dimensions in 1 mm increments.

For details about setting left and right edge erase, see “3.3.9 Border Erase” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

174 5.8 Scan Mode Settings

6. Center Erase Select the default value for the center erase. The center erase is assigned referenced to the center line of the printed image. (Default is 0 mm.) Setting Value Description System Administration Mode Settings 0 None 1 to 50 Set the center erase dimensions in 1 mm increments.

For details about setting center erase, see “3.3.9 Border Erase” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

7. Original Orientation Set the orientation of the document when it is scanned. Judgment as to the left, right, top and bottom of the document changes by the setting made here.When 0 of Head to Top is set, the document will be saved rotated by 90 degrees at all times. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 1 as Head to Left.) Setting Value Description 0 Head to Top 1 Head to Left 5 For details about the orientation when loading documents, see “2.2.3 Document Orientation” in “Part 2 Scan- ner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

8. Original Type Set the default of Original Type in the Image Quality/File Format screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as Text.) Setting Value Description 0Text 1 Text & Photo 2Photo

For details about Original Type, see “3.3.10 Original Type” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/ Scanner).

175 5.8 Scan Mode Settings

9. Lighter/Darker Set the default of Lighter/Darker under Lighter/Darker/Contrast in the Image Quality/File Format screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 3 as Normal.) Setting Value Description System Administration Mode Settings 0 Lighter (+3) 1 Lighter (+2) 2 Lighter (+1) 3Normal 4 Darker (+1) 5 Darker (+2) 6 Darker (+3)

For details about Lighter/Darker, see “3.3.11 Lighter/Darker/Contrast” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

10. Contrast Set the default of Contrast under Lighter/Darker/Contrast in the Image Quality/File Format screen. Set the contrast for the document to be scanned. The contrast setting is enabled when Output Color is not set to Black. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. 5 (Default is 2 as Normal.) Setting Value Description 0 Higher 1High 2Normal 3 Low 4 Lower

For details about contrast, see “3.3.11 Lighter/Darker/Contrast” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

176 5.8 Scan Mode Settings

11. Auto Exposure Set the default of Auto Exposure in the Image Quality/File Format screen. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as Off.) Setting Value Description System Administration Mode Settings 0Off 1On

For details about Remove Background Color, see “3.3.12 Auto Exposure” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

177 5.8 Scan Mode Settings

5.8.3 Scan Size Default

Set the size at which documents are displayed at Scan Size in the Scan Options screen. Any scan size other than Auto Size Detect can be assigned to scan size buttons 1 to 11. System Administration Mode Settings Setting non-standard sizes, for example, when frequently scan non-standard size documents frees you from the need to enter the scanning size each time that you scan a document. When entering non-standard sizes, set the size at Enter Size within the range 15 to 432 mm for the X (horizontal) direction and 15 to 297 mm for the Y direction (vertical) in 1 mm increments. The size set at Enter Size is displayed as OOO x OOO.

For details about scanning sizes, see “3.3.6 Scan Size” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/ Scanner).

Scan Size 1 to 11 The following table shows the sizes that can be set to scan size defaults. Select the desired button to set the desired scan size.

A Series B Series Dis- A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , A5 , A6 , A6 , B4 , B5 , B5 , play B6 , B6 5 Inch Size Display 11 × 17" , 11 × 15" , 8.5 × 14" , 8.5 × 13" , 8.5 × 11" , 8.5 × 11" , 5.5 × 8.5" , 5.5 × 8.5"

Other Photo 2L , Photo L , 8K , 16K , 16K Enter Size Set the size in the X (horizontal) direction within the range 15 to 432 mm and in the Y (vertical) direction within the range 15 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments.

(The defaults are as follows in order from Scan Size Defaults 1 (Top Left).) A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , B4 , B5 , 11× 17" , 8.5 × 11 , 8.5 × 11" , Photo 2L , Photo L

178 5.8 Scan Mode Settings

5.8.4 Output Size Default

Set the sizes to be displayed at Output Size when selecting Auto % for scanning documents at Reduce/Enlarge in the Scan Options screen. Any output size can be assigned to output size defaults 1 to 8. Setting frequently used output size frees you from unnecessarily setting the size System Administration Mode Settings each time you scan a document.

For details about output sizes, see “3.3.7 Reduce/Enlarge” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

Output Size 1 to 8 Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Defaults are as follows in order from Output Size 1: 35 or A3 , 21 or A4 , 85 or A4 , 10 or A5 , 30 or B4 , 13 or B5 , 34 or 11 × 17" , 20 or 8.5 × 11" . Setting Setting Description Description Value Value 4 A6 73 5.5 × 8.5" 68 A6 20 8.5 × 11" 7 B6 84 8.5 × 11" 5 71 B6 28 8.5 × 13" 10 A5 29 8.5 × 14" 74 A5 33 11 × 15" 13 B5 34 11 × 17" 77 B5 31 8K 21 A4 52 16K 85 A4 116 16K 30 B4 54 Photo L (3.5 × 5") 35 A3 6 Photo 2L (5 × 7") 9 5.5 × 8.5"

179 5.8 Scan Mode Settings

5.8.5 Reduce/Enlarge Presets

Set the ratios that are displayed at Reduce/Enlarge Presets at Reduce/Enlarge in the Scan Options screen. Any ratio can be assigned to R/E preset 1 to 7 other than 100%. System Administration Mode Settings Setting frequently used scan ratios frees you from unnecessarily setting the scan ratio each time you scan a document.

For details about setting R/E Presets, see “3.3.7 Reduce/Enlarge” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

R/E Preset 1 to 7 Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (The defaults are as follows in order from the R/E Preset button 1: 3 or 50.0%, 7 or 70.7%, 8 or 81.6%, 9 or 86.6%, 10 or 115.4%, 11 or 122.4%, 13 or 141.4%.) Setting Setting Description Description Value Value 1 25.0% 10 115.4% 2 35.3% 11 122.5% 3 50.0% 12 129.4% 4 57.7% 13 141.4% 5 5 61.2% 14 163.2% 6 64.7% 15 173.2% 7 70.7% 16 200.0% 8 81.6% 17 282.8% 9 86.6% 18 400.0%

180 5.8 Scan Mode Settings

5.8.6 Others (Scan Mode Settings)

This section describes how to make other settings. Others allows you to set the following items:

1. Scan Service 5. Maximum E-mail Size System Administration Mode Settings 2. Guest Mail Transmission 6. Lighter/Darker Level 3. Memory Full Procedure 7. Contrast Level 4. Maximum Stored Pages 8. Color Space

1. Scan Service Set whether or not to use scanner features. Select Disabled or Enabled. (Default is Enabled.)

2. Guest Mail Transmission This item can be set when Mail Scan is installed. Set whether or not unauthorized users are allowed to send mail. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 or Disabled.) Setting Value Description 0 Sending of mail by unauthorized users is disabled. 1 Sending of mail by unauthorized users is enabled. 5

When the Guest mode is used, available features are limited. For details, see “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

3. Memory Full Procedure Set the processing method when the scanner runs out of memory during scanning of documents. Set whether or not to enable documents stored so far. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 or Disabled.) Setting Value Description 0 Disabled (Discard stored documents.) 1 Enables stored data.

4. Maximum stored pages Set the maximum number of pages stored to memory when scanning documents. You can set any number of pages within the range 1 to 999. Enter the number of pages on the numeric keypad. (Default is 999.)

181 5.8 Scan Mode Settings

5. Maximum E-mail Size This item can be set when Mail Scan is installed. Set the maximum data size when sending mail by Mail Scan. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 2MB.) System Administration Mode Settings Setting Value Description 0 Unlimited 1 to 99 Set the maximum data size in 1 MB increments.

6. Lighter/Darker Level Set the default density to be assigned to Light to Darker of Lighter/Darker under Lighter/Darker/ Contrast in the Image Quality/File Format screen. Set the density within the range -100 to +100 in 1 increments. Set Light (+3) to Lighter(+1) within the range -100 to -1, and Darker (+1) to Darker (+3) within the range 1 to 100.Normal or 0 cannot be changed. Set so that values increase over Lighter (+3) to Darker (+3). Select the scanning density using buttons on the left, and then set the values using buttons on the right. (Defaults are as follows from the top down -92, -61, -31, 0, 1, 2, 3.)

For details about scanning density, see “3.3.11 Lighter/Darker/Contrast” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User 5 Guide (Printer/Scanner). 7. Contrast Level Set the default density to be assigned to Lower to Higher of Contrast under Lighter/Darker/Contrast in the Image Quality/File Format screen. The contrast setting is enabled when Output Color is not set to Black. Set the density within the range -100 to +100 in 1 increments. Set Lower to Slightly Lower within the range -100 to -1, and Slightly Higher to Higher within the range 1 to 100.Normal or 0 cannot be changed. Set so that values increase over Lower to Higher. Select the contrast using buttons on the left, and then set the values using buttons on the right. (Defaults are as follows from the top down 50, 25, 0, -25, -50.)

For details about contrast, see “3.3.11 Lighter/Darker/Contrast” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

182 5.8 Scan Mode Settings

8. Color Space Set the default color space. Enter the setting values using the numeric keypad referring to the table below. (Default is 0 as sRGB.) Setting Value Description System Administration Mode Settings 0 Output by sRGB. 1 Output by device RGB. The file format is limited to TIFF (with ICC profile). Profiles are used to enable output at tones close to those of the machine.

You can find profile data in the Driver’s CD-ROM.

183 Registering/Changing 5.9 Mailboxes

Mailboxes for storing scanned documents can be registered and changed. Documents registered to Mailboxes are imported to the application on the personal computer using the scanner driver. Up to 200 Mailboxes can be registered.

System Settings Close System Administration Mode Settings System Settings Setup Menu System Administrator Password

Auditron Administration

Setup Menu Close

Mailbox

For more details on scan operations and registering/changing settings to mailboxes, see “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). 5 On models installed with a fax feature, Speed Dial Setup and other fax-related settings can also be made. For details about fax operations, see the User Guide (Facsimile).

Mailbox Name Set the name to be given to the mailboxes. Names up to 10 characters long can be set using alphanumerics and symbols.

For details on how to enter characters, see “ How to Enter Text” (P. 110) at “5.1 Overview of System Administration Mode” (P. 108).

Password Passwords can be set to mailboxes. Select either On or Off. When On is selected, you can set a password up to 20 digits long. When Off is selected, you can set mailboxes without a password. (Default is On.)

184 5.9 Registering/Changing Mailboxes

Check Password When a password is set, restrictions can be set to the operations of writing to and reading from mailboxes. For Save (Write), a password must be entered when selecting a mailbox. For Print/Delete (Read), a password must be entered when printing or deleting a mailbox.

For Always, a password must be entered for both of the above operations. System Administration Mode Settings (Default is Always.)

Delete/Save Documents Set whether or not to delete documents when they are retrieved or printed from a mailbox. For Save, documents are saved. For Delete, documents are deleted. (Default is Delete.)

185 6Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

6.1 Overview of the Totals Management Feature ...... 188 6.1.1 Authentication ...... 189 6.1.2 Overview of Auditron Administration...... 190 6.1.3 Managed Functions and Features ...... 191 6.1.4 Starting Setting of Totals Management...... 194 6.2 Confirming the Totals Management Feature...... 196 6.3 Registering/Confirming Account Data...... 198 6.3.1 Setting the Password/Account Name ...... 198 6.3.2 Setting Color Mode/Maximum Number...... 201 6.3.3 Confirming the Total Number for Each Account...... 203 6.4 Deleting/Resetting Total Data ...... 205 6.4.1 Deleting/Resetting Data by Account ...... 205 6.4.2 Deleting the Data of All Accounts ...... 207 6.4.3 System Administrator Confirmation of Total Number...... 208 6.5 Confirming the Total Number of Copied/Printed Pages ...... 210 6.5.1 Confirming the Number of Copied/Printed Pages by Meters ...... 210 6.5.2 Confirming the Number of Copied/Printed Pages by Meter Reports ...... 213 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists...... 219 6.6.1 Types of Reports/Lists ...... 219 6.6.2 Printing Reports/Lists ...... 241 Overview of the Totals 6.1 Management Feature

When the totals management feature is active, only the user with registered accounts can use this machine. In the above situation, you need to enter the password set to each department (account) in order to use this machine. This feature can be used to limit copying to only specific accounts (users). The password, account name (user name), color mode restrictions and maximum number can be set to accounts. Moreover, the number of copied sheets can be totaled into every registered account (user). A total management feature is set up in the following procedures.

Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Step1 Confirming the total management feature

“6.2 Confirming the Totals Management Feature” (P. 196)

Step2 Registering accounts data

“6.3 Registering/Confirming Account Data” (P. 198)

Set the totals management feature in the System Administration Mode. The totals management feature cannot be activated if the System Administrator’s password is not set.

System Settings Close

System Settings Setup Menu System Administrator Password

Auditron Administration 6 Auditron Administration Close

Create/Check Accounts

System Administrator Delete/Reset Auditron Mode Data Account Data

When the Copylyzer (option) is used, you can manage, number of FAX communications made, number of documents sent, and other items. For details, see the User Guide (Facsimile).

For details about how to enter and exit the System Administration Mode, see “5.2 Entering and Exiting the Sys- tem Administration Mode” (P. 111). For details about management/using of Copylyzer, see the User Guide of Copylyzer.

188 6.1 Overview of the Totals Management Feature

6.1.1 Authentication

If the Auditron Administration mode is set, you can use either one of the two available authentication methods for using the machine. One method is to manage the authentication through the use of passwords, and the other method is to use the Copylyzer Cards (option).

Using Password Authentication Managing Totals and Outputting Reports To be able to use this feature, user accounts have to be created beforehand. The necessary information includes the Account Name/User name and the password. The user has to enter the correct password to use the functions of the machine, such as the Copy, Scan, Mail Scan, and Sending Fax functions. Print jobs and Fax jobs sent through the computer directly also have to be authenticated before they are accepted by the machine. The account information (Account Name/User name and password) set up on the computer must match the information registered in the machine.

Using Card Authentication If the Copylyzer Auditron Administration is set up on the machine, the user must insert a card to be able to use the various functions of the machine. If a print or direct fax job is sent to the machine through the network when there is no card inserted in the machine, the job is stored in the machine and not executed until a card is inserted. There are two types of card management: Level 1...... All cards are authenticated Level 2...... Only cards whose department number is registered in the machine are authenticated. To use Level 2 card authentication, insert the card into the machine and enter the department number (number stored in the card). Using this information, the machine is able to determine whether the user is authorized to use the machine, and if so, the functions that can be specified (e.g., color or black-and-white copying). 6

Contact our Customer Support Center for information before attaching the Copylyzer to the machine. See the Copylyzer user’s guide for details on the management and use of the respective products. Department numbers are preset in the cards. If the Copylyzer Auditron Administration is set up on the machine, management through the use of registered cards becomes ineffective and printing is possible with any card. Copylyzer cards are authenticated as usual.

189 6.1 Overview of the Totals Management Feature

6.1.2 Overview of Auditron Administration

This section describes the procedure for setting the Auditron mode.

Selecting Totals 6.4 Setting the Totals Management Mode Management Feature

Managing Totals and Outputting Reports No Auditron Yes Administration

Print/Direct Fax Function/ Copy/Scan /E-mail/Fax Service

Password Card Authentication type

Level 2 Level 1 Level

Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 4 Mode 3

Selecting Totals Management Mode Mode 1 Auditron Administration No : Disable all the functions/services Mode 2 Password Administration : Enable Password Administration Mode 3 Card Administration (Level 1) : Disable functions/services (Copy/Scan/E-mail/Fax) Mode 4 Card Administration (Level 2) : Enable functions/services (Copy/Scan/E-mail/Fax) 6 *Print and Direct Fax are always set by password authentication.

Print User (Set by using CentreWare)

On-line Help Account Registry Account information Account Name, Account number On-line Help 6.2 Registering/Confirming Account Data

Account Registry Data used by FAX Account Administration

Account Name, Account number • Charge Data Registry • Speed Dial time unit 6.2 Registering/Confirming Account Data User Guide (Facsimile)

No Administration Password Card Administration Card Administration Setting Administration Level 2 Level 1

190 6.1 Overview of the Totals Management Feature

Print user restrictions (settings by the CentreWare) Print user restrictions When setting up total management of a print, it sets up by CentreWare. Non-account Print Jobs without account information (jobs generated by the printer driver) exist as print jobs. This happens when an application that has generated data such as HPGL and EPC/P sends it to the machine to be printed directly, as well as e-mail that is printed. This machine cannot accept these as print jobs, however permission to print them can

be arranged through CentreWare. Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

For details on the way of settings, see “6.2 Confirming the Totals Management Feature” (P. 196). For details on CentreWare Internet Services, see the print driver’s On-line Help. Account Information (Driver settings) To be able to send print or direct fax jobs to the machine, it is necessary to first set up the computer with the correct account information. You will not be able to send jobs to the machine if the correct department name (user name) and password are not set up in the printer. The machine will only print or fax jobs that are sent from computers that are set up with a department name (user name) and password that are registered in its system.

For instructions on how to set up the print driver, see the print driver’s On-line Help.

6.1.3 Managed Functions and Features

This section describes the functions and features that can be managed through 6 password authentication and card authentication. Functions available with password authentication The functions and features that can be managed through password authentication are as follows.

: Can be managed by the Auditron Administration mode × : Cannot be managed by the Auditron Administration mode

Restrictions Maximum Total Function/Service Account Output Number of *3 Count Information*1 Color*2 Pages Print Copy Scan ××× Mail Scan ×××

191 6.1 Overview of the Totals Management Feature

: Can be managed by the Auditron Administration mode × : Cannot be managed by the Auditron Administration mode

Restrictions Maximum Total Function/Service Account Output Number of *3 Count Information*1 Color*2 Pages

Fax/Internet Fax *4 ××× Direct Fax ××× Managing Totals and Outputting Reports *1 Account Information is common for all functions and services. For details on the way of settings, see “6.3.1 Setting the Password/Account Name” (P. 198). *2 You can set the limits of the color modes that can be used. For details on how to do the settings, see “6.3.2 Setting Color Mode/Maximum Number” (P. 201). *3 This feature prevents operation beyond the preset limit of the number of pages that can be used. For details on how to do the settings, see “6.3.2 Setting Color Mode/Maximum Number” (P. 201). *4 Jobs that are not specified by the user, such as print jobs for received faxes and Internet faxes, cannot be managed by password authentication.

Even if the Auditron Administration mode is set, reports and lists are not limited and can be printed. Functions available with card authentication This section describes the functions and features that can be managed through card authentication copylyzer as follows.

: Can be managed by the Auditron Administration mode × : Cannot be managed by the Auditron Administration mode

Restrictions Maximum Total Function/Service Level Account Output Number of 6 *3 Count Information*1 Color*2 Pages Print 1 2 ×××× Copy 1 *4 2 *5 Scan 1 ××× 2 ××× Mail Scan 1 ××× 2 ××× Fax/Internet Fax 1 *6 ×××*7 2 ×× *8

*1 Account Information is common for all functions and services. For details on the way of settings, see “6.3.1 Setting the Password/Account Name” (P. 198). *2 You can set the limits of the color modes that can be used. For details on how to do the settings, see “6.3.2 Setting Color Mode/Maximum Number” (P. 201).

192 6.1 Overview of the Totals Management Feature

*3 This feature prevents operation beyond the preset limit of the number of pages that can be used. For details on how to do the settings, see “6.3.2 Setting Color Mode/Maximum Number” (P. 201). *4 The total copy count for jobs specified through the Copylyzer can be categorized by modes, such as the Color mode and the Copy Paper Size mode. See the Copylyzer user manual for details. *5 Only jobs in the Output Color are added to the total count. *6 Jobs that are not specified by the user, such as print jobs for received faxes and Internet faxes, cannot be managed by password authentication. *7 Only prints jobs, such as those for received faxes, are added to the total count.

*8 Jobs that are not specified by the user, such as print jobs for received faxes and Internet faxes, are added to Managing Totals and Outputting Reports the Fax total count.

Even if the Auditron Administration mode is set, reports and lists are not limited and can be printed. Fax jobs that are sent directly from the computer are not limited when the Copylyzer card is controlling them, and the machine can receive them. Management through the use of registered cards is not possible and printing is possible with any card. Copylyzer cards are authenticated as usual.

Using the print totals management feature To use the print totals management feature, set it on Print Auditron on the Prop- erties tab in CentreWare. The items set here, become common settings that are saved on the machine used by printer users.

See the printer driver’s On-line Help for information about CentreWare.

193 6.1 Overview of the Totals Management Feature

Print Auditron To set the print totals management feature, select the Enable box.

Non-account Print Jobs without account information (jobs generated by printer drivers other than those manufactured by Fuji Xerox) exist as print jobs. This happens when an application that has generated data such as HPGL and EPC/P sends it to the machine to be printed directly, as well as e-mail that is printed. This machine Managing Totals and Outputting Reports cannot accept these as print jobs, however permission to print them can be arranged through CentreWare. To give print permission to unauthenticated jobs, select the Enable box.

Account Number If an account number (user number, password) is set for when sending a job, select Edit, enter the account number and password that have been previously registered in the machine.

6.1.4 Starting Setting of Totals Management

Make the various totals management settings in the Auditron Administration screen in the System Administration Mode. The following shows the procedure for displaying the Auditron Administration screen.

6 Procedure

The System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed when a System Administrator’s password has been set. When the System Administrator’s password has not been set, and you press the Password/System Settings button, the System Settings screen is displayed. When the System Administrator - Password Entry screen is displayed, enter the password, see “5.2.1 Entering the System Administration Mode” (P. 111).

194 6.1 Overview of the Totals Management Feature

2 Select Auditron Administration. System Settings Close

System Setup Menu System Settings Administrator's Password

Auditron Administration Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

The Auditron Administration screen is displayed. 3 Make the various totals management settings in this Auditron Adminis- tration screen show bellow.

Auditron Administration Close

Create/Check Accounts

System Administrator Delete/Reset Auditron Mode Data Account Data

Items displayed in this screen differ according to the optional features installed on the machine. 6

195 Confirming the Totals 6.2 Management Feature

You can set whether or not to activate the totals management feature. When the totals management feature is activated, the password entry screen is displayed. After pressing the Password/System Settings button on the control panel, enter the previously registered account password (or card account number when the machine is connected to a Copylyzer), and start using the machine. When the scan feature and/or fax feature are installed, it can be set so that the totals management feature is valid for these features as well. If the System Administrator’s password is currently set, the totals management feature can Managing Totals and Outputting Reports be set.

Procedure

1 Display the Auditron Administration screen.

For details about how to display the Auditron Administration screen, see “6.1.4 Starting Setting of Totals Management” (P. 194). 2 Select Auditron Mode. Auditron Administration Close

Create/Check Accounts

System Administrator Delete/Reset Auditron Mode 6 Data Account Data The Auditron Mode screen is displayed. 3 Select On, and select Save.

Auditron Mode Cancel Save

Copy Service Scan Service E-mail Service

Off Off Off

On On On

The screen returns to the Auditron Administration screen. To continue registering account data, go to “6.3 Registering/Confirming Account Data” (P. 198).

The machine is sometimes restarted after setting. The items that are displayed vary according to the type of installed service. When On is selected at Mail, the password must be entered to use the Mail Scan feature.

196 6.2 Confirming the Totals Management Feature

For details about the Scan and Mail Scan features, see “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). For details about the fax feature, see the User Guide (Facsimile). 4 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed. Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

197 Registering/Confirming 6.3 Account Data

This section describes how to register or confirm account data. If account data is set to a specified account No., that account can be registered as an account permitted to use the machine. The password, account name (user name), color mode restrictions and maximum number can be set to accounts.

Accounts that are registered are used in common when the Copylyzer feature is used and also for account management of FAX operations. Managing Totals and Outputting Reports You can manage the number of fax communication made, the number of documents sent, and other information with the Copylyzer (option).

6.3.1 Setting the Password/Account Name

This section describes the procedure for registering new account data. Up to 1,000 items of account data can be registered. When using the Copylyzer (option), enter the account number registered to the card. When the Copylyzer is in use, the account number of the card must be registered to the machine to limit and total copies for each card that is inserted.

Accounts that are registered are used in common when the Copylyzer feature is used and also for account management of FAX operations. The machine cannot be used with cards not registered with account data.

6 For details about how to set the maximum number of copies and color mode restrictions, see “6.3.2 Setting Color Mode/Maximum Number” (P. 201).

The following items can be set. Password You can set any password within the range 4 to 12 digits. Any number from 0 to 999999999999 (12 digits) can be used. Account number When the Copylyzer (option) is in use, enter the account number beforehand currently registered to the registration card. Account numbers from 1 to 6,039 (4 digits) is set for the Copylyzer. Account name Any account name up to 31 characters long can be entered using alphanumerics and symbols.

Procedure

1 The Auditron Administration screen is displayed.

198 6.3 Registering/Confirming Account Data

For details about how to display the Auditron Administration screen, see “6.1.4 Starting Setting of Totals Management” (P. 194). 2 Select Create/Check Accounts.

Auditron Administration Close

Create/Check Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Accounts

System Administrator Delete/Reset Auditron Mode Data Account Data

The Create/Check Accounts screen is displayed. 3 Select an (Not In Use) item, and select Create/Delete. Enter a 4-digit No. for the account No. using the numeric keypad on the control panel. When you have finished entering the No., the screen with the item for the entered account No. selected is automatically displayed. You can also select items by the buttons.

Create/Check Accounts Close No. Password Account Name 0001 (Not In Use) Go to 0002 (Not In Use) (0001-1000) 0003 (Not In Use) 0004 (Not In Use) 0005 (Not In Use) Create/Delete 6 The Account Number 0001-AssignPassword screen is displayed.

If you select an already set account and select the Create/Delete button, the Create/Delete screen in step 7 is displayed. 4 Enter the account password, and select Save. The password that has been set is displayed under Password.

Account Number 0001- Assign Password Cancel Save

Password

The Create/Delete screen is displayed.

199 6.3 Registering/Confirming Account Data

The password cannot be set if an identical password has already been registered to another account. Set a different password for each account. When the Copylyzer (option) is use When the Copylyzer is in use, the Account No. screen is displayed.

Account Number 0001-Account Number Cancel Save Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Account Number

5 Select Account Name. Account No. 0001- Create/Delete Close

Password Color Black/White 12345 Total Pages Printed: 0 0 Account Name (Untitled) Account Limit: 1999900 1999900

Color Access Change Reset Total Reset Account Free Access Account Limit Pages Printed

The screen for entering text is displayed. 6 Enter the account name, and select Save. 6 The display might differ according to the ROM versions.

Manual Design G Cancel Save

a b c d e f g 1 2 3 Backspace Alphanumeric h j j k l m n 4 5 6 Space

o p q r s t u 7 8 9 Shift

Symbol v w x y z 0

The screen returns to the Create/Delete screen.

The name registered in the user’s account should be “Login User Name\host name” when you have selected Use Login Name in Specify Job Owner in the Printer Driver when you are using Print Auditron. The Login User Name becomes the login name for Windows, and the host name is the host name for the personal computer. The host name is normally written in all caps. Account names up to 31 characters long can be entered. Account names can also be changed after they have been set. The password cannot be set if an identical password has already been registered to another account. Set a different password for each account.

200 6.3 Registering/Confirming Account Data

For details about how to enter characters, see “ How to Enter Text” (P. 110) at “5.1 Overview of System Administration Mode”. 7 You can confirm the account name that you set by looking under Account Name in the Create/Delete screen.

Account No. 0001- Create/Delete Close

Password Color Black/White 12345 Total Pages Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Printed: 0 0 Account Name Manual Design G Account Limit: 1999900 1999900

Color Access Change Reset Total Reset Account Free Access Account Limit Pages Printed

To continue setting color restrictions and the maximum number of copies, see “6.3.2 Setting Color Mode/Maximum Number” (P. 201). 6.3.2 Setting Color Mode/Maximum Number

Following describes the procedure for setting color mode restrictions and the maximum number to registered accounts.

The following items can be set or confirmed. Color mode restrictions You can select not to restrict color copying or B/W copying, or select B/W copying only or color copying only. In the default setting, color or B/W copying is not restricted. 6 Total number/Maximum Number The total number of copies made so far is displayed. The total number of copies can be categorized by B/W copying and color copying. The total number of copies is displayed as a number within the range 0 to 1999999. Change of Maximum number When making color copies, the maximum number of copies can be set within the range 100 to 1999900 (seven digits) Set this number in 100-page increments. When making B/W copies, the maximum number of copies can be set within the range 1000 to 1999000 (seven digits) Set this number in 1000-page increments. The defaults are 1999900 for color copies and 1999900 for B/W copies.

Procedure

1 The Auditron Administration screen is displayed.

For details about how to display the Auditron Administration screen, see “6.1.4 Starting Setting of Totals Management” (P. 194).

201 6.3 Registering/Confirming Account Data

2 Select Create/Check Accounts.

Auditron Administration Close

Create/Check Accounts

System Administrator Delete/Reset Auditron Mode Data Account Data Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

The Create/Check Accounts screen is displayed. 3 Select the account to set copy restrictions to, and select Create/Delete. Create/Check Accounts Close No. Password Account Name 0001 12345 Manual Design G Go to 0002 (Not In Use) (0001-1000) 0003 (Not In Use) 0004 (Not In Use) 0005 (Not In Use) Create/Delete

The Create/Delete screen is displayed.

To set output color control 1 Select Color Access.

Account No. 0001- Create/Delete Close

Password Color Black/White 6 12345 Total Pages Printed: 0 0 Account Name Manual Design G Account Limit: 1999900 1999900

Color Access Change Reset Total Reset Account Free Access Account Limit Pages Printed

The Color Access screen is displayed. 2 Select an available color mode, and select Save.

Account Number 0001-Color Access Cancel Save

Free Access

Black Only

The screen returns to the Create/Delete screen.

202 6.3 Registering/Confirming Account Data

To set the maximum number 1 Select Change Account Limit.

Account No. 0001- Create/Delete Close

Password Color Black/White 12345 Total Pages Printed: 0 0 Account Name Manual Design G Account Limit: 1999900 1999900

Color Access Change Reset Total Reset Account Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Free Access Account Limit Pages Printed

The Account Limit screen is displayed. 2 Enter the maximum number of color copies using the numeric keypad, and select Next.

Account Number 0001- Account Limit Cancel Save

Color Black/White (100-1,999,900) (1,000-1,999,900) 10000 1000

Enter in units Enter in units of 100 copies of 1,000 copies Next

The cursor moves to the field for entering the B/W setting value. 3 Enter the maximum number of Black/White copies using the numeric keypad, and select Save. The screen returns to the Create/Delete screen. 6 6.3.3 Confirming the Total Number for Each Account

The following describes the procedure for confirming the total number of color and B/W made so far for each registered account.

Procedure

1 The Auditron Administration screen is displayed.

For details about how to display the Auditron Administration screen, see “6.1.4 Starting Setting of Totals Management” (P. 194).

203 6.3 Registering/Confirming Account Data

2 Select Create/Check Accounts.

Auditron Administration Close

Create/Check Accounts

System Administrator Delete/Reset Auditron Mode Data Account Data Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

The Create/Check Accounts screen is displayed. 3 Select the item you want to confirm for the account, and select Create/ Delete. Enter a 4-digit No. for the account No. using the numeric keypad on the control panel. When you have finished entering the No., the screen with the item for the entered account No. selected is automatically displayed. You can also select items by the buttons.

Create/Check Accounts Close No. Password Account Name 0001 12345 Manual Design G Go to 0002 (Not In Use) (0001-1000) 0003 (Not In Use) 0004 (Not In Use) 0005 (Not In Use) Create/Delete

The Create/Delete screen is displayed. 4 You can confirm the Total Pages Printed, Account Limit, and Color 6 Access in this screen.

Account No. 0001- Create/Check Close

Password Color Black/White 12345 Total Pages Printed: 0 0 Account Name Manual Design G Account Limit: 1999900 1999900

Color Access Change Reset Total Reset Account Free Access Account Limit Pages Printed

204 Deleting/Resetting 6.4 Total Data

Total data for currently registered accounts can be deleted and reset. The number of copies counted for each account can be reset, and all details set to each account can be deleted in a single operation. Also, the number of sheets which the machine administrator used in the machine administrator mode can also perform check/reset in the screen.

6.4.1 Deleting/Resetting Data by Account Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

The following describes the procedure for deleting or resetting data for each account. The total number made so far and registered account data can also be deleted.

Procedure

1 Display the Auditron Administration screen.

For details about how to display the Auditron Administration screen, see “6.1.4 Starting Setting of Totals Management” (P. 194). 2 Select Create/Check Accounts.

Auditron Administration Close

Create/Check Accounts 6

System Administrator Delete/Reset Auditron Mode Data Account Data

The Create/Check Account Data screen is displayed. 3 Select the account whose data is to be deleted or reset, and select Cre- ate/Delete. Enter a 4-digit No. for the account No. using the numeric keypad on the control panel. When you have finished entering the No., the screen with the item for the entered account No. selected is automatically displayed. You can also select items by the buttons.

205 6.4 Deleting/Resetting Total Data

Create/Check Accounts Close No. Password Account Name 0001 12345 Manual Design G Go to 0002 (Not In Use) (0001-1000) 0003 (Not In Use) 0004 (Not In Use) 0005 (Not In Use) Create/Delete

The Create/Delete screen is displayed. Managing Totals and Outputting Reports 4 Select Reset Total Pages Printed or Reset Account.

Account No. 0001- Create/Delete Close

Password Color Black/White 12345 Total Pages Printed: 0 0 Account Name Manual Design G Account Limit: 1999900 1999900

Color Access Change Reset Total Reset Account Free Access Account Limit Pages Printed

When Reset Total Pages Printed is selected The total number of copies made so far at the selected account is reset and returned to 0. A reset cannot be undone. When Reset Account is selected Account data and the settings of registered account data are erased from the items. When this button is selected, the following confirmation screen is displayed:

Account No. 0001- Create/Delete Close 6 The following account will be reset. Password : 12345 Account Name : Manual Design G 0 0 Are you sure? 1999900 1999900 Yes No Output Color Control Change Copy Reset Copies Reset All Free Access Limit Made Settings

If you select the Yes button, the account data will be deleted. To cancel, select the No button.

206 6.4 Deleting/Resetting Total Data

6.4.2 Deleting the Data of All Accounts

Five different types of data can be deleted from all accounts as follows:

Details registered to all accounts All settings currently registered to each account are deleted. The maximum number, total number of copies, color mode restrictions, and printer totals data are also deleted. Color mode restrictions for all registered accounts Managing Totals and Outputting Reports The color mode restrictions currently set to each account are deleted to eliminate the color mode restriction setting for all accounts. Maximum number for accounts The maximum number set to each account is deleted, and the maximum number on the machine is used. The maximum number of color on the machine is set to 1999900. The maximum number of B/ W on the machine is set to 1999000. Total data for all registered accounts The total data for all accounts are deleted. The number of copies is reset to 0. Print totals data All total counts for pages output from the printer are deleted. The printed totals count is reset to 0.

Procedure

1 Display the Auditron Administration screen.

For details about how to display the Auditron Administration screen, see “6.1.4 Starting Setting of Totals Management” (P. 194). 6 2 Select Delete/Reset Account Data.

Auditron Administration Close

Create/Check Accounts

System Administrator Delete/Reset Auditron Mode Data Account Data

The Delete/Reset Account Data screen is displayed.

207 6.4 Deleting/Resetting Total Data

3 Select the button for the operation you want to perform, and select Delete/Reset.

Delete/Reset Account Data Close

All Accounts Print Meter Data All Copy Access Settings

All Account Limits

Managing Totals and Outputting Reports All Total Pages Delete/Reset Printed

The confirmation screen is displayed. 4 Select the Yes button in the confirmation screen. The details you selected are cleared.

Deleted data cannot be restored.

6.4.3 System Administrator Confirmation of Total Number

This section describes the procedure for the administrator to confirm or reset on screen the total number of copies made so far. The total number, for both color 6 and B/W, can be counted up to 1999999. When managing with the Copylyzer, pages, existing in these devices, are not counted as the total number of copies made in the System Administration Mode. For details, see the Copylyzer manual.

Procedure

1 The Auditron Administration screen is displayed.

For details about how to display the Auditron Administration screen, see “6.1.4 Starting Setting of Totals Management” (P. 194).

208 6.4 Deleting/Resetting Total Data

2 Select System Administrator Data. Auditron Administration Close

Create/Check Accounts

System Administrator Delete/Reset Auditron Mode Data Account Data Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

The System Administrator’s Data screen is displayed. 3 The administrator can confirm the total number of pages printed so far in this screen.

System Administrator's Data Close Total Pages Printed

Color Black/White 6 0 5 0

Reset

Reset Selecting the Reset button resets the number of copies count to 0. 4 Select Close. The screen returns to the Create/Delete screen. 6

209 Confirming the Total Num- 6.5 ber of Copied/Printed Pages

This section describes how to confirm the total number of copies and printed pages. There are two different ways of counting the total number of copies and printed pages. Confirm the total number of printed pages by meter categorized by copy or printing output color like color copying and printing, or B/W copying and printing. Confirm the total number of copies and printed pages made on this machine by individual client.

Managing Totals and Outputting Reports 6.5.1 Confirming the Number of Copied/Printed Pages by Meters

You can confirm the total number of copies and printed pages by individual meters on the display on the control panel. Meters are categorized up, for example, by meter. Confirm meters as follows:

Meter 1 Number of full color copies + Number of full color prints.

Meter 2 Number of B/W copies + Number of B/W prints + FAX*1

Meter 3 Number of large-size full color prints*2 Meter 4 Meter 1 + Meter 2

When print data resulting from color conversion using an ICC profile, for example, on the application is printed at Auto (Color/B/W), even documents that appear in black-and-white on the monitor are printed in color. In this case, meter 3 (color printing) is used for counting the number of prints. 6 *1 is applied on models equipped with FAX features. Only B/W and not color is supported for FAXes. For *2, large-size full color is counted as a print at either of number of full color copies or number of full color prints in meter 1 if a copy or print is made on paper of 279 mm × 400 mm or larger (279 mm or more in the primary scanning direction and 400 mm or more in the secondary scanning direction) when the user has selected color (4-color or 3-color) for copying or printing or a color document has been recognized during document scanning on the scanner.

210 6.5 Confirming the Total Number of Copied/Printed Pages

Procedure

1 Press Machine Status. The Machine Status screen is displayed. 2 Select the Billing Meter/Print Report tab.

Billing Meter/ Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Machine Status Consumables Faults Print Report

Machine Information Paper Tray Print Mode On-line

The Billing Meter/Print Report screen is displayed. 3 Select Billing Meter. Billing Meter/ Machine Status Consumables Faults Print Report

Billing Meter

Print Report/List

The Billing Meter screen is displayed. 6 4 Confirm the counts of Meter 1, Meter 2, Meter 3 and Meter 4.

Billing Meter Close Current Meter Reading Previous Meter Reading 1: Color 200 0005000 Serial Number 2: Black/White 300 0010000 01171968 3: A3/11 17" FC 500 0020000 4: Total 1 & 2 500 0015000

5 Select Close to exit.

211 6.5 Confirming the Total Number of Copied/Printed Pages

Confirming Meters by Account When the password for entering the System Administration Mode has been set, and the totals management feature is activated, you can confirm the meters for each account. The Account Billing Meter feature only allows confirmation of the accounts currently recognized by entering passwords or account numbers. However, this feature does not work with the management by cards.

Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Enter Account Billing Meter at User Mode in the Administrator menu.

Billing Meter/ Machine Status Consumables Faults Print Report

Billing Meter Account Billing Meter

Print Report/List

Account Billing Meter Close

Account Number Color Black/White 1234 This Session : 20 50 Account Name Total Pages Printed : HID 1350 3000 Account Limit : 15000 80000 Color Access Free Access Available Balance : 13630 76950 6

212 6.5 Confirming the Total Number of Copied/Printed Pages

6.5.2 Confirming the Number of Copied/Printed Pages by Meter Reports

This section describes how to confirm the number of copied/printed pages by Meter Report. Printing Results in Print Meter Reports Managing Totals and Outputting Reports When a password in the System Administration Mode is set, you can print Meter Report. You can confirm the total number of pages printed on this machine or the total number of pages of paper used by individual client (job owner). The following items are printed on Print Meter Reports: Initialization date This is the date that print meter data was initialized. Report creation date This is the date that the Print Meter Report was printed. The following items are printed for each job owner: Job owner name Owner names of up to 200 users are printed. Set user names to be managed at Specify Job Owner on the printer driver. Print jobs when a job owner is not specified or print jobs from the 201st user onwards are totaled in the second Unknown User field from the end. Report/list outputs are totaled at the last Report/List field. Number of color A3 pages This is the number of color prints made on A3 or larger size paper. Number of color A4 pages This is the number of color prints made on A4 size paper. Number of color B4 pages This is the number of color prints made on B4 size paper. Number of color B5 pages This is the number of color prints made on B5 size paper. 6 Number of other color This is the number of color prints made on paper smaller pages than B5 in size. Total number of color This is the total number of color prints made so far. pages Total number of B/W This is the total number of B/W prints made so far. pages Total number of prints This is the total number of actual prints made so far. This is counted each time that a print job ends. Number of color prints This is the number of paper sheets used for color printing. Number of B/W prints This is the number of paper sheets used for B/W printing. Total number of pages This is the total number of paper sheets used for printing so far. This is counted each time that a print job ends.

Data in Print Meter Reports can be initialized. For details about how to initialize data, see “6.4 Delet- ing/Resetting Total Data” (P. 205).

213 6.5 Confirming the Total Number of Copied/Printed Pages

Printing Results in Meter Reports When a password in the System Administration Mode is set and the totals management feature is activated, you can print the Meter Reports. The following items are printed on Meter Reports: Initialization date This is the date that Meter Report data was initialized. Report creation date This is the date that the Meter Report was printed. user/the use of total man- Indicates whether the total management feature is effective Managing Totals and Outputting Reports agement feature or not. The following items are printed for each user or account: No. This is the item No. User Name User names for up to 1,000 users are printed. Password When the results are managed with the password, indicates the password, indicates the password. Account Number When the results are managed with the copylyzer, indicates the account number. Account Limit The number of restricted pages for B/W copies (1000 to 1,999,000) is displayed under Black/White. The number of restricted pages for color copies (100 to 1,999,000) is displayed under Color. When only B/W copying is available, Disable is displayed under Color. Pages Printed The current number of accumulated pages for B/W copies that have been counted is displayed under Black/White. The current number of accumulated pages for color copies that have been counted is displayed under Color. 6 Sheets Printed The total number of color and B/W copies counted so far is indicated.

Data in Meter Reports can be initialized. For details about how to initialize data, see “6.4 Deleting/ Resetting Total Data” (P. 205).

214 6.5 Confirming the Total Number of Copied/Printed Pages

Printing Meter Reports The following describes the procedure for printing Print Meter Reports and Meter Reports. To print meter reports, the password for entering the System Adminis- tration Mode must be set, and the totals management feature active.

For details about how to set the password for entering the System Administration Mode, see “5.3 Setting and Changing System Administrator’s Passwords” (P. 117). Managing Totals and Outputting Reports For details about how to activate the totals management feature, see “6.2 Confirming the Totals Management Feature” (P. 196).

Procedure

1 Press Password/System Settings. The Password Entry screen is displayed. 2 Enter the password, and select Confirm. Password Entry Cancel

Password

✽✽✽✽✽ Confirm

The machine enters the System Administration Mode, and the System Administration Mode screen is displayed. 6 3 Select User Mode.

System Adminstrator Menu

User Mode System Settings

Copying and scanning are possible even in the System Administration Mode if the User Mode button is selected. If you press the Machine Status button or the Job Status button while still in User Mode in the System Administration Mode, meter reports can be output.

215 6.5 Confirming the Total Number of Copied/Printed Pages

4 Press Machine Status. The Machine Status screen is displayed. 5 Select the Billing Meter/Print Report tab.

Billing Meter/ Machine Status Consumables Faults Print Report

Machine Information Paper Tray Print Mode On-line Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

The Billing Meter/Print Report screen is displayed. 6 Select Print Report/List. Billing Meter/ Machine Status Consumables Faults Print Report

Billing Meter Account Billing Meter

Print Report/List

The Print Report/List screen is displayed. 6 7 Select Auditron Administration. Print Report/List Close

Job Management Copy Mode Settings Print Mode Settings

Scan Mode Settings Auditron Administration

The Auditron Administration screen is displayed.

216 6.5 Confirming the Total Number of Copied/Printed Pages

8 Select the meter report to print. The buttons that are displayed will vary depending on the totals management feature you are using. Copy Auditron Printer Auditron Auditron Report Print Meter Report Off Off × { On Off {{ Off On { × On On { × Managing Totals and Outputting Reports To print Print Meter Reports Select Print Meter Report.

Auditron Administration Close

Print Meter Report

Auditron Report

To print Meter Reports 1 Select Auditron Report.

Auditron Administration Close

Print Meter Report

Auditron Report 6

2 Select the account No. or All Accounts to print.

Auditron Administration Close Account Number (Multiple Selection Possible) Print Meter 0001-0050 0051-0100 Report 0101-0150 0151-0200 Page Auditron 0201-0250 0251-0300 1/2 Report 0301-0350 0351-0400 All Accounts 0401-0450 0451-0500 (0001-1000)

50 account No.5 can be selected at a time or all accounts can be selected as the account No.

217 6.5 Confirming the Total Number of Copied/Printed Pages

9 Press Start. This prints the print meter report. 10 Select Close repeatedly until the Billing Meter/Print Report screen is displayed. Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

218 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

This section describes the types of reports and lists output on this machine, and how to print these. The sample printouts indicated in this section are for a DocumentCentre C400.

6.6.1 Types of Reports/Lists

This machine has features for printing various reports and lists. Managing Totals and Outputting Reports The list below shows the reports and lists that can be printed on this machine:

System Settings List Mailbox List Extended Features Setting List TIFF Setting List Job Template List TIFF Logical Printers List Error History Report HP-GL/2 Setting List Job History Report HP-GL/2 Logical Printers/Stored Print Meter Report Jobs List Meter Report HP-GL/2 Pallet List PCL Font List PCL Setting List

The following reports and lists can be printed when optional accessories are installed: When the PostScript Software® Kit is installed: PostScript Font List 6 Instruct printing of reports and lists on the control panel. For details about how to instruct printing, see “6.6.2 Printing Reports/Lists” (P. 241). For details about the HP-GL/2 Setup List, HP-GL/2 Registered Logical Printer Memory List, and HP-GL/2 Pallet List, see the Emulation Mode User Guide. System Settings List This list prints various setting states like the machine’s hardware configuration and network information.

Some items are not displayed depending on the machine’s setup.

219 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

Printing Results The following items are printed in the system setting list: System Settings Machine Information The product name, machine’s serial No. and model code are printed. ROM The currently mounted ROM and its version are printed. When the PostScript® Software Kit is installed, ROM is printed as Standard + PS ROM. Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Hardware configuration Optional accessories installed on the machine like the trays, offset output tray, and PostScript are printed. Maintenance The effective printing area, audio settings, timer settings, default screen setting, printing priority settings, user/auditron administration using and guest mode using are printed. On machines installed with the fax feature, settings as to whether or not to output reports, for example, when transmission fails, are printed.

Print Mode Settings Overall The number of printed pages, page description language, and status of installed fonts are printed. For the number of printed pages, the number of color and B/W printed pages and the total number of pages printed so far are printed. Available print languages are printed for the page description language, The type and number of fonts currently installed on the machine are printed for the fonts. Memory The total amount of memory, print page buffer, and setting values of the receive buffer memories for each port are 6 printed. The amount of memory used by the PostScript® Software Kit (option) is also printed if it is installed. Paper feed settings The size and orientation of paper currently loaded to trays, type of paper currently set to trays, and tray priority settings are printed. Paper output settings The paper substitute settings and offset delivery method are printed. The delivery method setting for the Light Finisher is also printed if it is installed. Paper settings The name of custom paper, paper type priority, and image quality settings by paper type are printed. Banner sheet Whether a Banner sheet is output or not is printed.

220 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

Copy Mode Settings Basic Copying screen The setting values for tray buttons in paper supply and ratio buttons in Reduce/Enlarge are printed. Copy features defaults Features set the Output Color, single color setting, dual color setting, paper supply, reduce/enlarge, margin shift, edge erase, rotate 90°, rotate direction, color balance, tone, saturation, sharpness, contrast, original type, copy density, document orientation, output, output destination, and 2 sided are printed. Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Copy control The settings for the tray at auto job release and processing of memory overflows are printed. Document size buttons The setting values of document size buttons No. 1 to 11 are printed. R/E presets buttons The setting values of R/E presets buttons No. 1 to 7 are printed. Custom colors Custom colors No. 1 to 6 are printed.

Communications Settings Whether or not the ports are started up or stopped is printed. The following items are printed if a port is started up: Ethernet setting The connection type and MAC address are printed. TCP/IP The IP address acquisition method, IP address, subnet mask, gateway address, and status information are printed. WINS The address acquisition method from a DHCP server, primary WINS server, and primary WINS server settings are printed. DNS The address acquisition method from DNS server, DNS 6 server address, and domain name are printed. SNMP The port states and transport protocol are printed. CentreWare The port states are printed. Internet Services Parallel The port states, print mode, PJL, Adobe communications protocol, auto eject time, bi-directional communication, and input prime settings are printed. NetWare The port states, print mode, PJL, transport protocol, TBCP filter, operation mode, unit name, network address, tree name (only in directory mode), context name (only in directory mode), file server name (only in boundary mode), communications language, key search interval, number of searches, and status information are printed. LPD The port states, print mode, PJL, TBCP filter, accepted IP address restriction, connection time-out, and port No. are printed.

221 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

SMB The port states, print mode, PJL, transport protocol, TBCP filter, work group name, host name, automatic loading of driver, automatic master mode, password encryption, maximum number of sessions, Unicode support, administrator name, and status information are printed. IPP The port states, print mode, PJL, TBCP filter, access control DNC use, port No., additional port No., and time-out are printed. Port9100 The port states are printed. Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Salutation The port states are printed. FTP Client The port states are printed. Mail The mail send and receive states are printed. EtherTalk The port states, print mode, PJL, printer name, and Ether- Talk zone are printed. IPX/SPX The IPX/SPX operation frame type is printed.

The same details are printed to the Features Setting List whichever of Copy Mode Settings, Print Mode Settings, and Scan Mode Settings you instruct printing from.

The Adobe communications protocol under Parallel, NetWare, LPD, SMB under TBCP filter and EtherTalk under IPP are printed when the PostScript Software Package is installed.

222 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

Sample Printouts Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

223 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

Extended Features Setting List Scan-related settings are printed to the extended feature setup list.

For details about FAX setting items, see the User Guide (Facsimile). Printing Results The following items are printed in the extended features setting list:

Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Scanner Features Defaults Mixed size originals, output color, scan resolution, edge erase dimension, lighter/darker, contrast, document orientation, and background suppression are printed. Other settings Scanner features use, ratio buttons in the basic scanner screen, lighter/darker level, and contrast level are printed. R/E presets button The setting values of R/E presets buttons No.1 to 7 are printed. Scanning size presets The setting values of scanning size buttons No. 1 to 11 are buttons printed. Output size presets The setting values of output size buttons No. 1 to 8 are buttons printed.

Sample Printout

224 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

Job Template List Settings relating to the server where job templates are stored that are set on the optional scan service setup tool CentreWare Scan Services and CentreWare Internet Services are printed in the job template list.

CentreWare Internet Services help for details on the CentreWare Internet Services. You can display help by selecting Job Templates in the CentreWare Internet Services screen and then clicking on help. For details about job templates, see “Chapter 4 Scanning With CentreWare Scanning Services” in Managing Totals and Outputting Reports “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). Printing Results The server name or IP address of the storage destination, direct path name, login user name, password on/off setting, polling interval, template name, model name, code, server, storage path, select file, protocol, file name, and format are printed in the job template list. Sample Printout

225 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

Error History Report Information relating to errors that occur on the machine are printed. Printing Results The date and time of occurrence, error code, and error type for the last 50 occurring errors are printed on error history reports. Sample Printout Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

226 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

Job History Report The results of execution, that is, whether or not print data sent from a client has been successfully printed or scanner operation has been successfully executed, are printed. The execution results for the last 50 print jobs are printed on job history reports. You can select on the control panel whether or not to automatically print job history reports at every 50 print jobs. Printing Results Managing Totals and Outputting Reports The following items can be printed in job history reports for the last 50 jobs: Date and time of completion, input source, output destination, job information, page info, page info, sheets, job status. Sample Printout

227 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

Erroneous Completion of Jobs The following completion details are sometimes printed at “Job Processing Sta- tus”: Printed Details Cause and Remedy Print parameter in error “Cause” An illegal print parameter combination was set. For example a non-standard size was specified, and Tray Selection was set to Auto. “Remedy”Check the print data. In the above case, select tray

Managing Totals and Outputting Reports 5 (Bypass Tray). Insufficient print page “Case” PCL print data could not be processed as there was buffer insufficient space in the printer page buffer. “Remedy” Take one of the following actions: Set Print Mode to Speed Priority. Use Ensure Print. Increase the size of the print page buffer. Add on memory.

See the descriptions under “Part 1 Printer” in the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). About print page buffer, “1.5 Memory Allocation”. For details about the Ensure Print, see the Online Help of the printer driver for details. Unexpected error “Cause” An error occurred during print processing.Printing was instructed by automatic tray selection when Paper Type Priority is set to Automatic Tray witching Off for all paper in the Common Settings. “Remedy” When printing by automatic tray selection, set one 6 of the paper types to a setting other than Automatic Tray witching Off in Paper Type Priority.

See “ Paper Type Priority” (P. 129) in “5.4.4 Setting Paper Tray Attributes”. Print language automatic “Cause” The print language cannot be automatically selected recognition error when the print mode specified is set to Auto. Prob- able causes are as follows: PostScript data was sent without the PostScript® Software Kit installed. “Remedy” The PostScript® Software Kit must be installed. Insufficient hard disk space “Cause” Printing is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space. “Remedy” Reduce the number of pages of print data, for example, by dividing up the print data or printing one copy at a time when making multiple copies. PJL command error “Cause” A PJL command syntax error occurred. “Remedy” Either confirm the print settings, or correct the PJL command.

228 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

Printed Details Cause and Remedy PostScript error “Cause” An error occurred during PostScript processing. “Remedy” Take one of the following actions: Set Print Mode to Speed Priority. Increase the size of the print page buffer. Increase PostScript memory.

See the descriptions under “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide Managing Totals and Outputting Reports (Printer/Scanner). For Print Mode, see the Online Help of the printer driver for details, and for print page buffer and PostScript memory, see “1.5 Memory Allocation”. Image development error “Cause” An error occurred during image processing. “Remedy” Set the Print Mode to Speed Priority and instruct printing again. If this does not remedy printing, print in the Ensure Print mode.

For details about the Print Mode and Ensure Printing, see the Online Help of the printer driver for details. Print language not installed “Cause” A print language not installed on the machine was specified. Probable causes are as follows: 1 PCL data was sent when PCL under Print Mode Specification was not selected in the network settings. “Remedy” For 1 , select PCL.

See “5.7.1 Allocate Memory” (P. 167) 6 Illegal page margin value “Cause” There are too many paper margin values for the HP- GL/2 effective coordinate area. “Remedy” Reduce the paper margin values, and instruct it to print again. HP-GL/2 memory overflow “Cause” A probable cause is that the correct document size could not be judged as the receive data exceeded the HP-GL/2 spool size. “Remedy” Wait for processing of print data in memory to end, and instruct it to print again. Form and paper size/orien- “Cause” The size and orientation of the specified PCL form tation mismatch do not match that of the paper to print on. “Remedy” Match the size and orientation of the paper size to the specified PCL form, and instruct it to print again. No plot data in page “Cause” There is no plot data in the HP-GL/2 print data. “Remedy” Check the print data.

229 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

Printed Details Cause and Remedy 2 sided printing impossible “Cause” 2 sided printing was not possible due to insufficient due to insufficient memory memory. “Remedy” Increase the print page buffer, and instruct it to print again.

See “5.7.1 Allocate Memory” (P. 167)

Managing Totals and Outputting Reports PostScript language pars- “Cause” An error occurred during PostScript (option) pro- ing error cessing. “Remedy” Either confirm the print data, or click Spool Set- tings on the Details tab to set bi-directional communications off. Print using substitute font “Cause” Printing was performed using a substitute font. “Remedy” Check the print data. Cannot register forms. “Cause” The form could not be registered as the PCL form (registration upper limit registration upper limit was reached. exceeded) “Remedy” Delete unwanted forms. The maximum number of forms that can be registered is 2048.

See “5.7.1 Allocate Memory” (P. 167) Cannot register user data. “Cause” User-defined data cannot be registered as there is insuf- (insufficient memory) ficient PCL user definition memory area. “Remedy” Increase PCL user definition memory area.

See “5.7.1 Allocate Memory” (P. 167) 6 Cannot register logos. “Cause” Logo data could not be registered as the PCL logo (registration upper limit data registration upper limit was reached. exceeded) “Remedy” Delete unwanted logo data. Numerical value operation “Cause” A numerical value operation error occurred. error “Remedy” Check the print data. HP-GL/2 command error “Cause” An HP-GL/2 command error occurred. “Remedy” Check the print data. PCL command error “Cause” A PCL command error occurred. “Remedy” Check the print data. Cannot register form/logo. “Cause” Forms or logo data cannot be registered as there is (insufficient memory) insufficient PCL user definition memory. “Remedy” Increase memory.

See “5.7.1 Allocate Memory” (P. 167)

230 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

Print Meter Report You can confirm the total pages printed and total sheets used on this machine by individual client (job owner). The number of printed pages is counted individually for color and for B/W. A Print Meter Report starts the count from when the data was initialized.

For details about Print Meter Reports, see “6.5.2 Confirming the Number of Copied/Printed Pages Managing Totals and Outputting Reports by Meter Reports” (P. 213). Data in Print Meter Reports can be initialized. For details about initializing data, see “6.4 Delet- ing/Resetting Total Data” (P. 205). Sample Printout

231 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

Meter Report The total number of pages copied on this machine, number of color output pages and number of Black/White pages can be confirmed. If the maximum number of pages and color or B/W mode restrictions have been set, the setting values for these restrictions are also indicated. A Meter Report starts the count from when the data was initialized. Managing Totals and Outputting Reports For details about Meter Reports, see “6.5.2 Confirming the Number of Copied/Printed Pages by Meter Reports” (P. 213). Data in meter reports can be initialized. For details about initializing data, see “6.4 Deleting/ Resetting Total Data” (P. 205). Sample Printout

232 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

PCL Fonts List A list of fonts that can be used with PCL is printed. Printing Results PCL fonts and example are printed out in font lists. Sample Printout Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

233 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

Mailbox List The details currently set to mailboxes and how to remedy problems when data is stored to mailboxes are printed in tabulated form. Mailbox list can be displayed when you select the User Mode button in the Sys- tem Administration Mode. Printing Results The following items are printed in mailbox lists: Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Mailbox Name The name registered to the mailbox is printed. Docs. The number of documents currently stored to a mailbox is printed. Mailbox Options How to remedy problems when documents are stored to mailboxes is printed. Either Print or Forward is indicated. Delete/Save documents The setting as to whether to delete or save documents after forwarding documents retrieved from the mailbox is printed. Check Password The setting as to when to restrict operations by a password when a password is set is printed. Either Save (Write) or Print/Delete (Read) is indicated at all times.

Sample Printout

234 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

TIFF Settings List The various settings in the TIFF print mode are printed in TIFF setting list. Printing Results The following items are printed in the TIFF setting list: Format The size judgment method, output size, paper tray, origin, image orientation, N up mode, N up direction, adjust position, and output color settings are printed. Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Options 2 sided print, output destination, collated, and staple settings are printed. Zoom The zoom mode, Y%, and X% settings are printed. Print Control The image enhancement, prints quantity setup, quantity, and paper margin settings are printed. Stored Jobs List Factory settings and No. 1 to 20 indicating logical printers are printed.

Sample Printout

235 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

TIFF Logical Printers List A list of logical printers created in the TIFF printer mode is printed in the TIFF registered logical printer list. The settings of currently registered logical printers No.1 to 20 can be confirmed. Printing Results The following items are printed in the TIFF logical printers list.

Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Format The size judgment method, paper size, paper tray, origin, image orientation, adjustment position, and output color settings are printed. Option 2 sided print, output destination, collated, and staple settings are printed. Zoom The zoom mode, Y%, and X% settings are printed. Printing Control The image enhancement, print quality setup, quantity, and paper margin settings are printed.

Sample Printout

236 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

HP-GL/2 Settings List The various settings in the HP-GL/2 print mode are printed in HP-GL/2 setting list. Printing Results The following items are printed in the HP-GL/2 setting list: Format The size judgment method, paper size, tray, Auto Layout, Coordinate Rotation, Adjust Position, and output color settings are printed. Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Options 2 sided and output destination settings are printed. Zoom The zoom and zoom mode are settings are printed. Print Control The Bypass Tray, HP-GL Mode, the image enhance, eject command, print quantity setup, number of prints, area deter- mining mode and paper margin settings are printed. Stored Jobs List Default settings and No. 1 to 20 indicating logical printers are printed. Pen Attributes Default settings and No.1 to 15 indicating pen attributes are printed.

Sample Printout

237 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

HP-GL/2 Logical Printers/Stored Jobs List A list of logical printers created in the HP-GL/2 printer mode is printed in the HP- GL/2 registered logical printer/memory list. The settings of currently registered logical printers No.1 to 20 can be confirmed. Printing Results The following items are printed in the HP-GL/2 logical printers/stored jobs list.

Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Format The size judgment method, paper size, tray, origin, document orientation, position compensation, and output color settings are printed. Options 2 sided and output destination settings are printed. Print Control The Bypass Tray, HP-GL Mode, the image enhance, eject command, print quantity setup, number of prints, area deter- mining mode and paper margin settings are printed. Pen Attributes The settings of pen attributes are printed.

Sample Printout

238 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

HP-GL/2 Palette List In the HP-GL/2 Palette List, a sample of the colors set in pen attributes numbers 0 to 15 for HP-GL and HP-GL/2 Emulation and colors that can be set, are printed. Sample Printout Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

239 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

PCL Settings List The various settings in the PCL print mode are printed in PCL setting list. Sample Printout Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

240 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

6.6.2 Printing Reports/Lists

This section describes the procedure for printing reports and lists. The following example is for printing of the feature setup list. Instruct it to print in the same way for other reports and lists.

The same details are printed to the features setup list whichever of Copy Mode Settings, Print Mode Managing Totals and Outputting Reports Settings, and Scan Mode Settings you instruct printing from.

Procedure

1 Press Machine Status. The Machine Status screen is displayed. 2 Select the Billing Meter/Print Report tab.

Billing Meter/ Machine Status Consumables Faults Print Report

Machine Information Paper Tray Print Mode On-line

The Billing Meter/Print Report screen is displayed. 6 3 Select Print Report/List. Billing Meter/ Machine Status Consumables Faults Print Report

Billing Meter Account Billing Meter

Print Report/List

The Print Report/List screen is displayed.

241 6.6 Printing Reports/Lists

4 Select Copy Mode Settings.

Print Report/List Close

Job Management Copy Mode Settings Print Mode Settings

Scan Mode Settings Managing Totals and Outputting Reports

The Copy Mode Settings screen is displayed. 5 Select Settings List (Common Items).

Copy Mode Settings Close

Settings List (Common Items)

6 Press Start. This prints the features setting list. 7 Select Close repeatedly until the Print Reports/Lists screen is dis- 6 played.

242 7Confirming Jobs

7.1 Overview of Job Confirmation Feature ...... 244 7.2 Confirming Jobs...... 245 7.2.1 Confirming Currently Executing Jobs ...... 245 7.2.2 Changing the Print Priority...... 246 7.2.3 Confirming Completed Jobs ...... 247 7.2.4 Outputting/Deleting Secure Prints ...... 248 7.2.5 Outputting Sample Prints...... 252 7.2.6 Making Prints at a Specified Time ...... 256 7.2.7 Deleting Stored Documents...... 259 7.2.8 Forcibly Outputting Data Wait Documents...... 262 Overview of Job Confirma- 7.1 tion Feature

Job confirmation involves confirming currently executing, queued or completed jobs. Job confirmation also involves changing print schedules to cancel print jobs or to change the print priority of queued jobs. To confirm jobs, press the Job Status button.

The job confirmation feature enables you to do the following:

Confirm jobs. You can confirm currently executing, queued or pending jobs. Details of each job can also be displayed.

Delete jobs. You can delete currently executing, queued or pending jobs.

Instruct job priority. You can give priority to queued or pending jobs.

Confirm a log of completed jobs. A log of completed jobs can be displayed. Details of each job can also be displayed.

Confirm jobs in memory. You can output or delete jobs stored in mailboxes. You can also output or delete security-printed jobs. Confirming Jobs Build Job You can change and store the feature settings for each document, and print all these documents as a single job after they have been stored to memory.

Proof Set-Build Job After you have stored all documents by Build Job, you can output one copy of each to make multiple copies.

Blank Page-Build Job 7 This feature automatically inserts a blank sheet in documents stored by Build Job.

Reserve copy You can reserve start of the next print job while printing is in progress.

244 7.2 Confirming Jobs

Following describes how to confirm jobs, change the print priority, and delete jobs.

7.2.1 Confirming Currently Executing Jobs

This section describes the procedure for confirming currently printing or queued jobs. In the Job Status screen, you can also cancel jobs or change the print priority.

Procedure

1 Press Job Status. The Job Status screen is displayed. 2 Make sure that Current and Pending Jobs is selected. The Current and Pending Jobs screen is displayed. A job list is displayed if jobs are stored to memory. The list displays currently printing or queued jobs and documents stored to memory, and displays the current status of each job.

Stored Confirming Jobs Job Status Current and Completed Jobs Print Pending Jobs Documents Waiting Jobs Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages 00117-Copy Job Copying A4 : 100% 25/100 00010-Print Job Print Wait Fuji Taro : MDG 0/120 00015-Print Job Print Wait Fuji Taro : MDG 0/50

3 Display the desired job by , and select the desired item from the 7 list.

Stored Job Status Current and Completed Jobs Print Pending Jobs Documents Waiting Jobs Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages 00117-Copy Job Copying A4 : 100% 25/100 00010-Print Job Print Wait Fuji Taro : MDG 0/120 00015-Print Job Print Wait Fuji Taro : MDG 0/50

The screen for confirming the job status is displayed.

245 7.2 Confirming Jobs

4 Confirm the status of the selected job in this screen.

Print Job :Doc. No. 00010 Close : Fuji Taro : (CentreWare) : document Stop Quantity : 0/5 Pages : 120/120 Promote Job 2 A4 1 Sided Center Output Tray

To cancel a job Select the Stop button. This cancels processing of the currently executing or queued job. To change the print priority You can change the print priority when there are two or more queued jobs. Select the Promote Job button. The print order will be changed so that the job you instructed higher print priority to will be printed after the currently executing job. Note, however, that if you continue to change the print priority again after changing the print order in the print schedule, priority will be given to the job that you last instructed, and the mark will be displayed at Status in the Job Status screen. 5 Select Close. The screen returns to the Job Status screen. Confirming Jobs 7.2.2 Changing the Print Priority

The print order of jobs queued for printing can be changed. If there are two or more queued jobs in the list, you can change the print order so that jobs are printed in the order that they were received. 7 1 Press Job Status. The Job Status screen is displayed. 2 Select Print Waiting Jobs. Stored Job Status Current and Completed Jobs Print Pending Jobs Documents Waiting Jobs Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages 00117-Copy Job Copying A4 : 100% 25/100 00010-Print Job Print Wait Fuji Taro : MDG 0/120 00015-Print Job Print Wait Fuji Taro : MDG 0/50

Queued jobs in the list are printed according to the print priority.

If there are no queued jobs in the list, the Print Waiting Jobs button cannot be selected.

246 7.2 Confirming Jobs

7.2.3 Confirming Completed Jobs

Following describes how to confirm completed jobs. A list displays whether jobs have been completed normally or not. This list also allows you to confirm details of completed jobs in more detail.

Procedure

1 Press Job Status. The Job Status screen is displayed. 2 Select Completed Jobs. The Completed Jobs screen is displayed. A job list is displayed if there are completed jobs. The job list displays a list of completed jobs.

3 Display the job whose details are to be confirmed by , and select the desired item from the list.

Stored Job Status Current and Completed Jobs Pending Jobs Documents Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages - -Copy Job Completed A4 : 100% 100/100 7 - -Print Job Completed motohashi : MDG 120/120 Page - -Print Job Canceled Fuji Taro : MDG 0/50 1/2 00035-Scan Job Canceled Mailbox 001 23 00036-Scan Job Canceled Mailbox 002 30

The screen for confirming the job status is displayed.

247 7.2 Confirming Jobs

4 The completion result can be confirmed on this screen.

Copy Job :Doc. No. 1234 Close

Output Color : Full Color Original Size : A4 Reduce/Enlarge: 100%

Status : Completed Job Ended : 10/2/2001 8:10 AM

Quantity : 5/5 Pages : 100/100 Paper Supply : 3 A4

5 Select Close. The screen returns to the Job Status screen.

7.2.4 Outputting/Deleting Secure Prints

The following describes how to output and delete documents saved by the secure print feature.

For details about how to use the security print feature, see “4.3 Secure Print” in “Part 1 Printer” of Confirming Jobs the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

Procedure

1 Press Job Status. The Job Status screen is displayed. 7 2 Select Stored Documents.

Stored Job Status Current and Completed Jobs Print Waiting Pending Jobs Documents Jobs Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages 00117-Copy Job Copying A4 : 100% 25/100 00010-Print Job Print Wait Fuji Taro : MDG 0/120 00015-Print Job Print Wait Fuji Taro : MDG 0/50

The Stored Documents screen is displayed.

248 7.2 Confirming Jobs

3 Select Secure Print. Current and Job Status Completed Jobs Stored Pending Jobs Documents

Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print

Private Mailbox

The Secure Print screen is displayed. 4 Select the ID No. of the user you want to confirm. Enter a 3-digit No. for the user ID using the numeric keypad on the control panel. When you have finished entering the No., the screen with the item for the entered display start No. selected is automatically displayed. You can also select items by the buttons.

Secure Print Refresh Close

001 Fuji Taro 002 Fuji Hanako Go to 003 Endo 004 Imai (001-200) 005 Fukada 006 Motohashi

Document List Confirming Jobs

The latest information can be updated by selecting the Refresh button. 5 Select Document List.

Secure Print Refresh Close

001 Fuji Taro 002 Fuji Hanako Go to 003 Endo 004 Imai (001-200) 7 005 Fukada 006 Motohashi

Document List

The Password screen is displayed.

The Password screen is not displayed if a password has not been set.

249 7.2 Confirming Jobs

6 Enter the user password, and select Confirm.

Fuji Taro Cancel

Password

Confirm

The secure documents for the selected user can be confirmed. 7 Select the document to print. All documents can be selected by selecting the Select All button.

Fuji Taro Refresh Close

No. Document Name Stored Date Pages No.of Docs: 2 1 Secure Print 2001/10/7 8:10 AM 22 2 Dialog SOD 2001/10/8 7:30 PM 5 Select All

Delete Confirming Jobs To print a secure document 1 Select the secure document, and select Print.

Fuji Taro Refresh Close

No. Document Name Stored Date Pages No.of Docs. : 2 1 Secure Print 2001/10/7 8:10 AM 22 2 Dialog SOD 2001/10/8 7:30 PM 5 Select All 7 Print Delete

The print confirmation screen is displayed. 2 Select how the document is to be processed after it is printed.

Fuji Taro Refresh Close No.The following document(s)s will be printed. 1 User ID :Fuji Taro 2001/10/7 8:10 AM 22 Doc.Name :Secure Print 1 2 Stored Date :2001/10/8 7:302001/10/8 PM 7:30 PM 5 Select to delete or save the document after printing.

Print and Print and Delete Save Cancel

To cancel printing, select the Cancel button.

250 7.2 Confirming Jobs

To delete secure documents 1 Select the secure document, and select Delete.

Fuji Taro Refresh Close

No. Document Name Stored Date Pages No.of Docs: 2 1 Secure Print 2001/10/7 8:10 AM 22 2 Dialog SOD 2001/10/8 7:30 PM 5 Select All

Delete

The delete confirmation screen is displayed.

2 Select Yes.

Fuji Taro Refresh Close The following document will be deleted. 1 User ID :Fuji Taro 2001/10/7 8:10 AM 22 Doc. Name :Dialog SOD 2 Stored Date :2001/10/8 2001/10/87:30 PM 7:30 PM 5 Are you sure?

Yes No Confirming Jobs

To cancel the delete, select the No button. 8 Select Close. The screen returns to the Secure Print screen. 7

251 7.2 Confirming Jobs

7.2.5 Outputting Sample Prints

If you instruct output of sample prints when printing multiple copies from a client, the job ends once printing of only one copy ends. To print the remaining copies after confirming the print result, instruct output of the sample print on screen at this machine. The following describes how to output and delete documents stored by the sample print feature. “4.6 Secure Print” in “Part 1 Printer”

For details about sample print operations, see “4.4 Sample Print” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

Procedure

1 Press Job Status. The Job Status screen is displayed.

Select Stored Documents. Confirming Jobs 2

7 The Stored Documents screen is displayed. 3 Select Sample Print.

Current and Stored Job Management Completed Jobs Pending Jobs Documents

Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print

Private Mailbox

The Sample Print screen is displayed.

252 7.2 Confirming Jobs

4 Select the ID No. of the user you want to verify. Enter a 3-digit No. for the user ID using the numeric keypad buttons on the control panel. When you have finished entering the No., the screen with the item for the entered display start No. selected is automatically displayed. You can also select items by the buttons.

Sample Print Refresh Close

001 Fuji Taro 002 Fuji Hanako Go to 003 Endo 004 Imai (001-200) 005 Fukada 006 Motohashi

Document List

Information can be updated to the latest information by selecting the Refresh button. 5 Select Document List. Sample Print Refresh Close

001 Fuji Taro 002 Fuji Hanako Go to 003 Endo 004 Imai (001-200) 005 Fukada 006 Motohashi

Document List Confirming Jobs

No. of Docs. : 2

The sample print documents for the selected user can be confirmed. 6 Select the document to print. You can select all documents by selecting the Select All button.

Fuji Taro Refresh Close

No. Doc. Name Stored Date Pages No. of Docs. : 2 1 Planning Paper 2001/10/7 8:10 AM 52 7 2 Goods Guidance 2001/10/8 7:30 PM 35 Select All

Delete

253 7.2 Confirming Jobs

To print a sample print document 1 Select the sample print document, and select Print.

Fuji Taro Refresh Close

No. Doc. Name Stored Date Pages No. of Docs. : 2 1 Planning Paper 2001/10/7 8:10 AM 52 2 Goods Guidance 2001/10/8 7:30 PM 35 Select All

Delete

The print confirmation screen is displayed.

2 Select Yes. Sample print documents are deleted from memory after the remaining number of copies is output.

Fuji Taro Refresh Close The following documents will be deleted after printed. User ID :Fuji Taro Doc. Name :Goods Guidance Stored Date :2001/10/8 7:30 PM Are you sure?

Yes No Confirming Jobs

To delete sample print documents 1 Select the sample print document, and select Delete.

Fuji Taro Refresh Close

Doc. Name Stored Date Pages No. of Docs: 2 1 Planning Paper 2001/10/7 8:10 AM 52 2 Goods Guidance 2001/10/8 7:30 PM 35 Select All 7 Print Delete

The delete confirmation screen is displayed.

254 7.2 Confirming Jobs

2 Select Yes.

Fuji Taro Refresh Close The following document(s) will be deleted. User ID :Fuji Taro Doc. Name :Goods Guidance Stored Date :2001/10/8 7:30 PM Are you sure?

Yes No

To cancel the delete, select the No button. 7 Select Close. The screen returns to the Sample Print screen. Confirming Jobs

255 7.2 Confirming Jobs

7.2.6 Making Prints at a Specified Time

You can specify the time to start outputting jobs on the client. When the specified time is reached, printing of jobs stored to memory is automatically started. Following describes how to output documents stored to memory by the Print at Specified Time feature not at the specified time but when you want to output them immediately. It also describes how to delete jobs.

If the machine is turned off then on again with specified output time prints stored to memory, output of these prints will automatically begin regardless of the specified time setting.

For details about specified output time print operations, see the On-line Help of the printer driver for details.

Procedure

1 Press Job Status. The Job Status screen is displayed. Confirming Jobs 2 Select Stored Documents.

The Stored Documents screen is displayed. 3 Select Delayed Print.

Current and Stored Job Management Completed Jobs Pending Jobs Documents

Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print

Private Mailbox

The Delayed Print screen is displayed.

256 7.2 Confirming Jobs

4 Select the document to print. The current time is displayed in the message area.

Current Time: 8:15 AM 1 Delayed Print Refresh Close

No. Document Name Print Time Pages No. of Docs: 3 1 Planning Paper 10:00 AM 52 2 Goods Guidance 11:50 AM 35 3Users Guide 8:36 PM 620 Print

Delete

To print a delayed print document 1 Select the delayed print document, and select Print.

Delayed Print Refresh Close

No. Document Name Print Time Pages No. of Docs: 3 1 Planning Paper 10:00 AM 52 2 Goods Guidance 11:50 AM 35 3Users Guide 8:36 PM 620 Print

Delete Confirming Jobs

The print confirmation screen is displayed.

2 Select Yes.

Delayed Print Refresh Close The following document(s) will be deleted after printing. Doc. Name :Planning Paper Print Time :10:00 AM (Stored Date : 2001/10/8 9:50 PM) User Name :Fuji Taro Host Name :Alpha The job will not print at the programmed time. Do you want to print now? 7 Yes No

257 7.2 Confirming Jobs

To delete a delayed print documents 1 Select the specified time print document, and select Delete.

Delayed Print Refresh Close

No. Document Name Print Time Pages No. of Docs: 3 1 Planning Paper 10:00 AM 52 2 Goods Guidance 11:50 AM 35 3Users Guide 8:36 PM 620 Print

Delete

The delete confirmation screen is displayed.

2 Select Yes.

Delayed Print Refresh Close The following document(s) will be deleted. Doc. Name :Planning Paper Print Time :10:00 AM (Stored Date : 2001/10/8 9:50 PM) User Name :Fuji Taro Host Name :Alpha Are you sure?

Yes No Confirming Jobs

To cancel the delete, select the Nobutton. 5 Select Close. The screen returns to the Delayed Print screen. 7

258 7.2 Confirming Jobs

7.2.7 Deleting Stored Documents

Following describes how to delete documents stored to mailboxes.

For details about storing documents to mailboxes, see “Part 2 Scanner” and “Chapter 3 Scanning With Mailbox” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

Procedure

1 Press Job Status. The Job Status screen is displayed. 2 Select Stored Documents. The Stored Documents screen is displayed.

Stored Job Status Current and Completed Jobs Print Waiting Pending Jobs Documents Jobs Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages 00117-Copy Job Copying A4 : 100% 25/100

00010-Print Job Print Wait Fuji Taro : MDG 0/120 Confirming Jobs 00015-Print Job Print Wait Fuji Taro : MDG 0/50

3 Select Private Mailbox. Current and Job Status Completed Jobs Stored Pending Jobs Documents Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print 7

Private Mailbox

The Private Mailbox screen is displayed.

259 7.2 Confirming Jobs

4 Select the mailbox to confirm. Enter a 3-digit No. for the mailbox using the numeric keypad on the control panel. When you have finished entering the No., the screen with the item for the entered mailbox No. selected is automatically displayed. You can also select items by the buttons.

Mailbox Close 001 002 003 004 Kannari Hasuike Hirano Go to (Not Entered) (001-200) 005 006 007 008 (Not Entered) (Not Entered) (Not Entered) (Not Entered) Document List 009 010 011 012 (Not Entered) (Not Entered) (Not Entered) (Not Entered)

5 Select Document List.

Mailbox Close 001 002 003 004 Kannari Hasuike Hirano Go to (Not in Use) (001-200) 005 006 007 008 (Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use) Document List 009 010 011 012 (Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use) No. of Docs. : 8 Confirming Jobs The Mailbox 002 screen is displayed.

If a system administrator’s password and a mailbox password are set, the Password screen is displayed. 6 Enter the mailbox password, and select Confirm. 7 Mailbox 002 Cancel Password

Confirm

You can confirm the documents in the selected mailbox.

260 7.2 Confirming Jobs

7 Select the document. All documents can be selected by selecting the Select All button.

Mailbox 002 Close

No. Doc. No.-Type Stored Date Pages No. of Docs: 8 1 00001-Scanned Documents 2001/10/10 10:03 AM 1 2 00002-Scanned Documents 2001/10/10 10:10 AM 5 Select All 3 00003-Scanned Documents 2001/10/12 11:58 AM 20 4 00004-Scanned Documents 2001/10/12 2:45 PM 18 5 00005-Scanned Documents 2001/10/15 6:32 PM 50 Delete

8 Select Delete.

Mailbox 002 Close

No. Doc. No. -Job Type Stored Date Pages No. of Docs: 8 1 00001-Scanned Documents 2001/10/10 10:03 AM 1 2 00002-Scanned Documents 2001/10/10 10:10 AM 5 Select All 3 00003-Scanned Documents 2001/10/12 11:58 AM 20 4 00004-Scanned Documents 2001/10/12 2:45 PM 18 5 00005-Scanned Documents 2001/10/15 6:32 PM 50 Delete

The delete confirmation screen is displayed. Confirming Jobs 9 Select Yes.

Mailbox 002 Close The following document(s) will be deleted. Mailbox : 002 Hasuike Doc. No.-Type : 00001-Scanned Documents Stored Date : 2001/10/10 10:03 AM Are you sure?

Yes No 7 7

To cancel the delete, select the No button. 10 Select Close. The screen returns to the Sample Print screen.

261 7.2 Confirming Jobs

7.2.8 Forcibly Outputting Data Wait Docu- ments

Following describes how to forcibly output documents in the printer that are waiting for data. In the emulation mode, documents cannot be printed out until an entire page’s worth of data has been received. When the data ends halfway through the page, the machine stands by for the next data until the time set at “Auto Eject Time” has elapsed. When there is a document waiting for data in the printer like this, the following message is displayed on the display. Remedy this by following the procedure described below.

The auto output time can be set only in the System Administration Mode. For details on how to set this time, see Parallel “Auto Eject Time” (P. 159) in “5.6.1 Port Settings”. The default setting is 30 seconds.

Procedure Confirming Jobs 1 Select End Data in the screen that is displayed.

Data Wait Close

There is a print job waiting for data.

Select End Data if you want to stop receiving data and print the job now.

End Data 7 This ends data reception, and forcibly outputs the job.

Select the Close button, then the screen returns to its previous state.

262 Part 2 Copier 1Loading Documents

1.1 About Documents ...... 266 1.1.1 Available Document Sizes ...... 266 1.1.2 Automatically Detectable Document Sizes ...... 267 1.1.3 Important Notes About Documents ...... 268 1.2 Loading Documents ...... 270 1.2.1 Placing Documents on the Document Glass ...... 270 1.2.2 Loading Copies on the DADF ...... 271 1.2.3 About Orientation When Loading Documents ...... 273 ) 2 ) (two 2 2 ) *2 (one sided doc- 2 432 mm 148.5 mm × × 17") × 297mm ument), 50 to 110 g/m 50 sheets (38 to 100 g/m 38 to 128 g/m sided document 40 sheets (101 to 128 g/m Min. 210 (A5 ) Max. 297 (A3, 11 432mm 452 mm × 15 mm × Document GlassDocument DADF 432 mm ×  Min. 15 Max. 334.5 297

About Documents About ) *1

G.S.M. is a measure of a substance of paper expressed in grams per square meter, which does not does which meter, square per grams in expressed paper of substance a of a measure is G.S.M. dependnumber on theofsheets in the ream. both the top and back scanning made when of copies that can be the number values are These sides of a two sided document. Available Document Sizes Available Document Loading Capacity 1 sheet Available Document Size Document Weight (G.S.M. Effective Scanning Area *1 *2 Refer to the following table for details about available document sizes that can that documentsizes detailsfor about available table Refer to the following be placed on the document glass or loaded on the DADF for copying.

1.1.1 1.1 You can place documents the documenton or glass load them on the duplex automatic document feeder (DADF). make copies in and or more pages to load documents comprising two DADF allows you The a single operation. This section sizes that can be describes available document on placed the document glass the DADF. or loaded on

Loading Documents

266 1 1.1 About Documents Loading Documents 1.1.2 Automatically Detectable Document Sizes

This machine automatically detects the size of documents when they are scanned for copying. You need not specify the size of the document if it a standard-size document as indicated in the table below.

Document Glass DADF 1 Automatically B6, B6 , B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5, B5, B5 , B4, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, Detectable Docu- A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 × 11" , 8.5 × 11", 8.5 × 11" , 8.5 × 14", ment Sizes 8.5 × 13", 8.5 × 14" 11 × 17

When using the Mixed Size Originals feature, be sure to load A5-size paper vertically. Loading A5- size paper horizontally may cause document jams or machine malfunction. During automatic detection, the machine substitutes the sizes on the left with those on the right: On document glass 8 × 10" → B5 8.5 × 13" → A4 8 × 10" → A4 8.5 × 14" → A4 8 × 10.5" → A4 11 × 15" → A3 8.5 × 11" → A4 11 × 17" → A3

On the DADF 11 × 15" → A3 * 8.5" × 11" can be changed to a size that can be detected by the machine in the customer engineer settings.

When making copies of non-standard size documents, specify the size of the document at Original Size in the Added Features screen. For details about how to enter the document size, see “3.10 Specifying the Document Scanning Size Before Making Copies - Original Size” (P. 343).

267 1.1 About Documents Loading Documents 1.1.3 Important Notes About Documents

Following describes important notes to remember when loading documents.

Document Glass Error messages are sometimes displayed without the size of the document being automatically detected, or images are not scanned and copied completely in the 1 following instances: Take the corresponding action for the trouble described in the table.

Document Action Non-standard size docu- Specify the size of the document at Original Size in the ment Added Features screen. Documents with glossy surfaces Documents that are rela- tively heavy such as bro- chures and booklets Highly transparent docu- Cover the document with a sheet of white paper the same ments such as transparen- size as the document. Or, specify the size of the document at cies Original Size in the Added Features screen. Torn, wrinkled, punched- hole, or curled documents

Do not place documents containing a large amount of moisture. Moisture in the document might transfer to parts inside the machine and cause the machine to malfunction. Do not place documents 5 kg or heavier. Doing so might break the document glass or damage the machine.

When making copies of documents in photo albums, wrinkling of the transparent plastic covering may prevent copies from being made successfully.

For details about entering document sizes, see “3.10 Specifying the Document Scanning Size Before Making Copies - Original Size” (P. 343).

268 1.1 About Documents Loading Documents Duplex Automatic Document Feeder The following types of documents may cause document jams or may be damaged when they are scanned on the DADF. Place these types of documents on the document glass.

Folded documents Torn, wrinkled, punched-hole, or curled documents Documents with glossy surfaces Paper clipped, stapled, or glued documents such as photographs Cut and pasted document Coated paper or carbon-backed documents 1 Thick documents Highly transparent documents such as transparencies Extremely light documents Heat sensitive paper

269 Loading Documents Documents Loading Placing Documents on the Document Glass on the Document Placing Documents When copying a thick document, do When copying a thick document, not use excessive force to press it against the document glass. The cause injuries. glassmay break and copies with the document If you make cover open, avoid looking directly at the copy lamp. Direct eye exposure damage. cause eye fatigue or can When placing transparencies, tracing paper or other or paper tracing transparencies, placing When highly transparent documents, placeofsheet a white paper onof top the document. Close the document cover. is When a standard-size document loaded on the document documentglass, the size of the is displayed in the area. message Open the document cover. and Place the document face down, corner of align it against the inside left the document glass. Following describes the procedure for placing documents on the document glass.

3 2 1 Procedure

1.2.1 1.2 the DADF. on them load glass or the document on documents how to place describes This section

Loading Documents

270 1 1.2 Loading Documents Loading Documents 1.2.2 Loading Copies on the DADF

The DADF can accommodate a stack of up to 50 document sheets (plain paper) of 148.5 × 210 mm to 297 × 432 mm sized paper. Multiple-sheet documents loaded on the DADF are fed in one sheet at a time in order from the topmost sheet, and are delivered with the copied surface facing down. The following describes the procedure for loading documents on the DADF. 1 A stack of up to 40 sheets of thick stock paper (101 to 128 g/m2) can be loaded at once on the DADF.

Procedure

1 Load the document making sure that its edges are neatly aligned. Remove any clips or staples attached to documents. 2 Load the document with the copy surface (in the case of a two sided document, the top side) facing up, and align it facing the direction of the arrow aligned with the inner side of the DADF. The confirmation indicator lights.

3 Move the document guide to gently touch the edge of the document.

Observe the precautions below as the document may become jammed or damaged: Do not press down on documents when they are fed into the scanner. Do not allow an excessive number of documents to accumulate on the document tray. Do not place anything on the document tray.

271 1.2 Loading Documents Loading Documents About Documents Even a stack containing both color documents and black-and-white documents can be loaded on the DADF. When placing a mixed stack of color and black- and-white documents, select Auto under Output Color in the Basic Copying screen.

For details about the Output Color, see “3.2 Selecting the Color to Copy - Output Color” (P. 295).

1 Even a stack of different size documents can be loaded on the DADF. When loading a stack of different size documents, align the document against the inner side of the document feed tray, and set Mixed Size Originals in the Added Features screen to On before making copies. Otherwise, the document will become jammed.

For details about mixed size documents, see “3.11 Simultaneously Scanning Different Size Documents - Mixed Size Originals” (P. 346).

About the Image Rotation Feature This feature automatically rotates an image of the document by 90° before it is output even if paper of the same orientation as the loaded document is not loaded in the tray. This feature is called the Image Rotation feature. Document sizes that can be used to make copies with the Image Rotation feature are A4 and 8.5 × 11" or smaller.

The default setting for Image Rotation can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default setting is On During Auto.

272 1.2 Loading Documents Loading Documents 1.2.3 About Orientation When Loading Docu- ments

This machine has a feature for shifting the top, bottom, left, and right positions of documents like the Margin Shift feature. If the document is not loaded at the correct orientation (text orientation), the document will not be copied correctly. Specify the document orientation at Original Orientation. By specifying the orientation of text in the document, the machine judges the top, bottom, left and right sides of the document, and makes copies of the document shifted to the preset 1 position.

Original Orientation is provided with two settings Head to Top and Head to Left. Default is Head to Top. So, load the document in the direction that text can be read. If the document cannot be loaded in the Head to Top, specify Head to Left under Original Orientation in the Added Features screen.

When HeadWhen Head to to TopTop is set is set WhenWhen Head Head to to Left Left is set is se

Top Top

Left ttnnn Right Left Right

Bottom Bottom

Document placed on document glass Document placed on document glass

Document loaded on DADF Document loaded on DADF

For details about the document orientation, see “3.31 Specifying the Document Orientation - Origi- nal Orientation” (P. 417).

273 1.2 Loading Documents Loading Documents

Features that require specifying of the document orientation are 2 Sided, Margin Shift, Mixed Size Originals, Edge Erase, Multi Up (N Up), Booklet Creation, Staple, and Image Rotation. Pay attention to the orientation that the document is loaded. The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.5.2 Copy Defaults” (P. 141) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default setting is Head to Top. 1

274 2Making Copies

2.1 Overview of Basic Copy Features...... 276 2.2 Making Copies on Transparencies...... 282 2.3 Copying on Heavyweight Paper...... 285 2.4 Making Copies on Non-standard Size Paper ...... 288 2.5 Interrupting a Copy Job...... 290 Overview of Basic Copy of Basic Overview Features 1 Sided, Reduce/Enlarge = 100%, and Paper Supply = Auto. On the document glass On the DADF → For details about loading documents,see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). To return currently set features to their defaults (states the power is turned on), press the Clearbutton.when All Load the document. document face the place cover, document Open the align it down, against the inside left corner of the document glass, and close the document cover. sheets are document facing up so that all the Load aligned with the document guide as shown in the figure on the left.

1 When Single Color or Dual Color is selected, copy do settings not conform to the document image quality setting. to change the default how Mode. For detailsin the System Administration about can be changed Default settings “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” see (P. Hardware”. 1 feature, this “Part 139) in for Avoid looking at the copy lamp directly when you are making copies with the docu- the lamp directly when you are making copies with copy the Avoid looking at ment cover open. Direct eye exposure can eye cause fatigue or damage. Procedure

Following are set for the original typeFollowing are set of documents corresponding to each output color: when Auto, Full Colorunder Black under Output Color is and selected, Print Photo Text and the of Photoused,of are made documents on paper isset. When default settingsare copies mode. document in the selectedsame size as the color to the center output tray.Copies are delivered is installed, When the side output tray (option) you can which of specify the center output tray or side output tray copies be are to delivered to. Text descriptions the center output tray and in this guide refer to side output tray collec- trays. tively as output 2.1 This section describes copy defaults are Output ColorBasic basic copy operations. = Black, 2 Sided = 1

Making Copies

276 2 2.1 Overview of Basic Copy Features

2 Make sure that the Basic Copying screen is displayed.

If the Basic Copying screen is not displayed, press the Features button. This will display the Basic Copying screen. Making Copies Making

3 Select the color to make copies in at Output Color.

For details about Output Color, see “3.2 Selecting the Color to Copy - Output Color” (P. 295). 4 Select the ratio to make copies at Reduce/Enlarge. If you select More..., you can select other items.

For details about Reduce/Enlarge, see “3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge” (P. 306).

277 2.1 Overview of Basic Copy Features

5 Select the paper tray at Paper Supply. If you select the Auto button, the paper tray is automatically selected according to the document size. If you select the More... button, you can select other items.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Making Copies Making Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain More... More... More... More...

2 For details about Paper Supply, see “3.5 Selecting the Paper to Use for Copying - Paper Supply” (P. 317). 6 Select the type of document to be copied at the Image Quality screen.

1 Select the Image Quality tab.

The Image Quality screen is displayed.

2 Select Original Type.

Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Original Type Auto Exposure Light/Dark/Contrast Text & Photo On L/D : Normal (Halftone) Contrast: Normal Sharpness/Saturation Color Shift Color Balance Sharpness: Normal Normal Y: 0 0 0 M: 0 0 0 Saturation: Normal C: 0 0 0 K: 0 0 0 Image Quality Presets Normal

278 2.1 Overview of Basic Copy Features

3 Select the type of document to copy.

Original Type Cancel Save Photo Type Text & Photo Halftone Text Making Copies Making Photograph Photo

Other Color Color Copies Originals

For details about Original Type, see “3.16 Selecting the Original Type - Original Type” (P. 365).

The copy density can also be adjusted in seven levels as required. The default setting is Normal. For 2 details about setting the copy density, see “3.18 Adjusting Copy Density and Contrast - Lighter/ Darker/Contrast” (P. 371). 7 Enter the number of copies on the numeric keypad. The number of copies is displayed at the top right of the screen.

If you made a mistake when entering the number of copies, press the Clear button. Pressing the Clear button resets the number of copies to 1. The details of other settings are not cleared.

8 Press Start. Scanning of the document starts, and copies are delivered onto the output tray. When making another copy You can inform the machine that there is another document to copy while it is scanning a document. This is useful, for example, when you are loading two or more documents on the DADF or when you are making two sided copies by placing documents on the document glass. When you are scanning two or more documents, you can inform the machine that they are a single set of data. 1 Select Next Original while scanning is in progress.

Copy Job :Doc. No. 00002 Close No. of Sets :1/1 Stop No. of Pages :5/50 Originals :1 Last Original (A 4 ) Full Color Next Original 100% 1A4 Collated

279 2.1 Overview of Basic Copy Features

If you do not perform any operation for a fixed period of time while the above screen is displayed, the Auto Clear feature is activated, and the machine automatically judges that there is no next document. The default for the Auto Clear time can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the default setting for this feature, see “5.4.1 Machine Clock/Timers” (P. 123) Making Copies Making in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default setting is 60 seconds. 2 Load the next document. 3 Press Start. 4 Repeat steps2 and3 for the necessary number of copies. 5 When the machine has finished scanning all documents, select Last 2 Original. Copy Job :Doc. No. 00002 Close No. of Sets :1/1 Stop No. of Pages :100/100 Originals :1 Last Original (A 4 ) Full Color Next Original 100% 1A4 Collated

Scanning of the document starts, and copies are delivered onto the output tray.

Avoid looking at the copy lamp directly when you are making copies with the document cover open. Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or damage.

280 2.1 Overview of Basic Copy Features

To stop a copy job while it is in progress

To stop a copy job while it is in progress, press the Stop button. Copying can also be stopped by selecting Copies Making the Stop button that is displayed on the display during copying. To continue copying, press the Start button again. To stop a copy job, press the Clear button.

To clear feature settings To clear all currently set features in a single operation, press the Clear All button. Pressing the Clear All button returns all settings to the same defaults as when the power is turned On. The Clear All button cannot be used while copying is in progress. The Clear All feature can also be activated automatically by a timer. For details about setting timers, see “5.4.1 Machine Clock/Timers” (P. 123) in “Part 1 Hardware”. 2 To correct the number of copies If you made a mistake when entering the number of copies, press the Clear button. Pressing the Clear button resets the number of copies to 1. The details of other settings are not cleared.

Auto Tray Switching When a tray runs out of paper during copying, this feature automatically switches the currently used tray to another containing the same size and paper type (plain paper) so that copying can be continued. This feature is called “Auto Tray Switching”. Set this Auto Tray Switch feature in the System Administration Mode. As the default setting, all trays are covered by this feature. When the same side and quality (plain paper) of paper is loaded in all trays, the order of priority in switching is 1 → 2 → 3 → 4. This order of priority can also be set in the System Administration Mode.

When the optional High Capacity Tray is installed, the High Capacity Tray becomes tray 3 (high capacity) and tray 4 (high capacity). If Auto under Reduce/Enlarge, Independent X-Y%, Multiple Up, Poster or Booklet under Reduce/ Enlarge is selected when Auto is selected for a tray, the setting will be changed to Auto Paper Off. The setting value of Auto Paper Off can also be changed. For details about how to set this feature, see “5.5.3 Copy Control” (P. 153) in “Part 1 Hardware”.

For details about setting the order of priority for the Auto Tray Switch feature, see “5.5.3 Copy Con- trol” (P. 153) in “Part 1 Hardware”.

281 1/3 Page Save ) 2 Cancel Paper Type Recycled Transparency Plain Bond Lightweight (55-63g/m . Making Copies on Trans- Copies Making parencies Standard Size Auto Size Detect Standard Size Non-standard Size When loading A4 size transparencies Tray 5 on (Bypass Tray), them vertically. we recommend loading screen is not dis- Tray) 5 (Bypass When the Tray in the Basic Supply at Paper More... select played, select Bypass Tray in the screen, and then Copying Paper Supplyscreen. Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size

Select displayed. are type can be selected and size paper whose Items For details about loading paper, see “2.1.2 see paper, loading about details For Loading 1 (P. Tray)” 5 (Bypass Tray in Paper “Part in 30) Hardware”. Load the document. For details about loading documents,Loading see “1.2 Documents” (P. 270). Tray 5 Load the transparency on the paper (Bypass Tray), and move guide to gently touch the transparency you loaded. The Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) screen is displayed on the display.

3 2 1 Do not load transparencies in trays 1 to 4. Doing so might cause the machine to malfunction or paper to jam. the machinemight cause or to malfunction 1 to 4. Doing so in trays transparenciesload Do not Use only 3R6002/3R6019 transparencies. When continuously outputting stick to each other. transparency sheets sometimes will onto transparencies, down. them cool to fan them and 20 or so sheets, every output tray from the Remove transparencies

Procedure 2.2 This section how describes transparencies. When to make copies on copies on making as thedocument type. transparency select 5 (Bypass Tray), and Tray transparencies, use

Making Copies

282 2 2.2 Making Copies on Transparencies

4 Select the paper size. The following is an example for when A4 is selected as the standard paper size.

Tray 5 (Bypass) Cancel Save

Paper Size Paper Type Making Copies Making A 3 Plain Auto Size Detect A 4 Bond Page Page Recycled Standard A 4 1/3 1/3 Size A 5 Transparency Non-standard 2 Size B 4 Lightweight (55-63g/m )

5 Select Transparency at Paper Type. Tray 5 (Bypass) Cancel Save 2 Paper Size Paper Type A 3 Plain Auto Size Detect A 4 Bond Page Page Recycled Standard A 4 1/3 1/3 Size A 5 Transparency Non-standard 2 Size B 4 Lightweight (55-63g/m )

6 Select Save. The screen returns to the Paper Supply screen. 7 Select Save. The screen returns to the Basic Copying screen. 8 Make other settings if necessary. Other settings in this case includes setting the output color or original type, selecting ratios, and setting other added features.

For details about other settings, see “Chapter 3 User Friendly Features” (P. 291).

283 2.2 Making Copies on Transparencies

9 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and select Start. Scanning of the document starts, and copies are delivered onto the output tray.

Making Copies Making Avoid looking at the copy lamp directly when you are making copies with the document cover open. Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or damage.

When continuously outputting onto transparencies, transparency sheets sometimes will stick to each other. Remove transparencies from the output tray every 20 or so sheets, and fan them to cool them down. 2

284 Making Copies 2 285 ) for the side to copy first, and 2 Copying on Heavyweight Copying Paper

When you load the paper, the 5 (Bypass When the Tray Tray) load the paper, you the display. screen is displayed on Bypass Tray, see about loading paper in the details For “2.1.2Loading Paper in Tray (Bypass 5 Tray)” (P. 30) Hardware”. 1 “Part in maximum fill line. the load paper in the tray above Do not Load the document. For details aboutloading documents, “1.2 Loading see Documents” (P. 270). side to be Load the document with the insert the copied facing down, and paper guide on paper lightly along the until it the front side of the machine comes to a stop.

2 1 then Heavyweight 2 (Side 2) to copy on the rear side. rear on the 2) to copy then Heavyweight 2 (Side When making two sided copies on heavyweight paper on Tray 5 (Bypass Tray), contact our Customer Support Center. g/m 220 - Heavywt (170 select of heavyweight paper, on both sides copies make To Procedure

For details aboutpaper can that be used, see “2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) in “Part1 Hardware”. 2.3 This section describes how to make copies on paper. heavyweight When making copies on heavyweightother paper or special media, use Tray 5 (Bypass and select the required paper type. Tray), 2.3 Copying on Heavyweight Paper

3 Select Standard Size.

Tray 5 (Bypass) Cancel Save

Paper Size Paper Type Plain Auto Size Making Copies Making Detect Bond Page Recycled Standard 1/3 Size Transparency Non-standard Lightweight (55-63g/m2) Size

Items whose paper size and type can be selected are displayed.

When the Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) screen is not displayed, select More... at Paper Supply in the Basic 2 Copying screen, and then select Bypass Tray in the Paper Supply screen. 4 Select the paper size. The following is an example for when A4 is selected as the standard paper size.

Tray 5 (Bypass) Cancel Save

Paper Size Paper Type A 3 Plain Auto Size Detect A 4 Bond Page Page Recycled Standard A 4 1/3 1/3 Size A 5 Transparency Non-standard 2 Size B 4 Lightweight (55-63g/m )

By Auto Size Detect of the paper size, only the standard paper sizes A6, B6, A5, B6 , A5 , B5 , 8.5 × 11 , A4 , B5, A4, 8.5 × 11, B4, and A3 are automatically detected. To make copies on paper of size other than the above, select the desired paper size. For details on how to select the paper size, see “3.5.2 Making Copies on a Selected Paper Size” (P. 319).

5 Display the second page of the screen using at Paper Type.

Tray 5 (Bypass) Cancel Save

Paper Size Paper Type A 3 Plain Auto Size Detect A 4 Bond Page Page Recycled Standard A 4 1/3 1/3 Size A 5 Transparency Non-standard 2 Size B 4 Lightweight (55-63g/m )

286 2.3 Copying on Heavyweight Paper

6 Select Heavywt 1 (106-169 g/m2). In this example, let’s assume that Heavywt 1 (106 to 169 g/m2) was selected.

Tray 5 (Bypass) Cancel Save

Paper Size Paper Type Making Copies Making A 3 Heavywt 1 (106-169g/m2) Auto Size Detect A 4 Heavywt 1 - Side 2 Page Page 2 Standard A 4 1/3 Heavywt 2 (170-220g/m ) 2/3 Size A 5 Heavywt 2 - Side 2 Non-standard Size B 4 Labels

7 Select Save. The Paper Supply screen is displayed. 2 8 Select Save. The Basic Copying screen is displayed. 9 Select other features if necessary. Other settings in this case includes setting the output color or original type, selecting ratios, and setting other added features.

For details, see “Chapter 3 User Friendly Features” (P. 291). 10 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Scanning of the document starts, and copies are delivered onto the output tray.

Avoid looking at the copy lamp directly when you are making copies with the document cover open. Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or damage.

287 1/3 Page Save ) 2 Cancel Paper Type Recycled Transparency Plain Bond Lightweight (55-63g/m . Making Copies on Non- on Copies Making Size Paper standard Non-standard Size Auto Size Detect Standard Size Non-standard Size

Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size The area for entering the paper size is displayed. paper the for entering area The TrayWhen the 5 (Bypass Tray)screen is not displayed,Paper select More... at Supply in the Basic screen. Supply Paper the in Tray Bypass select then and screen, Copying Do not load paper in the tray above the maximum fill above the maximum load paper in the tray Do not line. Select Insert the paper into the tray with Insert the paper into the tray and its the copy side facing down feed top edge up against the paper entrance. (Bypass Tray) 5 the Tray the paper, When you load screen is displayed on the display. For details about loading paper in the see Bypass Tray, “2.1.2 Loading PaperTray in 5 (Bypass Tray)” (P. 30) 1 Hardware”. in “Part Place the document on the document glass. Place the document glass. document the of side the left is against of the document that the top edge document so the Place For details about loading documents,Loading see “1.2 Documents” (P. 270).

3 2 1

Procedure 2.4 This section non-standard size paper. When describes how to make copies on making cop- be entered. the size must non-standard size paper, ies on

Making Copies

288 2 2.4 Making Copies on Non-standard Size Paper

4 In the entry area that is displayed, specify the paper size in the X direction using , and the paper size in the Y direction using .

Tray 5 (Bypass) Cancel Save

Paper Size (100-305) Paper Type Making Copies Making Y Plain Auto Size 200 mm Detect X Bond (140-482) Page Standard Recycled 1/3 200 mm Size Transparency Non-standard Size Lightweight (55-63g/m2)

5 Select the paper type at Paper Type. If necessary, you can scroll the page using . 2

Tray 5 (Bypass) Cancel Save

Paper Size (100-305) Paper Type Y Plain Auto Size 200 mm Detect X Bond (140-482) Page Standard Recycled 1/3 200 mm Size Transparency

Non-standard 2 Size Lightweight (55-63g/m )

6 Select Save. The screen returns to the Paper Supply screen. 7 Select Save. The screen returns to the Basic Copying screen. 8 Select other features if necessary. Other settings in this case includes setting the output color or original type, selecting ratios, and setting other added features.

For details, see “Chapter 3 User Friendly Features” (P. 291). 9 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Scanning of the document starts, and copies are delivered onto the output tray.

Avoid looking at the copy lamp directly when you are making copies with the document cover open. Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or damage.

289 . . Start Interrupt , and press numeric keypad . Interrupting a Copy Job a Copy Interrupting Interrupt .

Avoid looking at the copy lamp directly when you are making copies with making copies are you when directly copy lamp Avoid looking at the the document cover open. Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or damage. The interrupt indicator goes out to indicate that the interrupt is canceled. out to indicate that the interrupt is goes interrupt indicator The Replace the document with the original document, and press Copyingwas interrupted that step at 1 is resumed. Select other features if necessary. setting and ratios, original type, selecting or includes setting the color mode Other settings in this case features. advanced other For details, see “Chapter 3 User Friendly Features”(P. 291). Enter the number of copies using the Start output tray. onto the delivered copies are document starts, and the of Scanning When the you have finished making the interrupt copy, press Replace the document. Press operation stops. If the Interrupt button was pressed during The interrupt indicator lights, and machine indicator The interrupt the machine. on is reserved interrupt the or copying, a document of scanning stops. operation lights when machine and blinks,

6 5 4 3 2 1

Procedure 2.5 press- bycontinuous copying job during to and make copies of a rush Youcangive priority ing Interrupt. Pressingpauses Interrupt continuous copying when midway it is OK the for job stopped. to be When ancanceled, copying interrupt is is from resumed where stopped.it was

Making Copies

290 2 3User Friendly Features

3.1 How to Switch the Screen Display...... 292 3.2 Selecting the Color to Copy - Output Color ...... 295 3.3 Making One sided/Two sided Copies - 2 Sided ...... 299 3.3.1 Making One sided Copies ...... 299 3.3.2 Copying on Two Sides ...... 301 3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge ...... 306 3.4.1 Making Copies at the Same Copy Ratio for the X and Y Direc- tions...... 306 3.4.2 Making Copies at Independent Copy Ratios for the X and Y Directions...... 311 3.4.3 Making Copies at Specified Dimensions in the X and Y Direc- tions...... 313 3.5 Selecting the Paper to Use for Copying - Paper Supply ...... 317 3.5.1 Making Copies With the Paper Automatically Selected...... 317 3.5.2 Making Copies on a Selected Paper Size ...... 319 3.6 Sorting Copies Before Output - Output...... 324 3.7 Outputting to the Finisher Tray - Output/Stapling...... 327 3.7.1 Outputting to the Finisher Tray...... 328 3.7.2 Stapling Copies ...... 330 3.8 Moving the Position of Images in the Copy - Margin Shift ...... 333 3.9 Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document - Border Erase ...... 340 3.10 Specifying the Document Scanning Size Before Making Copies - Original Size...... 343 3.11 Simultaneously Scanning Different Size Documents - Mixed Size Origi- nals ...... 346 3.12 Making Copies From a Bound Document Onto Separate Sheets - Bound Originals ...... 351 3.13 Copying Multiple Documents Onto One Sheet - Multiple Up ...... 354 3.14 Inserting Blank Sheets Between Copied Transparencies - Transparency Separators ...... 357 3.15 Making Copies With the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally - Image Rotation ...... 362 3.16 Selecting the Original Type - Original Type...... 365 3.17 Erasing the Background Color of Documents - Auto Exposure...... 369 3.18 Adjusting Copy Density and Contrast - Lighter/Darker/Contrast ...... 371 3.19 Adjusting the Sharpness and Saturation of Images - Sharpness/Color Saturation ...... 373 3.20 Adjusting Tone - Color Shift ...... 375 3.21 Adjusting Color Balance - Color Balance ...... 378 3.22 Selecting Image Quality - Image Quality Presets ...... 380 3.23 Outputting a Cover for Copies - Covers...... 382 3.24 Creating a Booklet - Booklet Creation ...... 385 3.25 Making Two sided Copies From a Bound Document - Book Duplex ...... 391 3.26 Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet - Repeat Image ...... 395 3.27 Making Enlarged Copies Spread Over Multiple Sheets - Poster...... 398 3.28 Making Reversed Copies of Images - Mirror Image/Negative Image ...... 400 3.29 Storing Frequently Used Setups - Stored Jobs ...... 403 3.29.1 Storing Copy Setups to Stored Jobs ...... 403 3.29.2 Deleting Stored Jobs ...... 405 3.29.3 Copying With Stored Jobs ...... 407 3.30 Making Copies of Documents at Different Settings in a Single Operation - Build Job...... 408 3.31 Specifying the Document Orientation - Original Orientation...... 417 How to Switch the Screen 3.1 Display

This section describes how to view screens required for copy operations and how to switch screen displays. For copy operations, press the Features button on the control panel to display the Copy (Basic Copying) screen. Select the Menu button in the Copy screen. The Menu screen is displayed. If you select the Copy button in the displayed screen, the Copy screen is displayed. Perform this operation if User Friendly Features Friendly User the copy screen is not displayed. Various copy features are displayed on the Copy screen in the form of buttons.

Copy Scan Fax

On machines installed with the fax feature, the Fax button is displayed on the Menu screen. For details about the fax feature, see the User Guide (Facsimile).

How to View/Switch the Copy Screen Copy operations are performed in the copy screen. The copy screen has four tabs, Basic Copying, Added Features, Image Quality, and Others. The screens that are displayed from each of the tabs are each called the Basic Copying screen, Added Features screen, Image Quality screen, and Others screen. In each of these screens, features are displayed in the form of buttons. How these features buttons are displayed differs according to which optional accessories are installed. Default settings are set to each of the features. These default settings can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the defaults, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”.

This chapter basically describes examples where an offset catch tray are installed.

292 3.1 How to Switch the Screen Display

Basic Copying screen Four basic copying are displayed in the Basic Copying screen. This screen differs from other screens in that frequently selected items are displayed as long, horizontal buttons, which are organized in a list so that they can be selected immediately. User Friendly Features Friendly User

Added Features screen When the Light Finisher (option) is installed 3

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output/Stapling Margin Shift Border Erase Auto S1: No Shift : 2mm : 2mm Center Output Tray S2: No Shift : 0mm Original Size Mixed Size Originals Bound Originals Auto Size Detect Off Off

Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation 1 Up Off On during Auto Staple Position

Image Quality screen

293 3.1 How to Switch the Screen Display

Others screen

Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Covers Booklet Creation Book Duplex No Covers Off Off

Repeat Image Poster Mirror/Negative Image User Friendly Features Friendly User Off Off Mirror Image: Off Negative Image: Off Stored Jobs Build Job Original Orientation Off Head to Top

About Buttons in Screens If you select a feature button in a screen, a screen for making further settings is displayed. Set the values for each of the features in this screen. Pressing the Save button applies the settings, and closes the setup screen. To cancel setting up of fea- 3 tures midway, select the Cancel button. In the Basic Copying screen displayed below, the setup screen is displayed only when a feature button at the bottom of each item is selected.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Feature Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Buttons Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain More... More... More... More...

Entry field

Reduce/Enlarge Cancel Save

Preset % (25-400) 1 2 3

100 % Variable % 4 5 6

Independent 7 8 9 X-Y%

Calculator % 0 C

Selection buttons Scroll buttons

294 Selecting the Color to 3.2 Copy - Output Color

The color can be selected when making copies. Following shows the available color modes:

Auto The machine automatically judges the color of the original, and makes copies in full color if the document is color, and in one color (black) if the document is black-and-white.

Full Color Features Friendly User The machine makes copies in full color using four colors of toner, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black. Black The machine makes copies in black only in spite of the document’s colors. Dual Color The machine makes copies of color documents in two preset colors. The color of color areas and black areas in the document can be specified. Other Color Modes Dual Color and Single Color can be set.

Color document Copy 3 Basic Copying

FullFull ColorColor BlackBlack DualDual ColorColor SingleSingle ColorColor Others Image Quality Added Features (When(When Red/Black Red/ is set) (When(When Magenta Magenta is set) Black is set) is set)

B/W document Copy

BlackBlack SingleSingle ColorColor (When(When GreenGreen isis set)set)

The default setting of the color mode can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the defaults, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default setting is Black. If color limits have been set in totals management, copies cannot be made in the restricted colors. For details about color restrictions, see “6.3.2 Setting Color Mode/Maximum Number” (P. 201) in “Part 1 Hardware”. When Negative Image is selected, Dual Color cannot be selected. Also, when Single Color or Dual Color is selected, Original Type cannot be selected. For details about how to set user custom colors, see “5.5.6 Custom Colors” (P. 156) in “Part 1 Hardware”.

295 3.2 Selecting the Color to Copy - Output Color

When Color Only is selected in color limits, Black-and-white and Auto cannot be selected. Also, when B/W Only is set, Full Color, Single Color, Dual Color, and Auto cannot be selected.

Procedure

User Friendly Features Friendly User 1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Set the color mode type to make copies at Output Color in the Basic Copying screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto 3 Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain

Basic Copying More... More... More... More...

3 If the desired color mode is not displayed on screen at Output Color, select More....

de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features The Output Color screen is displayed.

The resulting color in the copy differs in the following two instances: when copies are made with the same color set at Color Image and Black/White Image for Dual Color, and when copies are made with the color set at Color Selection for Single Color. The color displayed at Color Setting can be set. For details about how to set this feature, see “5.5.2 Copy Defaults” (P. 141) in “Part 1 Hardware”.

When the Dual Color button is selected 1 To specify the color of colored areas in the document, select Color Image.

Output Color Cancel Save Dual Color Auto Dual Color Color Image Red Full Color Single Color Black/White Image Black Black

The Color Image screen is displayed.

296 3.2 Selecting the Color to Copy - Output Color

2 Select the color, and select Save.

Color Image Cancel Save

Custom Color 1 Custom Color 4 Red Yellow 0 0 0 0 0 0

Custom Color 5 Features Friendly User Green Magenta Custom Color 2 0 0 0 0 0 0

Custom Color 3 Custom Color 6 Blue Cyan 0 0 0 0 0 0

The screen returns to the Output Color screen. 3 To specify the color of black areas in the document, select Black/White Image.

Output Color Cancel Save Dual Color Auto Dual Color Color Image Red Full Color 3 Single Color Black/White Image Black Black Basic Copying

The Black/White Image screen is displayed. 4 Select the color, and select Save. de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features Black/White Image Cancel Save

Red Custom Color 1 Custom Color 4 Yellow 0 0 0 0 0 0 Green Custom Color 5 Magenta Custom Color 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 Blue Custom Color 3 Custom Color 6 Cyan Black 0 0 0 0 0 0

The screen returns to the Output Color screen. 5 Select Save. The screen returns to the Basic Copying screen.

297 3.2 Selecting the Color to Copy - Output Color

When the Single Color button is selected 1 To specify the color, select Color Selection.

Output Color Cancel Save Single Color Auto User Friendly Features Friendly User Dual Color Color Selection Full Color Red Single Color Black

The Color Image screen is displayed. 2 Select the color, and select Save.

Color Image Cancel Save

Custom Color 1 Custom Color 4 3 Red Yellow 0 0 0 0 0 0 Custom Color 5 Green Magenta Custom Color 2 0 0 0 0 0 0

Custom Color 3 Custom Color 6 Basic Copying Blue Cyan 0 0 0 0 0 0

The screen returns to the Output Color screen. 3 Select Save.

de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features The screen returns to the Basic Copying screen.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 4 Select other features if necessary. 5 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies will be made at the selected output color.

298 Making One sided/Two sided 3.3 Copies - 2 Sided

Copies of one sided and two sided documents can be made on one side or two sides.

To make copies using 1 → 2 Sided, 128 MB Memory kit is required. To make copies using 2 → 2 Sided, 128 MB Memory kit is required. The default setting for 2 Sided can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to User Friendly Features Friendly User change the defaults, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default setting is 1 → 1 Sided. When the top side of the document is placed on the document glass to make two sided copies, also place the rear side on the document on the document glass. When making two sided copies, select standard-size paper.

3.3.1 Making One sided Copies

Make one sided copies from one sided or two sided documents.

One-sided document Two-sided document One-sided copy 3

A A Report Report Report Basic Copying B B

1st sheet 2nd sheet 1st sheet 2nd sheet de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select 1 → 1 Sided or 2 → 1 Sided at 2 Sided in the Basic Copying screen. To specify the original type, orientation, and other details, select More....

299 3.3 Making One sided/Two sided Copies - 2 Sided

When the More... button is selected The 2 Sided screen is displayed. 1 Select 1 → 1 Sided or 2 → 1 Sided.

2 Sided Cancel Close User Friendly Features Friendly User 1 -> 1 Sided Original Orientation Head to Top 1 -> 2 Sided

2 -> 2 Sided Head to Left

2 -> 1 Sided

2 When 2 → 1 Sided is selected, select the desired item under Originals. When 1 → 1 Sided is selected, proceed to step3 .

2 Sided Cancel Close

1 -> 1 Sided Originals Original Orientation 3 Head to Head Head to Top 1 -> 2 Sided

Basic Copying 2 -> 2 Sided Head to Toe Head to Left 2 -> 1 Sided

de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features When Originals is set to Head to Head, select this when the top and bottom of the image are the same on the top and rear sides of the first document sheet. When Originals is set to Head to Toe, select this when the top and bottom of the image are inverted on the top and rear sides of the first document sheet.

Head to Head Head to Toe

NO.1 NO.1 NO.2 NO.1 NO.1 NO.2 NO.2 NO.2

1st sheet 2nd sheet 1st sheet 2nd sheet

3 Confirm Original Orientation.

2 Sided Cancel Close

1 -> 1 Sided Original Orientation Head to Top 1 -> 2 Sided

2 -> 2 Sided Head to Left

2 -> 1 Sided

300 3.3 Making One sided/Two sided Copies - 2 Sided

If the Original Orientation setting differs from the direction that the document is loaded, the top part of the document will be different and the copy result will not be as intended. For details about Origi- nal Orientation, see “3.31 Specifying the Document Orientation - Original Orientation” (P. 417). Head to Top Head to Left User Friendly Features Friendly User Top Top

Top Top

DocumentDocument GlassGlass DADFDADF DocumentDocument GlassGlass DADFDADF

3 Confirm the settings, and select Close. The screen returns to the Basic Copying screen. 4 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features if necessary. 3 Basic Copying To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 5 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. One sided copies will be delivered. de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features 3.3.2 Copying on Two Sides

Make two sided copies from one sided or two sided documents.

One-sided document Two-sided document Two-sided copy

A Report Report Report B

1st sheet 2nd sheet

Two sided copies cannot be made on Tray 5 (Bypass Tray). When making two sided copies, this feature cannot be combined with the Image Repeat, Book Duplex, Poster, and Booklet Creation features. The Transparency Separator feature cannot be combined with 1 → 2 Sided and 2 → 2 Sided.

301 3.3 Making One sided/Two sided Copies - 2 Sided

Making Two sided Copies from One sided Documents Make two sided copies from one sided documents.

Procedure User Friendly Features Friendly User 1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select 1 → 2 Sided at 2 Sided in the Basic Copying screen. To specify the original type, orientation, and other details, select More....

Basic Copying Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain More... More... More... More...

When the More... button is selected The 2 Sided screen is displayed. de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features 1 Select the desired item under Copies.

2 Sided Cancel Close

1 -> 1 Sided Copies Original Orientation Head to Head Head to Top 1 -> 2 Sided

2 -> 2 Sided Head to Toe Head to Left 2 -> 1 Sided

When Copies is set to Head to Head, select this when the top and bottom of the image are the same on the top and rear sides of the first document sheet. When Copies is set to Head to Toe, select this when the top and bottom of the image are inverted on the top and rear sides of the first document sheet.

Head to Head Head to Toe

NO.1 NO.2 NO.1 NO.1 NO.2 NO.1 NO.2 NO.2

1st sheet 2nd sheet 1st sheet 2nd sheet

302 3.3 Making One sided/Two sided Copies - 2 Sided

2 Confirm Original Orientation.

2 Sided Cancel Close

1 -> 1 Sided Copies Original Orientation Head to Head Head to Top 1 -> 2 Sided User Friendly Features Friendly User

2 -> 2 Sided Head to Toe Head to Left 2 -> 1 Sided

Head to Top Head to Left

Top Top

Top Top 3

DocumentDocument GlassGlass DADFDADF DocumentDocument GlassGlass DADFDADF Basic Copying

3 Confirm the settings, and select Close. The screen returns to the Basic Copying screen. de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features 4 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 5 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and select Start. One sided documents will be copied onto both sides of the paper.

303 3.3 Making One sided/Two sided Copies - 2 Sided

Making Two sided Copies from Two sided Documents Make two sided copies from two sided documents.

Procedure User Friendly Features Friendly User 1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select 2 → 2 Sided at 2 Sided in the Basic Copying screen. To specify the required finish, orientation, and other details, select More....

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply 3 Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Basic Copying Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain More... More... More... More...

When the More... button is selected The 2 Sided screen is displayed. de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features 1 Specify the desired item under Originals and Copies.

2 Sided Cancel Close

1 -> 1 Sided Originals Copies Original Orientation Head to Head Head to Head Head to Top 1 -> 2 Sided

2 -> 2 Sided Head to Left Head to Toe Head to Toe 2 -> 1 Sided

When Originals or Copies is set to Head to Head, select this when the top and bottom of the image are the same on the top and rear sides of the first document sheet. When Originals or Copies is set to Head to Toe, select this when the top and bottom of the image are inverted on the top and rear sides of the first document sheet.

Head to Head Head to Toe

NO.1 NO.1 NO.2 NO.2

304 3.3 Making One sided/Two sided Copies - 2 Sided

2 Select Original Orientation.

2 Sided Cancel Close

1 -> 1 Sided Originals Copies Original Orientation Head to Head Head to Head Head to Top 1 -> 2 Sided User Friendly Features Friendly User

2 -> 2 Sided Head to Left Head to Toe Head to Toe 2 -> 1 Sided

Head to Top Head to Left

Top Top

Top Top 3

DocumentDocument GlassGlass DADFDADF DocumentDocument GlassGlass DADFDADF Basic Copying

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 5 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Two sided documents will be copied onto both sides of the paper.

305 Making Enlarged/Reduced 3.4 Copies - Reduce/Enlarge

Copies can be enlarged or reduced at a desired copy ratio. There are two ways of specifying the copy ratio: by specifying the same copy ratio for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) directions, and by specifying independent copy ratios for these directions. User Friendly Features Friendly User The default setting for Reduce/Enlarge can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the defaults, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default setting is 100%.

3.4.1 Making Copies at the Same Copy Ratio for the X and Y Directions

This section describes how to make copies at the same copy ratio for the X and Y directions.

3 Document Copy

A Basic Copying A A

B B B

de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features 100%100% Reduce/Enlarge R/E Presets Presets

There are two ways of making copies with the same copy ratio specified for the X and Y directions: By selecting a preset copy ratio By selecting a variable ratio (zoom)

When Auto % is selected, the copy ratio is changed to 100% when the Auto button at Paper Supply is selected. If Multi Up (N Up) or Poster is selected when 100% is selected, the copy ratio is changed to Auto %. When entering the document size, set the copy ratio to 100% or more when making copies of documents shorter than 50 mm (in either X or Y direction). If Auto % is selected when Auto is selected at the tray selection, the tray at Auto Paper OFF is selected. For details about setting Auto Paper OFF, see “5.5.3 Copy Control” (P. 153) in “Part 1 Hardware”.

306 3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge

Making Copies at a Selected Ratio Enlarged or reduced copies can be made using one of several preset ratios. 100% Copies are made at the same size as the document.

Auto % Features Friendly User The copy ratio is automatically set based upon the document and paper sizes, and the document is copied to fit in the selected paper. With Paper Supply, use a button other than Auto. R/E Presets You can select from seven standard scaling ratios when making enlarged/reduced copies from one standard paper size to another.

Ratio Paper Size 141% (A4 → A3 / B5 → B4) 122% (A4 → B4 / A5 → B5) 115% (B4 → A3 / B5 → A4) 86% (A3 → B4 / A4 → B5) 3 81% (B4 → A4 / B5 → A5) 70% (A3 → A4 / B4 → B5) Basic Copying 50% A3 → A5

If paper of the same orientation as the document is not loaded when Image Rotation is set to Off, images are sometimes copied incomplete. Either load paper of the same orientation as the docu- Others Image Quality Added Features ment, or set Always On at Image Rotation. Note, however, that the image will not be rotated when Booklet Creation or Multiple Up are not selected when the paper size is A4 or larger. Even if Image Rotation is set to On during Auto, the image is not rotated when a button other than Auto % is selected at Reduce/Enlarge and Auto at Paper Supply. Buttons that are displayed can be changed. For details, see “5.5.5 Reduce/Enlarge Presets” (P. 155) in “Part 1 Hardware”. When the Poster feature is set, settings other than Auto % cannot be selected at ratio selection. When Auto Repeat is set at Repeat Image, Auto % cannot be selected at Reduce/Enlarge.

Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270).

307 3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge

2 Set the desired copy ratio at Reduce/Enlarge in the Basic Copying screen. If the desired copy ratio is not displayed on screen, select More....

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features User Friendly Features Friendly User Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain More... More... More... More...

When the More... button is selected The Reduce/Enlarge screen is displayed. 1 Select Reduce/Enlarge Presets. 3 Reduce/Enlarge Cancel Save Preset % (25-400) A3->A4 100% 70% B4->B5 115% B4->A3 100 %

Basic Copying Variable % Auto% 81% B4->A4 122% A4->B4 Independent X-Y% 50% A3->A5 86% A3->B4 141% A4->A3 Calculator % B5->B4

de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features 2 Select the copy ratio.

Reduce/Enlarge Cancel Save

Preset % (25-400) A3->A4 100% 70% B4->B5 115% B4->A3 100 % Variable % Auto% 81% B4->A4 122% A4->B4 Independent X-Y% 50% A3->A5 86% A3->B4 141% A4->A3 Calculator % B5->B4

3 Select Save. The screen returns to the Basic Copying screen. 3 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 4 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies will be made at the selected copy ratio.

308 3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge

Making Copies by Selecting a Variable Ratio (zoom) You can make copies by selecting a variable ratio. You can specify the copy ratio within the range 25 to 400% in 1% increments. The table below is a quick guide for when you make enlarged or reduced copies at standard sizes. Refer to this

table when you are specifying the copy ratio. Features Friendly User

Copy A5 B5 A4 B4 A3 Document A6 141% 173% 200% 245% 282% B6 115% 141% 163% 200% 231% A5 100% 122% 141% 173% 200% B5 81% 100% 115% 141% 163% A4 70% 86% 100% 122% 141% B4 58% 70% 81% 100% 115% A3 50% 61% 70% 86% 100% 3 Basic Copying

Variable % cannot be set when Poster is selected. If Multi Up (N Up) or Poster is selected when Variable % is selected, the copy ratio is changed to Auto %. de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select More... at Reduce/Enlarge in the Basic Copying screen.

The Reduce/Enlarge screen is displayed.

309 3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge

3 Select Variable %.

Reduce/Enlarge Cancel Save

Preset % (25-400) A3->A4 100% 70% B4->B5 115% B4->A3 100 % Variable % User Friendly Features Friendly User Auto% 81% B4->A4 122% A4->B4 Independent X-Y% 50% A3->A5 86% A3->B4 141% A4->A3 Calculator % B5->B4

4 Specify the copy ratio by 0 to 9 displayed on the screen or .

Reduce/Enlarge Cancel Save

Preset % (25-400) 1 2 3

100 % Variable % 4 5 6

Independent 7 8 9 3 X-Y% Calculator % 0 C Basic Copying

To change the copy ratio you entered, select the C button to clear the numerical value and enter the copy ratio again.

de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features 5 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Basic Copying screen. 6 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 7 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies will be made at the specified copy ratio.

310 3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge

3.4.2 Making Copies at Independent Copy Ratios for the X and Y Directions

The following describes how to make copies at different copy ratios for the X and Features Friendly User Y directions. Copies can be made with the X and Y directions of the document scaled inde- pendently using different copy ratios. This feature is referred to as Independent X-Y%.

B/W document Copy

RatioRatio settingssettings Auto-FitAuto 3 Y: 80% X: 150% Basic Copying There are two settings for Independent X-Y% as follows: Independent X-Y% Copies can be made with the copy ratios in the X and Y directions specified within the range 25 to 400% in 1% increments.

Auto Others Image Quality Added Features Copies are made with the copy ratios in the X and Y directions automatically set to match the paper size.

This feature cannot be combined with Poster and Repeat Image set to Auto Repeat. If Multiple Up or Poster is selected when Independent X-Y% is selected, the copy ratio is changed to Auto %.

Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270).

311 3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge

2 Set the tray containing the paper to make copies on at Paper Supply in the Basic Copying screen. When selecting Auto under Independent X-Y%, select a tray other than Auto at Paper Supply.

3 Select More... at Reduce/Enlarge.

The Reduce/Enlarge screen is displayed.

de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features 4 Select Independent X-Y%.

Reduce/Enlarge Cancel Save

Preset % (25-400) A3->A4 100% 70% B4->B5 115% B4->A3 100 % Variable % Auto% 81% B4->A4 122% A4->B4 Independent X-Y% 50% A3->A5 86% A3->B4 141% A4->A3 Calculator % B5->B4

5 Either select Auto, or specify each of the copy ratios in the X and Y directions by .

Reduce/Enlarge Cancel Save X Y Preset % (25-400) (25-400) Y 100 % XY 100 % Variable % X Independent X-Y% Auto Calculator %

312 3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge

If you use the buttons under XY, the numerical values for the X and Y directions can be changed by the same increment or decrement.

6 Confirm the settings, and select Save. Features Friendly User The screen returns to the Basic Copying screen. 7 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 8 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies will be made at the selected copy ratio. 3 3.4.3 Making Copies at Specified Dimensions in the X and Y Directions Basic Copying

The following describes the procedure for making copies at specified dimensions in the X and Y directions. de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features If you specify both the document size and the required copy size, the machine will automatically calculate the copy ratios in the X and Y directions according to the sizes that you entered. The calculation results are indicated by a copy ratio within the range 25 to 400%. This feature is referred to as Calculator %.

Document Calculator %

Original Size Specify the document in the X and Y directions within the range 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm increments. Copy Size Specify the required copy size in the X and Y directions within the range 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm increments.

313 3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge

This feature cannot be combined with the Poster Feature. If Multiple Up or Poster is selected when Calculator % is selected, the copy ratio is changed to Auto %.

User Friendly Features Friendly User Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Set the tray containing the paper to make copies on at Paper Supply in the Basic Copying screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu 3 Features Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto

Basic Copying Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain More... More... More... More...

de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features 3 Select More... at Reduce/Enlarge.

The Reduce/Enlarge screen is displayed. 4 Select Calculator %.

Reduce/Enlarge Cancel Save

Preset % (25-400) A3->A4 100% 70% B4->B5 115% B4->A3 100 % Variable % Auto% 81% B4->A4 122% A4->B4 Independent X-Y% 50% A3->A5 86% A3->B4 141% A4->A3 Calculator % B5->B4

314 3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge

5 Enter Original Size at X using the numeric keypad, and select Next.

Reduce/Enlarge Cancel Save

Preset % X Y (25-400) (25-400) Y Variable % %% X Features Friendly User Original Size Original Size Independent X-Y% mm mm Copy Size Copy Size Calculator % Next mm mm

moves to Copy Size under X. 6 Enter Copy Size at X using the numeric keypad, and select Next.

Reduce/Enlarge Cancel Save

Preset % X Y (25-400) (25-400) Y Variable % %% X Original Size Original Size 3 Independent X-Y% 100 mm mm Copy Size Copy Size Calculator % Next mm mm Basic Copying

The calculated copy ratio is displayed at X, and moves to Original Size under Y. 7 In the same way as steps 5 and 6, enter each of the Original Size under Y and Copy Size under Y. Others Image Quality Added Features

Reduce/Enlarge Cancel Save

Preset % X Y (25-400) (25-400) Y Variable % 180 %% X Original Size Original Size Independent X-Y% 100 mm mm Copy Size Copy Size Calculator % Next 180 mm mm

To change the copy ratios you have entered, select the Next button, move , and enter the numerical values again using the numeric keypad. 8 Select Next. The calculated copy ratio is displayed at Y. 9 Select Next. The Save button can be selected. 10 Select Save. The screen returns to the Reduce/Enlarge screen.

315 3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge

11 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Basic Copying screen. 12 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features

User Friendly Features Friendly User if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 13 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies will be made at the selected copy ratio.

3 Basic Copying de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features

316 Selecting the Paper to Use 3.5 for Copying - Paper Sup- ply Select the tray loaded with the desired copy paper and make copies. There are two settings available for this feature: automatic selection of the paper matched to the size of the document, and manual selection of the tray.

The default setting for Paper Supply can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to Features Friendly User change the defaults, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default setting is Auto.

3.5.1 Making Copies With the Paper Automati- cally Selected

The machine automatically selects the tray loaded with the appropriate paper and makes copies on that paper based upon the automatically detected document size and the copy ratio currently set at Reduce/Enlarge. 3 A message is displayed on screen, for example, if the automatically selected paper is not loaded in a tray or the document size cannot be detected. Operate according to the message displayed on Basic Copying screen. If paper of the same orientation as the document is not loaded when Image Rotation is set to Off, images are sometimes copied incomplete. Either load paper of the same orientation as the document, or set Off at Image Rotation. If Auto % under Reduce/Enlarge or Auto under Independent X-Y% is selected, Auto Tray Switching is canceled. Others Image Quality Added Features

Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270) in “Part 2 Copier”. 2 Select a ratio other than Auto % at Reduce/Enlarge in the Basic Copy- ing screen.

317 3.5 Selecting the Paper to Use for Copying - Paper Supply

This feature cannot be combined with Auto % under Reduce/Enlarge, Auto under Independent X-Y%, and Auto under Paper Supply. For details about how to specify the copy ratio, see “3.4 Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies - Reduce/Enlarge” (P. 306).

User Friendly Features Friendly User 3 Select Auto at Paper Supply.

4 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features 3 if necessary.

Basic Copying To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 5 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies are made on paper that matches the selected copy ratio. de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features

Auto Tray Switching When a tray runs out of paper during copying, this feature automatically switches the currently used tray to another containing paper of the same size, orientation and type (plain paper) so that copying can be continued. (This is the Auto Tray Switching feature.) This setting can be changed in the System Administration Mode. When the same size and quality (plain paper) of paper is loaded in all trays, the order of priority in switching is tray 1 → 2 → 3 → 4. Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) is not switched to.

318 3.5 Selecting the Paper to Use for Copying - Paper Supply

3.5.2 Making Copies on a Selected Paper Size

Select the tray loaded with the desired copy paper and make copies. If you want to make copies on paper that cannot be loaded on trays 1 to 4, use Tray 5 (Bypass Tray). Features Friendly User

Selecting Trays 1 to 4 to Make Copies Select the tray loaded with the appropriate size paper from trays 1 to 4 for making copies.

If paper of the same orientation as the document is not loaded when Image Rotation is set to Off, images are sometimes copied incomplete. Either load paper of the same orientation as the document, or set Always On at Image Rotation. Note, however, that the image will not be rotated when Booklet Creation or Multiple Up is not selected when the paper size is A4 or larger. Even if Image Rotation is set to On during Auto, the image is not rotated when a setting other than Auto % is selected at Reduce/Enlarge and Auto at Paper Supply. 3 Buttons that are displayed can be changed. For details, see “5.5.5 Reduce/Enlarge Presets”

(P. 155) in “Part 1 Hardware”. Basic Copying When the Poster feature is set, settings other than Auto % cannot be selected at Reduce/Enlarge. When Auto Repeat is set at Repeat Image, Auto % cannot be selected at Reduce/Enlarge.

Procedure de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features 1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Set the tray containing the paper to make copies on at Paper Supply in the Basic Copying screen. If the desired tray is not displayed on screen, select More....

319 3.5 Selecting the Paper to Use for Copying - Paper Supply

When the More... button is selected 1 Select the tray containing the desired paper from trays 1 to 4.

Paper Supply Cancel Save

3 8.5 11’’ Auto

User Friendly Features Friendly User Plain

1 A 4 4 A 4 Plain Plain

2 A 3 5 Bypass... Plain Size Detect Plain

2 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Basic Copying screen. 3 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features 3 if necessary. To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. Basic Copying 4 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. The copies will be made on paper from the selected tray.

de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features Selecting Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) If you want to make copies on paper that cannot be loaded on trays 1 to 4, use Tray 5 (Bypass Tray). When selecting Tray 5 (Bypass Tray), be sure to specify the type of paper you are going to load.

For details on paper that can be loaded in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray), see “2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) in “Part 1 Hardware”. This feature cannot be combined with the Poster and Stapler features when the stapler tray is selected as the output tray. Two sided copies cannot be made on Tray 5 (Bypass Tray). This feature cannot be combined with the 2 Sided Copy, Auto % under Reduce/Enlarge, Auto under Independent X-Y%, Auto Center under Copy Position, Corner Shift, Negative Image, Mirror Image, Book Duplex, Booklet Creation, Multi-Up (N Up), Repeat Image, Bound Originals, Poster, and stapling features when Automatic Size Detect is selected.

320 3.5 Selecting the Paper to Use for Copying - Paper Supply

Procedure

1 Load the document. User Friendly Features Friendly User

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select More... at Paper Supply in the Basic Copying screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain More... More... More... More... 3 3 Select Bypass.... Basic Copying Paper Supply Cancel Save

3 8.5 11’’ Auto Plain

1 A 4 4 A 4 Plain Plain de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features 2 A 3 5 Bypass... Plain Size Detect Plain

The Tray 5 (Bypass) screen is displayed.

If you load the paper first in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray), the Tray 5 (Bypass) screen will automatically be displayed. 4 Select Paper Size.

Tray 5 (Bypass) Cancel Save

Paper Size Paper Type Plain Auto Size Detect Bond Page Recycled Standard 1/3 Size Transparency Non-standard Lightweight (55-63g/m2) Size

When the Auto Size Detect button is selected Proceed to Step 5.

321 3.5 Selecting the Paper to Use for Copying - Paper Supply

When the Standard Size button is selected Select the paper size. If necessary, you can scroll the page using the buttons.

Tray 5 (Bypass) Cancel Save

Paper Size Paper Type Plain

User Friendly Features Friendly User A 3 Auto Size Detect A 4 Bond Page Page Recycled Standard A 4 1/3 1/3 Size A 5 Transparency Non-standard 2 Size B 4 Lightweight (55-63g/m )

When Non-standard Size button is selected Enter the paper size using the buttons.

Tray 5 (Bypass) Cancel Save

Paper Size (100-305) Paper Type Y Plain Auto Size 200 mm Detect X Bond 3 (140-482) Page Standard Recycled 1/3 200 mm Size Transparency Non-standard Lightweight (55-63g/m2) Basic Copying Size

When making copies on 12" × 18" paper, move the paper guides to 12"/305 mm. For details about how to move the paper guides, see “Chapter 2 Loading Paper” (P. 27)” in “Part 1 Hardware”. de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features 5 Select Paper Type. If necessary, you can scroll the page using .

Tray 5 (Bypass) Cancel Save

Paper Size (100-305) Paper Type Y Plain Auto Size 200 mm Detect X Bond (140-482) Page Standard Recycled 1/3 Size 200 mm Transparency Non-standard Size Lightweight (55-63g/m2)

6 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Paper Supply screen. 7 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Basic Copying screen. 8 Load the desired paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) if it is not loaded.

322 3.5 Selecting the Paper to Use for Copying - Paper Supply

9 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. User Friendly Features Friendly User 10 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies are made on the paper loaded in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray).

The last number set is the value for the paper size/paper type displayed. But the setting returns to the default value if the power is turned off after the settings are made.

3 Basic Copying de etrsIaeQaiyOthers Image Quality Added Features

323 Sorting Copies Before Out- 3.6 put - Output

You can select from the following three ways of outputting copies. When the Offset Catch Tray (option) is installed, copies are output the output position alternately shifted to distinguish each copy job.

Document Collated Uncollated User Friendly Features Friendly User

A A Report A B A ReportB A 3 3 2 B 3 1 B 3 2 Report Report B Report 2 1 2 3 2 1 1 1

Auto 3 Copies are output collated when the document feeder, Book Duplex, Covers, Separators + N Sets or No Separators + N Sets under Transparency Separators, Booklet, and Stapling are set. Basic Copying Collated The specified number of copies are output sorted in page order.

Uncollated

Added Features The specified number of copies are output not sorted in page order.

The default setting for Output/Stapling can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default setting is Auto.

mg ult Others Image Quality To use the Output feature, the 128 MB Memory Kit must be installed. Uncollated cannot be selected when Booklet, Covers, Stapling, Separators + N Sets or No Separators + N Sets under Transparency Separators, Book Duplex, and Build Job features are selected. Collated cannot be selected when the Repeat Image and Poster features are selected.

Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270).

324 3.6 Sorting Copies Before Output - Output

2 Set Output in the Added Features screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Margin Shift Border Erase Auto S1: No Shift : 2mm : 2mm Center Output Tray S2: No Shift : 0mm

Original Size Mixed Size Originals Bound Originals Features Friendly User Auto Size Detect Off Off

Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation 1 Up Off On during Auto Portrait Original-Left

The Output screen is displayed. 3 Select how copies are to be output.

Output Cancel Save Collated or Uncollated will be Auto selected automatically according to settings. Collated will be selected when Collated Document Feeder is used. 3

Uncollated Basic Copying

When the Side Output Tray (option) is installed When the Side Output Tray (option) is installed, buttons for selecting Output Destination are displayed. Select the tray to output the copies to.

Cancel Save

Output Added Features Collated or Uncollated will be Output Destination Auto selected automatically according to settings. Collated will be selected when Center Output Collated Document Feeder is used. Tray

Side Output Tray

Uncollated Others Image Quality

For details about output when the Light Finisher (option) is installed, see “3.7 Outputting to the Fin- isher Tray - Output/Stapling” (P. 327). 4 Select Save. The screen returns to the Added Features screen. 5 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button.

325 3.6 Sorting Copies Before Output - Output

6 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. The document starts to be scanned, and copies are output in the way you specified. User Friendly Features Friendly User

3 Basic Copying Added Features mg ult Others Image Quality

326 Outputting to the Finisher 3.7 Tray - Output/Stapling

Copies can be output collated to the Finisher Tray (offset output) or each set of copies can be output in page order and stapled. The number of copies in each job that can be stapled is 2 to 50 (plain paper). Bond paper, plain paper, recycled paper, and custom paper 1 to 5 can be stapled.

Document Stapled Features Friendly User

A A Report Report B B

Stapling is possible for paper loaded in trays 1 to 4. For details on paper sizes that can be output to the Finisher Tray, see “ Sizes and Loading Capacity of Paper That Can Be Output to the Finisher Tray” below. To use the stapling feature, the Light Finisher (option) and 128 MB Memory kit must be installed. This feature cannot be combined with Tray 5 (Bypass Tray), Blank Separators under Transparency Separators, Mixed Size Originals, Uncollated, Image Repeat, Poster, and Booklet features. 3 When the replace staple cartridge message is displayed, copying will not be started even if you press the Start button. Load new staples. For details about replacing staples, see “3.2.6 Replacing the Staple Cartridge” (P. 58) Basic Copying in “Part 1 Hardware”. When there is only one sheet to output, the staple setting is automatically canceled. If you select Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) after selecting Finisher Tray as the output tray or after setting stapling, the output tray is automatically changed to the Center Output Tray. Added Features Sizes and Loading Capacity of Paper That Can Be Output to the Finisher Tray Paper Size The following shows the paper sizes that can be output to the Finisher Tray: mg ult Others Image Quality A4 , A4, B5 , B4, A3, 16K , 8K, 8 × 10", 8.5 × 11", 8.5 × 11" , 8.5 × 13", 8.5 × 14", 11 × 17" Loading Capacity The following shows the loading capacity of the Finisher Tray: Up to 1,000 sheets of A4 or 8.5 × 11" or smaller paper can be output. Up to 500 sheets of B4 or larger paper can be output. Up to 300 sheets of paper of differing size (larger size paper stacked on top of small size paper) can be output.

327 3.7 Outputting to the Finisher Tray - Output/Stapling

Staple Position The following table shows the staple positions on the left, right and up sides when the document is viewed in the direction that it is read (top side up).

Stapling User Friendly Features Friendly User Position 1 on Left 2 on Left 2 Up 1 on Right 2 on Right Paper Size

B5 , A4 , 8.5 × 11 , 16K A A A A A A A

A4*, B4, A3, 8 × 10*, A A 8.5 × 11*,8.5 × 13*, A

A A 8.5 × 14*, 8K,11 × 17 Note: Stapling at two A A locations is not possible 3 on paper marked by *.

Basic Copying About Orientation when Loading Documents Load documents as follows when loading the document with its head to left. Added Features

mg ult Others Image Quality 3.7.1 Outputting to the Finisher Tray

When the Light Finisher (option) is installed, copies are output shifted when the Finisher Tray is specified as the output destination.

For details about how to output copies, see “3.6 Sorting Copies Before Output - Output” (P. 324).

Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270).

328 3.7 Outputting to the Finisher Tray - Output/Stapling

2 Select Output/Stapling in the Added Features screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output/Stapling Margin Shift Border Erase Auto S1: No Shift : 2mm : 2mm Center Output Tray S2: No Shift : 0mm

Original Size Mixed Size Originals Bound Originals Features Friendly User Auto Size Detect Off Off

Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation 1 Up Off On during Auto Staple Position

The Output screen is displayed. 3 Select how copies are to be output.

Output Cancel Save

Collated or Uncollated will be Output Destination Auto selected automatically according to settings. Collated will be selected when Center Output Collated/ Document Feeder is used. Tray Stapling 3 Finisher Tray Uncollated Basic Copying

4 Select Finisher Tray at Output Destination.

Output Cancel Save

Collated or Uncollated will be Output Destination Added Features Auto selected automatically according to settings. Collated will be selected when Center Output Collated/ Document Feeder is used. Tray Stapling

Finisher Tray Uncollated mg ult Others Image Quality

5 Select Save. The screen returns to the Added Features screen. 6 Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 7 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. The document starts to be scanned, and copies are output to the Fnisher Tray.

329 3.7 Outputting to the Finisher Tray - Output/Stapling

3.7.2 Stapling Copies

The following describes the procedure for instructing stapling of copies before output. User Friendly Features Friendly User Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select Output/Stapling in the Added Features screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features 3 Output/Stapling Margin Shift Border Erase Auto S1: No Shift : 2mm : 2mm Center Output Tray S2: No Shift : 0mm Original Size Mixed Size Originals Bound Originals

Basic Copying Auto Size Detect Off Off

Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation 1 Up Off On during Auto Staple Position

The Output/Stapling screen is displayed. Added Features 3 Select Collated/Stapling.

Output Cancel Save

Collated or Uncollated will be Output Destination Auto selected automatically according to settings. mg ult Others Image Quality Collated will be selected when Center Output Collated/ Document Feeder is used. Tray Stapling

Finisher Tray Uncollated

4 Select Stapling.

Output Cancel Save

Output Destination Auto Stapling Center Output Collated/ Tray Stapling

Finisher Tray Uncollated

The Output/Stapling screen is displayed.

330 3.7 Outputting to the Finisher Tray - Output/Stapling

5 Confirm Original Orientation. When the document is loaded with its head to at the top, select Head to Top. When the document is loaded with its head at the left, select Head to Left.

Output/Stapling Cancel Save

Staple Position Original Orientation Features Friendly User Head to Top None

Head to Left

When the Head to Left button is selected The stapling positions when the document is loaded to face left are displayed.

Output/Stapling Cancel Save Staple Position Original Orientation Head to Top None 3

Head to Left Basic Copying

6 Select the desired stapling position, and select Save. Added Features Output/Stapling Cancel Save Staple Position: Top Left Original Orientation Head to Top None

Head to Left mg ult Others Image Quality

The screen returns to the Output/Stapling screen. 7 Finisher Tray is automatically selected at Output Destination.

Output/Stapling Cancel Save

Output Destination Auto Stapling Top Left Center Output Collated/ Tray Stapling

Finisher Tray Uncollated

When stapling copies, output trays other than Finisher Tray cannot be selected at Output Destination.

331 3.7 Outputting to the Finisher Tray - Output/Stapling

8 Select Save. The screen returns to the Added Features screen. The specified stapling position is displayed at Out- put/Stapling.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features User Friendly Features Friendly User Output/Stapling Margin Shift Border Erase Stapling: Top Left S1: No Shift : 2mm : 2mm Finisher Tray S2: No Shift : 0mm Original Size Mixed Size Originals Bound Originals Auto Size Detect Off Off

Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation 1 Up Off On during Auto Staple Position

9 Select other features if necessary. 3 To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 10 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. The document starts to be scanned, and copies are output in the way you specified. Basic Copying 11 When all copies have been output and the machine operation stops, remove the copies from the Finisher Tray.

Added Features Do not remove copies from the Finisher Tray while they are being output from the machine. mg ult Others Image Quality

332 Moving the Position of 3.8 Images in the Copy - Mar- gin Shift Copies can be made with the position of the image in the document to the left, right, top or bottom, or with the center of the document moved to the center of the output copy. Copies can also be output with a margin on the top, bottom, left or right. When making two sided prints, you can set the shift positions for both the Side 1 and Side 2. User Friendly Features Friendly User Document Copy position shift

CornerCorner ShiftShift AutoAuto Center Center

Document Margin adjust A A A 3 B B B Basic Copying

(5 mm added (5 mm added to Right) to Left)

The settings for shifting the copy position are as follows: No Shift Added Features Copies are made without the position of the image in the document shifted. Auto Center Copies are made so that the center of the document matches the center of the output copy. Corner Shift

Copies are made with the image in the document shifted to the edges or corners of the output copy. You can select Others Image Quality from eight output shift directions. Variable Shift Copies are made with the image in the document shifted to the left, right, top or bottom by any required amount. Enter the required amount within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

When Mixed Size Originals is set, the position is shifted referenced to the position of the image on the first sheet of the document. When stapling copies, either select Corner Shift, or shift the image by amount of margin at Variable Shift. The default setting for Margin Shift can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default setting is No Shift for both Side 1 and Side 2. The shift direction operates on the direction that the document was loaded. If the Original Orientation differs from the direction in which the document is loaded, the shift direction also will differ. For details, see “3.31 Spec- ifying the Document Orientation - Original Orientation” (P. 417) in “Part 2 Copier”. The image shift amount is set on the output copy. The image shift amount will not be affected even if copies are enlarged or reduced at Reduce/Enlarge. When Booklet is set, copies are always output placed in the center.

333 3.8 Moving the Position of Images in the Copy - Margin Shift

Making Copies Shifted to the Center

Procedure

User Friendly Features Friendly User 1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select Margin Shift in the Added Features screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Margin Shift Border Erase Auto S1: No Shift : 2mm : 2mm Center Output Tray S2: No Shift : 0mm Original Size Mixed Size Originals Bound Originals Auto Size Detect Off Off 3 Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation 1 Up Off On during Auto Portrait Original-Left

Basic Copying The Margin Shift screen is displayed. 3 Select Auto Center and Save.

Margin Shift Cancel Save Added Features No Shift

Auto Center

Margin Shift/ Variable Shift mg ult Others Image Quality

The screen returns to the Added Features screen. 4 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 5 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies are made with the image in the document shifted to the center of the output copy.

334 3.8 Moving the Position of Images in the Copy - Margin Shift

Making Copies Shifted by a Desired Amount Copies can be made with the copy position or margins on the top and back sides shifted symmetrically, or the copy position or margins can be shifted by different amounts on the top and back sides. User Friendly Features Friendly User Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select Margin Shift in the Added Features screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Margin Shift Border Erase 3 Auto S1: No Shift : 2mm : 2mm Center Output Tray S2: No Shift : 0mm Original Size Mixed Size Originals Bound Originals

Auto Size Detect Off Off Basic Copying

Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation 1 Up Off On during Auto Portrait Original-Left

The Margin Shift screen is displayed. Added Features 3 Select Margin Shift/Variable Shift.

Margin Shift Cancel Save

No Shift mg ult Others Image Quality Auto Center

Margin Shift/ Variable Shift

4 Select Side 1.

Margin Shift Cancel Save

No Shift Side 1 Side 2

Auto Center

Margin Shift/ Variable Shift

The Margin Shift - Side 1 screen is displayed.

335 3.8 Moving the Position of Images in the Copy - Margin Shift

5 Select the shift type. Margin Shift - Side 1 Cancel Save

No Shift Original Orientation Head to Top Auto Center User Friendly Features Friendly User

Corner Shift Head to Left

Variable Shift

When the Auto Center button is selected Copies are made so that the center of the document matches the center of the output copy.

Margin Shift - Side 1 Cancel Save

No Shift Original Orientation Head to Top Auto Center

3 Corner Shift Head to Left Variable Shift Basic Copying When the Corner Shift button is selected Select the required shift direction.

Margin Shift - Side 1 Cancel Save Original Orientation Added Features No Shift Head to Top Auto Center

Corner Shift Head to Left

Variable Shift mg ult Others Image Quality When the Variable Shift button is selected Specify the left/right direction and up/down direction by the buttons.

Margin Shift - Side 1 Cancel Save

No Shift (50-0-50) Original Orientation Head to Top 0 mm Auto Center (50-0-50) Corner Shift 0 mm Head to Left

Variable Shift

336 3.8 Moving the Position of Images in the Copy - Margin Shift

6 Set Original Orientation. The following describes an example when Corner Shift is set.

Margin Shift - Side 1 Cancel Save

No Shift Original Orientation

Head to Top Features Friendly User Auto Center

Corner Shift Head to Left

Variable Shift

Head to Top Head to Left Top Top 3 Top Top Basic Copying

DocumentDocument GlassGlass DADFDADF DocumentDocument GlassGlass DADFDADF

7 Select Save. The screen returns to the Margin Shift screen. Added Features 8 When making two sided copies, select Side 2 to set the copy position on the back side.

Margin Shift Cancel Save mg ult Others Image Quality No Shift Side 1 Side 2

Auto Center

Margin Shift/ Variable Shift

337 3.8 Moving the Position of Images in the Copy - Margin Shift

When making copies at the same settings as the top side Copies can be made at the same settings as the top side without setting the copy position or margin at Side 2. 1 Make sure that Mirror Shift is selected.

User Friendly Features Friendly User Margin Shift - Side 2 Cancel Save

No Shift Independent Auto Center Shift

Corner Shift Mirror Shift

Variable Shift

Left-right facing documents are copied with the left and right sides symmetrical. Top-bottom facing documents are copied with the top and bottom sides symmetrical. 3 2 Select Save. The screen returns to the Margin Shift screen.

Basic Copying When making copies at setting different from the top side Copies can be made with settings different to those for the top side. 1 Select the shift type. When a setup button different from the top side is selected, the Independent Shift button is automati-

Added Features cally selected.

Margin Shift - Side 2 Cancel Save

No Shift Independent Auto Center Shift mg ult Others Image Quality Corner Shift Mirror Shift

Variable Shift

2 Adjust the position to shift the margin. 3 Select Save. The screen returns to the Margin Shift screen.

338 3.8 Moving the Position of Images in the Copy - Margin Shift

9 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Added Features screen. 10 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features

if necessary. Features Friendly User

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 11 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies are made with the image in the document shifted in the output copy.

3 Basic Copying Added Features mg ult Others Image Quality

339 Erasing Edges and Margin 3.9 Shadows in the Document - Border Erase When you make copies with the document cover open or make copies from a book, black shadows sometimes appear along the edges or center margin of the output copy. If this happens, you can make copies with the shadows erased.

Variable Erase User Friendly Features Friendly User

T/B Erase L/R Erase Center Erase T/B, L/R and Center Erase T/B Erase L/R Erase Center EraseT/B, L/R and Center Erase

: Shadow erase area

With adjustment of erase margins, the following items can be set:

3 T/B Erase Shadows at the top and bottom of the document are erased. Edges on the top and bottom are erased with respect to

Basic Copying the direction that the document was loaded. The edge erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments. The default setting is 5 mm. L/R Erase Shadows on the left and right of the document are erased. Edges on the left and right are erased with respect to the direction that the document was loaded.

Added Features The border erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments. The default setting is 5 mm. Center Erase Shadows in the center of documents such as booklets or documents with facing pages are erased. The center erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments. The default setting is 0 mm. mg ult Others Image Quality When Border Erase is set to Normal, a border erase amount of 2 mm is set to top and bottom/left and right. So, to disable border erase, the border erase amount must be set to 0 mm at Variable Erase. When making two sided copies, the same border erase amount is set to the top and back sides. When Reduce/Enlarge is set, the border erase amount is also enlarged or reduced proportionately to the copy ratio. The T/B Erase and L/R Erase settings can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.5.2 Copy Defaults” (P. 141) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The border erase amount will not be affected even if Gutter in the Booklet feature is set.

340 3.9 Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document - Border Erase

Procedure

1 Load the document. User Friendly Features Friendly User

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select Border Erase in the Added Features screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Margin Shift Border Erase Auto S1: No Shift : 2mm : 2mm S2: No Shift : 0mm Original Size Mixed Size Originals Bound Originals Auto Size Detect Off Off

Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation 1 Up Off On during Auto Portrait Original-Left 3 The Border Erase screen is displayed.

3 Select Variable Erase. Basic Copying

Border Erase Cancel Save Original Orientation Head to Top Normal Added Features 2 mm 2 mm 0 mm

Variable Erase Head to Left

4 Set each of the erase widths at T/B Erase, L/R Erase, and Center Others Image Quality Erase by .

Border Erase Cancel Save Original Orientation Head to Top Normal (0-50) (0-50) (0-50) 5 mm 5 mm 0 mm

Variable Erase Head to Left

The border erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

341 3.9 Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document - Border Erase

5 Confirm Original Orientation.

Border Erase Cancel Save Original Orientation Head to Top Normal (0-50) (0-50) (0-50) User Friendly Features Friendly User 8 mm 8 mm 0 mm

Variable Erase Head to Left

Head to Top Head to Left

Top Top

3 Top Top Basic Copying DocumentDocument GlassGlass DADFDADF DocumentDocument GlassGlass DADFDADF

6 Select Save. The screen returns to the Added Features screen. Added Features 7 Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. mg ult Others Image Quality 8 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. The document starts to be scanned, and copies are output in the way you specified.

342 Specifying the Document 3.10 Scanning Size Before Making Copies - Original Size Specify the size of the document when scanning non-standard size documents or when making copies at a size different from the size of the currently loaded document.

Document Copy

X User Friendly Features Friendly User Question Question Y

Answer

There are three ways of specifying the size of documents: Auto Size Detect The machine automatically recognizes the size of the document. Standard Size Select the size of the document from the 11 preset sizes (A5, A5 , B5, B5 , A4, A4 , 8.5 × 11", 8.5 × 11" , 11 × 17", B4, A3). Free 3 Enter the desired scanning size when scanning non-standard size documents or when making copies at a size different from the size of the currently loaded document. The size can be specified in 1 mm increments within the Basic Copying range 15 to 432 mm when the document is placed horizontally (X) on the document glass, and within the range 15 to 297 mm when the document is placed horizontally (Y). We recommend using the scale on the outside of the document glass to help you specify the document size.

This feature cannot be combined with the Mixed Size Originals Added Features The default setting for Original Size can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default setting is Auto Size Detect.

Procedure Others Image Quality

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270).

343 3.10 Specifying the Document Scanning Size Before Making Copies - Original Size

2 Select Original Size in the Added Features screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Margin Shift Border Erase Auto S1: No Shift : 2mm : 2mm S2: No Shift : 0mm

User Friendly Features Friendly User Original Size Mixed Size Originals Bound Originals Auto Size Detect Off Off

Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation 1 Up Off On during Auto Portrait Original-Left

The Original Size screen is displayed. 3 Specify the desired scanning size for the document. When specifying a standard size document Select the desired scanning size.

Original Size Cancel Save 3 Auto Size A 5 B 5 (15-297) Detect Y Auto mm A 3 A 5 11x17" X

Basic Copying (15-432) A 4 B 4 8.5x11" Auto mm

A 4 B 5 8.5x11"

When specifying a non-standard size document Added Features Specify the value for the X direction using the buttons, and the value for the Y direction using the buttons.

Original Size Cancel Save

Auto Size (15-297)

mg ult Others Image Quality A 5 B 5 Detect Y 100 mm A 3 A 5 11x17" X (15-432) A 4 B 4 8.5x11" 100 mm

A 4 B 5 8.5x11"

4 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Added Features screen. 5 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button.

344 3.10 Specifying the Document Scanning Size Before Making Copies - Original Size

6 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. The document is scanned at the size you set and copies are made. User Friendly Features Friendly User

3 Basic Copying Added Features mg ult Others Image Quality

345 Simultaneously Scanning 3.11 Different Size Documents - Mixed Size Originals Documents of different sizes can be scanned in a single operation using the DADF, and copied on paper of size matched to the respective size of the document. You can also specify the size of the paper to make copies on so that copies are made on the same size of paper. User Friendly Features Friendly User Different size documents Copying to paper of same size as documents Making same-size copies

A A A B B Report Report Report B 2 2 3 1 1 2 3 3 1

On When you load a stack of different size documents, the machine automatically recognizes the document size, and 3 makes copies on paper of the corresponding size. If the machine cannot automatically detect the size of the document due to the documents being non-standard sizes, a message prompting you to enter the document size is displayed. When Reduce/Enlarge is set, select paper matched to that copy ratio before making copies. Basic Copying Off Select this when all documents are of the same size.

Original Orientation is set referenced to the position that is set for the first page of the document. Load the rest of

Added Features the document from the second page onwards in the same direction as the first page of the document. This feature cannot be combined with the Multi-Up (N Up), Booklet, and Auto Repeat under Repeat Image features. This feature cannot be combined with the Covers, Transparency Separators, and Staple features when Mixed Size Originals is set and Auto at Paper Supply is set. If Original Size is specified when Mixed Size Originals is set, the Mixed Size Originals setting is canceled. mg ult Others Image Quality The default setting for Mixed Size Originals can be changed in the customer engineer settings. Contact our Cus- tomer Support Center.

346 3.11 Simultaneously Scanning Different Size Documents - Mixed Size Originals

Procedure

1 Align all of the documents so that the Align documents to A and B sides of all documents are this corner B Features Friendly User flush against the top left corner. Remove any clips or staples attached to documents. Make sure that the documents are flush against the top left corner. Otherwise, copies might not be made properly. A

The A side of the document refers the direction of the document towards the inner side of the machine. 2 Load all documents so that they are aligned with the top left corner of the DADF, and align the document guide. 3 Basic Copying For details about loading documents, see “2.1 Loading Paper” (P. 28) in “Part 1 Hardware”.

Be sure to load the B side of the document aligned with

the inner side of the DADF. Otherwise, this may cause Added Features document jams.

How to Load Different Size Documents Load different size documents so that they are aligned with the top left corner as shown below: mg ult Others Image Quality

A Report 1 Report

B A B 1

Set documents to Head to Top Load portrait and landscape documents of B4 in size and align to top left corner. together as landscape documents and align to top left corner.

347 3.11 Simultaneously Scanning Different Size Documents - Mixed Size Originals

3 Set Paper Supply and Reduce/Enlarge in the Basic Copying screen. When making copies at 100% on paper the same size as the document Select the 100% button at Reduce/Enlarge in the Basic Copying screen, and select the Auto button at Paper Supply. User Friendly Features Friendly User Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain More... More... More... More...

When making copies of different size documents on same-size paper Select the Auto % button at Reduce/Enlarge in the Basic Copying screen, and select the tray containing the paper to make copies on at Paper Supply.

3 Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto Basic Copying Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain More... More... More... More... Added Features 4 Select Mixed Size Originals in the Added Features screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Margin Shift Border Erase Auto S1: No Shift : 2mm : 2mm

mg ult Others Image Quality S2: No Shift : 0mm Original Size Mixed Size Originals Bound Originals Auto Size Detect Off Off

Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation 1 Up Off On during Auto Portrait Original-Left

The Mixed Size Originals screen is displayed.

348 3.11 Simultaneously Scanning Different Size Documents - Mixed Size Originals

5 Select On.

Mixed Size Originals Cancel Save Original Orientation Select On for this feature when Head to Top Off copying originals of different sizes using the Document Feeder. User Friendly Features Friendly User

On Head to Left

6 Confirm Original Orientation.

Mixed Size Originals Cancel Save Align all corners of the originals and Original Orientation load in the Document feeder. (Figure 1) Head to Top Off If the portrait originals are larger than B4/11", load all in landscape orientation. (Figure 2) 12 On Head to Left 3 Basic Copying

If the Original Orientation setting differs from the direction that the document is loaded, the top part of the document will be different and the copy result will not be as intended. For details about Original Orientation, see “3.31 Specifying the Document Orientation - Original Orientation” (P. 417). Added Features

Head to Top Head to Left

Head

Head mg ult Others Image Quality

7 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Added Features screen. 8 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 9 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. The different-size documents are copied onto paper of the size that you set at step 8.

349 3.11 Simultaneously Scanning Different Size Documents - Mixed Size Originals

The table below shows various output examples that differ according to the currently selected feature if Original Orientation is set to “Head to Top” and Rotation Direction at Image Rotation is set to User Friendly Features Friendly User Portrait Original - Left Edge when making copies of different-size documents on paper of the same size.

Documents loaded on the DADF

1 2 3 4

Currently Set Features Example of Output Pattern

Reduce/Enlarge set to Auto %

3 1 2 3 4

Basic Copying

4 2 1 3

Independent X-Y% set to Auto

Added Features 4 3 1 2

4 3 1 2 mg ult Others Image Quality

Paper Supply set to Auto

1 3 4

350 Making Copies From a Bound 3.12 Document Onto Separate Sheets - Bound Originals The Bound Originals feature allows you to copy facing pages of a document on separate sheets of paper in page order. This feature is useful if you need to make separate copies from facing pages of bound originals such as a booklet.

Document Copy User Friendly Features Friendly User

Left Page then Right Copies are made from the left page of facing pages in a document starting from the left page. Right Page then Left Copies are made from the right page of facing pages in a document starting from the right page. Top Page then Bottom Copies are made from the top page of facing pages in a document starting from the top page. 3 Basic Copying When making copies using this feature, place the document on the document glass. Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately. Facing pages of a bound document can also be separated and copied on two sides. For details about how to do this, see “3.25 Making Two sided Copies From a Bound Document - Book Duplex” (P. 391). This feature cannot be combined with the Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass Tray), Multi Up (N Up), Image Repeat, Book Duplex, and Poster features. Added Features

Procedure

1 Confirm the orientation of the document before placing the bound docu- Others Image Quality ment on the document glass.

Left Page then Right Right Page then Left Top Page then Bottom

1 12 21 2 2 12 21 1

351 3.12 Making Copies From a Bound Document Onto Separate Sheets - Bound Originals

The DADF cannot be used for this feature. 2 Set Bound Originals in the Added Features screen. User Friendly Features Friendly User Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Margin Shift Border Erase Auto S1: No Shift : 2mm : 2mm S2: No Shift : 0mm Original Size Mixed Size Originals Bound Originals Auto Size Detect Off Off

Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation 1 Up Off On during Auto Portrait Original-Left

The Bound Originals screen is displayed. 3 Select the document type. 3 Bound Originals Cancel Save Off

Left Page

Basic Copying then Right Right Page then Left Top Page then Bottom Added Features 4 Select the order in which pages are to be copied. The following describes an example of how to make copies of “Left Page then Right” documents.

Bound Originals Cancel Save Center Erase Load your originals Off Both Pages mg ult Others Image Quality as shown below. Left Page then Right Left Page (0-50) Right Page Only then Left 0 mm Right Page Top Page Only then Bottom

If the Left Page Only or Right Page Only button is selected, copies of only the left pages or right pages, respectively, of the document will be made in page order.

352 3.12 Making Copies From a Bound Document Onto Separate Sheets - Bound Originals

5 When setting Center Erase, set the center erase amount by .

Bound Originals Cancel Save

Off Center Erase Load your originals Both Pages as shown below. Left Page then Right Features Friendly User Left Page (0-50) Right Page Only then Left 5 mm Right Page Top Page Only then Bottom

6 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Added Features screen. 7 Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 3 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start.

8 Basic Copying The facing pages of bound originals will be copied on separate sheets of paper. Added Features mg ult Others Image Quality

353 Copying Multiple Documents 3.13 Onto One Sheet - Multiple Up

Two or four document sheets can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper using the DADF. When using this feature, you can select the order in which the document images are arranged.

Document 2 Up Document 4 Up User Friendly Features Friendly User

1 2 3 1 1 2 22 44 33 11 4 2 3 4 2 1 22 11 1 3 2 1

2 4 4 3

2 Up 3 Two document sheets can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.

Basic Copying 4 Up Four document sheets can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.

When using this feature, place documents on the DADF.

Added Features Image loss sometimes occurs depending on the image size of the document. The default setting is 1 Up. This feature cannot be combined with the Automatic Tray Selection, Bound Originals, Book Duplex, Poster, Image Repeat, Booklet, and Mixed Size Originals features. When Border Erase is set, border erase is executed on each of the documents to be copied by this feature. When margin shift is set, shift is executed on each of the documents to be copied by this feature. For this reason, mg ult Others Image Quality image loss sometimes occurs depending on the image size of the document.

Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270).

354 3.13 Copying Multiple Documents Onto One Sheet - Multiple Up

2 Set the tray containing the paper (other than Auto) to make copies on at Paper Supply in the Basic Copying screen. Select other than the Auto button as the tray selected at Paper Supply.

3 Select Multiple Up in the Added Features screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Margin Shift Border Erase Auto S1: No Shift : 2mm : 2mm S2: No Shift : 0mm 3 Original Size Mixed Size Originals Bound Originals Auto Size Detect Off Off

Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation Basic Copying 1 Up Off On during Auto Portrait Original-Left

The Multiple Up screen is displayed. Added Features If you select the Multiple Up button, the Auto % button at Reduce/Enlarge will automatically be selected. The machine automatically sets the copy ratio, and makes copies of the images so that they fit in the selected paper. 4 Select 2 Up or 4 Up. The following describes an example where the 2 Up button is selected. Others Image Quality

Multiple Up Cancel Save Original Orientation 1 Up Head to Top

2 Up Head to Left 4 Up

355 3.13 Copying Multiple Documents Onto One Sheet - Multiple Up

5 Select the required layout order.

Multiple Up Cancel Save Image Order Original Orientation 1 Up Head to Top User Friendly Features Friendly User 2 Up Head to Left 4 Up

When the 4 Up button is selected

Multiple Up Cancel Save Image Order Original Orientation 1 Up Head to Top

2 Up Head to Left 3 4 Up

Basic Copying 6 Confirm Original Orientation.

If the Original Orientation setting differs from the direction that the document is loaded, the top part of the document will be different and the copy result will not be as intended. Added Features For details about Original Orientation, see “3.31 Specifying the Document Orientation - Original Orientation” (P. 417).

Head to Top Head to Left

Top Top

mg ult Others Image Quality Top Top

DocumentDocument GlassGlass DADFDADF DocumentDocument Glass Glass DADFDADF

7 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Added Features screen. 8 Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 9 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. The document starts to be scanned, and the documents are copied together on a single sheet of paper.

356 Inserting Blank Sheets Between 3.14 Copied Transparencies - Transparency Separators A blank sheet can be output inserted as a separator between copied transparencies. When the Distribution Copy feature (option) is installed, the required number of copies can also be printed at the same time. When using this feature, load transparencies in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray). When loading transparencies in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray), make sure that the paper for the separators (or for distribution) is loaded at the same orientation that the transparencies are loaded. Features Friendly User

Document Copy

Transparencies

B A Report 3 2 Report B 3 1 2 1 3 Separators

Document Copy Basic Copying Transparencies Copy for distribution

A A

B A Report Report B

3 Added Features 2 Report 3 B 2 3 1 1 2 1

Separators mg ult Others Image Quality Blank Separators A blank sheet of paper is inserted as a separator each time that a transparency is copied. Only one set of copies can be made. Separators + N Sets A blank sheet of paper is inserted as a separator each time that a transparency is copied. At the same time, the required number of copies for distribution are printed. No Separators + N Sets Copies are made on transparencies, and at the same time, the required number of copies for distribution are printed.

Do not load transparencies in trays 1 to 4. Doing so might cause the machine to malfunction or paper to jam. Use only 3R6002/3R6019 transparencies.

357 3.14 Inserting Blank Sheets Between Copied Transparencies - Transparency Separators

Separators are output as blank sheets with nothing printed on them, and are not added to meters. To make copies for distribution, 128 MB Memory kit must be installed. This feature cannot be combined with the Uncollated, Book Duplex, Reduce/Enlarge, Covers, and Booklet features. Also, when using Transparency Separators, this feature cannot be combined with the 2 Sided and Staple User Friendly Features Friendly User features.

Procedure

1 Load transparencies in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray).

When loading A4 size transparencies on Tray 5 (Bypass Tray), we recommend loading them vertically. 3

Load the document. Basic Copying 2

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270).

Added Features 3 Set Separators in the Added Features screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Margin Shift Border Erase Auto S1: No Shift : 2mm : 2mm S2: No Shift : 0mm Original Size Mixed Size Originals Bound Originals

mg ult Others Image Quality Auto Size Detect Off Off

Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation 1 Up Off On during Auto Portrait Original-Left

The Transparency Separators screen is displayed. 4 Select Blank Separators.

Transparency Separators Cancel Save

Off

Blank The N Sets (Distribution Sets) Separators can be printed double-sided. Separators + N Sets Select 2 Sided option. No Separators + N Sets

358 3.14 Inserting Blank Sheets Between Copied Transparencies - Transparency Separators

When printing copies for distribution at the same time When the Distribution Copy feature (option) is installed, the required number of copies for distribution can be printed with a blank sheet inserted as a transparency separator between transparencies. Two sided copies can be set for copies for distribution. When the Light Finisher (option) is installed, stapling can also be set.

Copies are made with a resolution of 600 dpi when 1→ 2 Sided (H to H) or 2→ 2 Sided (H to H) is Features Friendly User selected for distribution copies. This happens even when there is more than 128 Mbytes of page memory and more than 512 Mbytes of system memory installed, and Image Quality Priority is selected at Photo Image Quality in the System Administration Mode, and Photo is selected as the Original Type on the Image Quality screen. 1 Select Separators + N Sets.

Transparency Separators Cancel Save

Off

Blank The N Sets (Distribution Sets) Separators can be printed double-sided. Separators + N Sets Select 2 Sided option. No Separators 3 + N Sets

2 Select Paper Tray Settings. Basic Copying

Transparency Separators Cancel Save

Off Paper Tray Settings Blank

Separators Added Features Transparency Tray: Separators/ Separators + N Sets Tray: N Sets Tray 5 (Bypass) Auto A 4 No Separators Transparency + N Sets

The Transparency Separators - Paper Tray Settings screen is displayed. mg ult Others Image Quality 3 Select the size and orientation of the transparencies loaded on Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) at Tray 5 (Bypass): Transparency.

Transparency Separators - Paper Tray Settings Cancel Save

Tray 5 (Bypass): Transparency Separators/N Sets Tray

A 3 8.5x11" Auto 3 8.5 11’’ Plain 1 A 4 A 4 8.5x11" Plain 4 A 4 2 A 3 Plain A 4 11x17" Plain

359 3.14 Inserting Blank Sheets Between Copied Transparencies - Transparency Separators

4 Select the tray currently loaded with the paper to be used as the separator and distribution copies at Separators/N Sets Tray.

Transparency Separators - Paper Tray Settings Cancel Save

Tray 5 (Bypass): Transparency Separators/N Sets Tray User Friendly Features Friendly User A 3 8.5x11" Auto 3 8.5 11’’ Plain 1 A 4 A 4 8.5x11" Plain 4 A 4 2 A 3 Plain A 4 11x17" Plain

5 Proceed to Step 8. 5 Select Paper Tray Settings.

Transparency Separators Cancel Save

Off Paper Tray Settings 3 Blank Separators Transparency Tray: Separators Tray: Separators + N Sets Tray 5 (Bypass) Auto

Basic Copying A 4 No Separators Transparency + N Sets

The Transparency Separators - Paper Tray Settings screen is displayed.

Added Features 6 Select the size and orientation of the transparencies loaded on Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) at Tray 5 (Bypass): Transparency.

Transparency Separators - Paper Tray Settings Cancel Save

Tray 5 (Bypass): Transparency Separators/N Sets Tray

mg ult Others Image Quality A 3 8.5x11" Auto 3 8.5 11’’ Plain A 4 A 4 8.5x11" 1 Plain 4 A 4 2 A 3 Plain A 4 11x17" Plain

360 3.14 Inserting Blank Sheets Between Copied Transparencies - Transparency Separators

7 Select the tray currently loaded with the paper to be used as the separator at Separators/N Sets Tray.

Transparency Separators - Paper Tray Settings Cancel Save

Tray 5 (Bypass): Transparency Separators/N Sets Tray User Friendly Features Friendly User A 3 8.5x11" Auto 3 8.5 11’’ Plain 1 A 4 A 4 8.5x11" Plain 4 A 4 2 A 3 Plain A 4 11x17" Plain

This feature cannot be combined with the Mixed Size Originals feature when the Auto button is selected at Separators/N Sets Tray. 8 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Transparency Separators screen. 3 9 Confirm the settings, and select Save.

The screen returns to the Added Features screen. Basic Copying 10 Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. Added Features 11 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies are made with blank sheets inserted between transparencies. Also, when N Sets is specified, copies are made with blank sheets inserted between transparencies, and the preset number of copies

for distribution are printed at the same time. Others Image Quality

361 Making Copies With the Image 3.15 Rotated Vertically or Horizon- tally - Image Rotation If the orientation of the paper currently loaded in the tray differs from that of the document that is loaded, the machine automatically rotates the document image to make copies with the document and paper orientations matched. You can also select where image rotation is to be referenced to if documents are of mixed orientations. User Friendly Features Friendly User Orientation of placed document Orientation of loaded paper Copy

Portable Phone Portable Portable Phone

Off Copies of documents are made as they are even if the orientation differs from that of the paper. 3 Always On Copies are made with the document image automatically rotated so that the orientation of the document matches that of the paper.

Basic Copying On during Auto Copies are made with the document image automatically rotated so that the orientation of the document matches that of the paper when Auto % at Reduce/Enlarge or Auto at Paper Supply is selected.

Added Features The default setting for Image Rotation can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default setting is On during Auto. The Image Rotation feature does not function when the Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass Tray), Independent X- Y%, Auto at Independent X-Y%, Repeat Image, and Poster features are set. Note, however, that the machine automatically rotates the image if it judges that the size of the paper supports image rotation when Independent X-Y%

mg ult Others Image Quality or Auto at Independent X-Y%, and the Booklet or Stapling functions are simultaneously set. When the Booklet and Stapling features are used, images are rotated automatically regardless of the Image Rota- tion setting.

362 3.15 Making Copies With the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally - Image Rotation

Procedure

1 Load the document. User Friendly Features Friendly User

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select Image Rotation in the Added Features screen.

Multiple Up Separators Image Rotation 1 Up Off On during Auto Portrait Original-Left 3 The Image Rotation screen is displayed. Basic Copying 3 Select Always On or On during Auto.

Image Rotation Cancel Save

When Reduce/Enlarge or Paper Supply is Off set to Auto, the image of the original Rotation will be rotated to match the orientation Added Features of the paper. Direction Always On Portrait Originals Left Edge On during Auto mg ult Others Image Quality

To cancel image rotation, select the Off button. 4 If documents are of mixed orientations, select Rotation Direction.

Image Rotation Cancel Save

Off The image of the original is rotated to match the orientation of the paper. Rotation Direction Always On Portrait Originals Left Edge On during Auto

The Image Rotation - Rotation Direction screen is displayed.

363 3.15 Making Copies With the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally - Image Rotation

5 Select the required rotation reference position.

Image Rotation - Rotation Direction Cancel Save

Portrait When originals of different sizes are used, Original - image is rotated such that the top edge

User Friendly Features Friendly User Left Edge of the landscape original is aligned with the left edge of the portrait original. Portrait Original - Right Edge

If documents are of mixed orientations with the Portrait Original - Left Edge button selected at Rotation Direction, the orientation of landscape documents is aligned with the left side of portrait documents. If documents are of mixed orientations with the Portrait Original-Right Edge button selected at Rotation Direction, the top side of landscape documents is aligned with the right side of portrait documents. 3 When the Light Finisher (option) is installed When the Light Finisher is installed, the Staple Position button is displayed. If documents are of mixed orientations, the image will be rotated based on the staple settings. Basic Copying

Image Rotation - Rotation Direction Cancel Save

Staple Position The image is rotated to match the stapling edge when originals of different sizes are Portrait used. Original -

Added Features Left Edge If the Staple Position is not selected, Portrait the "Portrait Original-Left Edge" setting Original - will be applied. Right Edge

Confirm the settings, and select Save.

mg ult Others Image Quality 6 The screen returns to the Added Features screen. 7 Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 8 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies are made with the document image automatically rotated.

364 Selecting the Original Type 3.16 - Original Type

When making copies of photographs, text and other documents, you can make copies at the image quality corresponding to each type of document. Copies of the document can be reproduced at a more faithful image quality by selecting the original type matched to the type of document. User Friendly Features Friendly User Printed document Color copy document Hightlghter marked document

Magazine photo Map document Inkjet document 3 Basic Copying Added Features

Original types are as follows: Text & Photo Image Quality Select this item when making copies of documents that contain both text and photos. The machine automatically judges text areas and photo areas in the document, and sets the type for each area. For photo areas, further specify the type of photo from Halftone, Photograph and Color Copies. Halftone ...... Select this when the photo area in the document is a printed photo such as in a pamphlet. Photograph ...... Select this when a photo is pasted onto the document. This prevents

the copy from being reproduced bluish. Others Color Copies ...... Select this when making copies of copies or prints made on a color copier such as the DocumentCentre C400/320/240. This prevents colors from being reproduced faint. Text Select this to make sharp copies of text. Sharp copies of photos, graphs and illustrations are also made in this mode. Photo Select this when making copies of photos. In the same way as Text and Photo, specify the photo type from Half- tone, Photograph and Color Copies.

365 3.16 Selecting the Original Type - Original Type

Other Color Originals Select this when making copies of documents containing colored background such as maps, documents marked by highlighter pen, and documents output on an inkjet printer. Map...... Select this when making copies of documents containing colored background such as maps.

User Friendly Features Friendly User Highlighted Originals...... Select this when making copies marked by highlighter pen. This setting improves the machine’s ability to recognize the color of the highlighter pen marking. Inkjet Originals ...... Select this when making copies output from an inkjet printer. This setting improves the machine’s ability to recognize the color of the inkjet markings.

Other Color Originals can be selected even if Black is selected at Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. However, the copy result will be reproduced at the same image quality as Text & Photo (Halftone). The default setting for Original Type can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default 3 setting is Halftone under Text & Photo. Procedure Basic Copying

1 Load the document.

Added Features For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features

Image Quality Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain More... More... More... More... Others

When the Dual Color or Single Color button is selected, the original type cannot be selected.

366 3.16 Selecting the Original Type - Original Type

3 Select Original Type in the Image Quality screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Original Type Auto Exposure Light/Dark/Contrast Text & Photo On L/D : Normal (Halftone) Contrast: Normal Sharpness/Saturation Color Shift Color Balance Features Friendly User Sharpness: Normal Normal Y: 0 0 0 M: 0 0 0 Saturation: Normal C: 0 0 0 K: 0 0 0 Image Quality Presets Normal

The Original Type screen is displayed. 4 Select the document type.

Original Type Cancel Save Photo Type Text & Photo Halftone Text Photograph 3 Photo

Other Color Color Copies Originals Basic Copying

When the Text & Photo button or Photo button is selected Select the type of photo area.

Original Type Cancel Save Added Features

Text & Photo Halftone Text Photograph Photo

Other Color Color Copies Originals Image Quality

When the Photo button is selected, the Auto Exposure feature does not function. When the Text button is selected Proceed to Step 5. Others

367 3.16 Selecting the Original Type - Original Type

When the Other Color Originals button is selected Select the type of color document.

Original Type Save Cancel

Text & Photo Map User Friendly Features Friendly User Text Highlighted Photo Originals

Other Color Inkjet Originals Originals

5 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Image Quality screen. 6 Select other features if necessary.

3 To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start.

Basic Copying 7 Copies will be made at the preset image quality type. Added Features Image Quality Others

368 Erasing the Background 3.17 Color of Documents - Auto Exposure When copies are made in the Black mode under Output Color, copies can be made with the background color of the document such as newspapers or colored paper documents suppressed. When copies have been made using Full Color, Dual Color and Single Color, copies can be made without the background color of the document suppressed and with foggy areas in the document suppressed. Features Friendly User

Document Copy

Report Report Report

BlackBlack FullFull ColorColor 3

When Original Type is set to Photo, the Auto Exposure feature does not function. Basic Copying The default setting for Auto Exposure can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.5.2 Copy Defaults” “17. Auto Exposure” (P. 148) in “Part 1 Hard- ware”. You can select from “Speed Priority” or “Image Priority” as the Auto Exposure method. For details about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.4.6 Image Quality/Auto Gradation Adjustment” (P. 133) “ 5. Color Copy Auto Exposure” and “ 6. B/W Copy Auto Exposure” (P. 135) in “Part 1 Hardware”. Added Features

Procedure

1 Load the document. Image Quality

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270) in “Part 2 Copier”. Others

369 3.17 Erasing the Background Color of Documents - Auto Exposure

2 Select Auto Exposure in the Image Quality screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Original Type Auto Exposure Light/Dark/Contrast Text & Photo On L/D : Normal (Halftone) Contrast: Normal User Friendly Features Friendly User Sharpness/Saturation Color Shift Color Balance Sharpness: Normal Normal Y: 0 0 0 M: 0 0 0 Saturation: Normal C: 0 0 0 K: 0 0 0 Image Quality Presets Normal

The Auto Exposure screen is displayed. 3 Select On.

Auto Exposure Cancel Save

This feature does not work Off when Photo is selected as 3 the Original Type. On Basic Copying

4 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Image Quality screen. Added Features 5 Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button.

Image Quality 6 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies are made with the background color Suppressed. Others

370 Adjusting Copy Density 3.18 and Contrast - Lighter/ Darker/Contrast The copy density and contrast can be adjusted.

Lighter/Darker The copy density can be set. The copy density can be selected in seven levels from Lighter to Darker. User Friendly Features Friendly User Document Copy

LighterLighter DarkerDarker Contrast Contrast can be set. Contrast can be set in five levels from Lower to Higher. 3

Document Copy Basic Copying Added Features

LowerLower HigherHigher

The default setting for Lighter/Darker/Contrast can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details Image Quality about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default setting is Normal for both Lighter/Darker and Contrast. If Lighter/Darker or Contrast is selected when Image Quality Presets is set, the value set to Image Quality Presets will be canceled. Others

371 3.18 Adjusting Copy Density and Contrast - Lighter/Darker/Contrast

Procedure

1 Load the document. User Friendly Features Friendly User

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select Light/Dark/Contrast in the Image Quality screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Original Type Auto Exposure Light/Dark/Contrast Text & Photo On L/D : Normal (Halftone) Contrast: Normal Sharpness/Saturation Color Shift Color Balance Sharpness: Normal Normal Y: 0 0 0 M: 0 0 0 Saturation: Normal C: 0 0 0 K: 0 0 0 Image Quality Presets 3 Normal The Lighter/Darker/Contrast screen is displayed. Basic Copying 3 To adjust the copy density, select the desired density using . To adjust the contrast, select the desired contrast using .

Lighter/Darker/Contrast Cancel Save

Lighter/Darker Contrast Added Features Lighter Higher

Normal Normal

Darker Lower Image Quality

4 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Image Quality screen. 5 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features

Others if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 6 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies are made at the density and contrast you set.

372 Adjusting the Sharpness and 3.19 Saturation of Images - Sharp- ness/Color Saturation

The sharpness and saturation of images can be adjusted.

Sharpness The contours of images can be made to look sharper or more blurred. Sharpness can be set in five levels from Softer to Sharper. Features Friendly User

Document Copy

SofterSofter SharperSharper 3 Color Saturation The saturation (brightness) of color in color documents can be adjusted. Saturation can be set in five levels from Basic Copying Lower to Higher.

Document Copy Added Features

LowerLower HigherHigher Image Quality

The default setting for Sharpness/Color Saturation can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hard- ware”. The default setting is Normal for both Sharpness and Color Saturation. Adjustment of color saturation cannot be selected when Output Color is set to Black. Others If Color Saturation is selected when Image Quality Presets is set, the value set to Image Quality Presets will be canceled.

373 3.19 Adjusting the Sharpness and Saturation of Images - Sharpness/Color Saturation

Procedure

1 Load the document. User Friendly Features Friendly User

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select Sharpness/Saturation in the Image Quality screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Original Type Auto Exposure Light/Dark/Contrast Text & Photo On L/D : Normal (Halftone) Contrast: Normal Sharpness/Saturation Color Shift Color Balance Sharpness: Normal Normal Y: 0 0 0 M: 0 0 0 Saturation: Normal C: 0 0 0 K: 0 0 0 Image Quality Presets 3 Normal The Sharpness/Color Saturation screen is displayed. Basic Copying 3 To adjust the sharpness, select the desired sharpness using . To adjust the saturation, select the desired color saturation using .

Sharpness/Color Saturation Cancel Save

Sharpness Color Saturation Added Features Sharper Higher

Normal Normal

Softer Lower Image Quality 4 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Image Quality screen. 5 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features

Others if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 6 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies are made at the sharpness and saturation that you set.

374 Adjusting Tone - Color 3.20 Shift

The tone of color documents can be adjusted to make subtle changes to the overall tone of the document. Tone can be adjusted in five levels to suit your particular tone requirements. Tone is displayed by two bars in the Color Shift screen. The lower bar shows the original tone of the document, while the upper bar shows the tone after adjustment. If you press the Color Shift button, you can move the lower bar to change the overall tone of the document to Features Friendly User the tone on the upper bar. For example, if Y (yellow) on the lower bar is moved to the left towards R (red) on the upper bar, the yellow in the fruit becomes reddish to give the apple a riper-looking tone. At this time, all colors change. For example, R (red) becomes more M (magenta) and G (green) becomes more Y (yellow). If Y (yellow) on the lower bar is moved to the right towards G (green) on the upper bar, the yellow in the fruit becomes greener. At this time, all colors change. For example, M (magenta) becomes more R (red) and R (red) becomes more Y (yellow).

Document Copy Copy 3 Basic Copying

(Slide bar to left.) (Slide bar to the right.)

Color shift Color shift Added Features Yellow Cyan Magenta Yellow Cyan Magenta Red Green Blue Red Green Blue

Normal Normal

If you slide the bar to the left in the Color Shift screen above, this indicates that the color Image Quality phase ring is turned to the left. If you slide the bar to the right, this indicates that the color phase ring is turned to the right. In the figure below, the inside circle shows the left and right bars in the Color Shift screen. Others R R R

M M Y M Y Y MYR R R Y MY M BG G BG B C C C BG BGBG

C C C

375 3.20 Adjusting Tone - Color Shift

The default setting for Color Shift can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default setting is Normal. Adjustment of tone cannot be selected when Output Color is set to Black. User Friendly Features Friendly User If Color Shift is selected when Image Quality Presets is set, the value set to Image Quality Presets will be canceled.

Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 3 2 Select Full Color at Output Color in the Basic Copying screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu

Basic Copying Features Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain Added Features More... More... More... More...

3 Select Color Shift in the Image Quality screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Image Quality Original Type Auto Exposure Light/Dark/Contrast Text & Photo On L/D : Normal (Halftone) Contrast: Normal Sharpness/Saturation Color Shift Color Balance Sharpness: Normal Normal Y: 0 0 0 M: 0 0 0 Saturation: Normal C: 0 0 0 K: 0 0 0 Image Quality Presets Normal

Others The Color Shift screen is displayed.

376 3.20 Adjusting Tone - Color Shift

4 Select the Color Shift buttons.

Color Shift Cancel Save

Yellow Cyan Magenta

Red Green Blue

Before M R Y G C B M R Features Friendly User After R Y G C B M CoolestCool Normal Warm Warmest

5 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Image Quality screen. 6 Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 3 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start.

7 Basic Copying Copies are made with the tone changed to the tone you set. Added Features Image Quality Others

377 Adjusting Color Balance - 3.21 Color Balance

The strength of the four colors (yellow, magenta, cyan and black) can be adjusted in seven levels for each of their low, intermediate and high density ranges.

Document Copy User Friendly Features Friendly User

MoreMore dominant dominant MoreMore dominant dominant MoreMore dominant dominant MoreMore dominant dominant CyanCyan MagentaMagenta YellowYe l l ow BlackBlack

The default setting for Color Balance can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The default 3 setting is 0 as Normal. Only Black can be selected in color balance adjustment when Output Color is set to Black. If Color Balance is selected when Image Quality Presets is set, the value set to Image Quality Presets will be can- Basic Copying celed.

Procedure

Added Features 1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270).

Image Quality 2 Select Full Color at Output Color in the Basic Copying screen.

378 3.21 Adjusting Color Balance - Color Balance

3 Select Color Balance in the Image Quality screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Original Type Auto Exposure Light/Dark/Contrast Text & Photo On L/D : Normal (Halftone) Contrast: Normal Sharpness/Saturation Color Shift Color Balance Features Friendly User Sharpness: Normal Normal Y: 0 0 0 M: 0 0 0 Saturation: Normal C: 0 0 0 K: 0 0 0 Image Quality Presets Normal

The Color Balance screen is displayed. 4 Select the button for the color you want to adjust. When a button is selected, it is displayed highlighted, and the balance of each of the densities for that color are displayed.

Color Balance Cancel Save Yellow L MH Low Density Medium Density High Density 3 Y 0 0 0 Magenta +3 +3 +3 M 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cyan C 0 0 0 Basic Copying K 0 0 0 -3 -3 -3 Black

5 Specify the color balance for each of the densities using . Added Features

Color Balance Cancel Save

Yellow LMH Low Density Medium Density High Density Y 0 0 0 Magenta +3 +3 +3 M 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cyan C 0 0 0 Image Quality K 0 0 0 -3 -3 -3 Black

The amount of color for each density displayed in the form of a bar graph. 6 To adjust the balance of other colors, repeat steps 4 and 5. Others 7 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Image Quality screen. 8 Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 9 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies will be made at the color balance you set.

379 Selecting Image Quality - 3.22 Image Quality Presets

If you select image quality under Image Quality Presets, the “Background Suppression”, “Lighter/Darker/Contrast”, “Sharpness/Color Saturation”, “Color Shift”, and “Color Balance” Image Quality Presets features will be automatically adjusted, and copies will be made at a quality matched to the quality set here. Document Lively Document Sharp User Friendly Features Friendly User

Document Warm Document Cool 3 Basic Copying

Document Background Suppression Document Auto Contrast Added Features

Normal

Image Quality Copies are made with the Background Suppression, Lighter/Darker/Contrast, Sharpness/Color Saturation, Color Shift, and Color Balance settings at their defaults. Lively The color saturation is raised to reproduce images looking fresher and more lively. Sharp Reproduces images to have a sharper appearance with enhanced contrast. Select this item to make copies of docu-

Others ments such as posters that are intended to attract people’s attention. Warm Reproduces colors with a slightly weak density as brighter and warmer colors with more dominant red in them. Select this item, for example, to reproduce skin to look more pink or subdued warm colors to have more warmth. Cool Reproduces blue colors to look clearer. Select this item, for example to make the sea or sky bluer or to reproduce subdued cold colors more clearly. Background Suppression This setting prevents images on the back side from being reproduced in the copy. Auto Contrast Adjusts brightness and saturation according to the document to produce clearer-looking images.

380 3.22 Selecting Image Quality - Image Quality Presets

Procedure

1 Load the document. User Friendly Features Friendly User

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select Image Quality Presets in the Image Quality screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Original Type Auto Exposure Light/Dark/Contrast Text & Photo On L/D : Normal (Halftone) Contrast: Normal Sharpness/Saturation Color Shift Color Balance Sharpness: Normal Normal Y: 0 0 0 M: 0 0 0 Saturation: Normal C: 0 0 0 K: 0 0 0 Image Quality Presets Normal 3 The Image Quality Presets screen is displayed. Basic Copying 3 Select the desired image quality in Image Quality Presets. Image Quality Presets Cancel Save

Normal Warm The following settings will be automatically adjusted:- Cool Added Features Lively - Auto Exposure Background - Lighter/Darker/Contrast Suppression - Sharpness/Saturation - Color Shift Bright Auto Contrast - Color Balance Image Quality

If the settings of other image quality preset features are changed after selecting the desired image quality in the Image Quality Presets screen, the Image Quality Presets setting will return to its default (Normal). 4 Confirm the settings, and select Save.

The screen returns to the Image Quality screen. Others 5 Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 6 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies will be made at the desired image quality you set.

381 Outputting a Cover for 3.23 Copies - Covers

Copies can be made with a cover output at the specified position. A front cover can be output before the first page of the document on a different type of paper (e.g. colored paper or heavyweight paper). Also, copies can be made from the first page of the document on a different type of paper. Select the same size and orientation for the tray containing the cover paper and the tray containing the paper for the main document pages. User Friendly Features Friendly User Document Front & Back Covers Front + Back Covers

B B B A B A B A B 4 4 B ReportB Report 4 3 ReportB 3 2 3 2 1 2 1 1

3 (Copy not made on front cover) (Copy made on front cover)

ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying Front Cover Make copies with a cover output on different type of paper before the first page of the document. Also, if On is selected at Printed Covers is selected, copies can be made from the first page of the document on a different type of paper.

Front & Back Covers Outputs a cover on different type of paper before the first page and after the last page of the document. Also, if On is selected at Printed Covers is selected, copies can be made from the first page of the document on a different type of paper.

To output covers for copies, 128 MB Memory kit must be installed. This feature cannot be combined with the Uncollated, Repeat Image, Poster, Transparency Separators, Booklet, and Auto Tray Switching features. When making two sided copies, copies can be made on both sides of the top cover/back cover following the order of pages in the document. Default settings are Tray 2 for Covers Tray and Tray 1 for Body Pages Tray. To make a copy on only one side of the cover when making two sided copies, insert a blank sheet in the document Others stack at the appropriate position before making copies.

382 3.23 Outputting a Cover for Copies - Covers

Procedure

1 Load the document. User Friendly Features Friendly User

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Load the paper for the cover in one of trays 1 to 4.

The paper for the cover must be the same size as the paper for the document body pages and loaded at the same orientation. 3 Select Covers in the Others screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features 3 Covers Booklet Creation Book Duplex No Covers Off Off

Repeat Image Poster Mirror/Negative Image Image Quality Added Features Basic Copying Off Off Mirror Image: Off Negative Image: Off Stored Jobs Build Job Original Orientation Off Head to Top

The Covers screen is displayed. 4 Select how the cover is to be attached. The following describes the procedure when the Front & Back Covers button is selected.

Covers Cancel Save

No Covers

Front Cover

Front & Back Covers Others 5 Select whether or not to copy on the cover at Printed Covers.

Covers Cancel Save

No Covers Printed Covers Paper Tray Settings Off Front Cover Body Pages Tray: Covers Tray: Auto Tray 5 (Bypass) Front & Back On A4 Covers Plain

383 3.23 Outputting a Cover for Copies - Covers

6 Select Paper Tray Settings.

Covers Cancel Save

No Covers Printed Covers Paper Tray Settings

User Friendly Features Friendly User Off Front Cover Body Pages Tray: Covers Tray: Auto Tray 5 (Bypass) Front & Back On A4 Covers Plain

The Covers - Paper Tray Settings screen is displayed. The following describes the procedure when the Front Cover button is selected, and the Off button is selected at Printed Covers. 7 Select the paper to use for copying at Body Pages Tray and the paper to use for the cover at Covers Tray.

Covers - Paper Tray Settings Cancel Save 3 Body Pages Tray Covers Tray 3 8.5 11’’ 3 8.5 11’’ Auto Plain Plain ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying 1 A4 4 A4 1 A4 4 A4 Plain Plain Plain Plain Bypass... Bypass... 2 A3 5 2 A3 A4 5 A4 Plain Plain Plain Plain

When Auto is selected at Body Pages Tray, load the paper in Covers Tray and the same size of paper as the paper for copying and at the same orientation. This feature cannot be combined with the Mixed Size Originals feature when the Auto button is selected at Body Pages Tray. With Body Pages Tray, Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) cannot be used. 8 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Covers screen. 9 Confirm the settings, and select Save.

Others The screen returns to the Covers screen. 10 Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 11 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies are made with the cover attached.

384 Creating a Booklet - Book- 3.24 let Creation

Copies can be made into a booklet in progressive page order with a margin at the center as if multiple sheet copies were overlaid and folded in half along the center of the paper. You can also set a center margin and output a cover when making booklets.

Document Left Bind Right Bind User Friendly Features Friendly User

8 1 7 7 5 5 1 3 3 3 2 1

Document Top Bind

1 8 7 3 3 3

2 5 Image Quality Added Features Basic Copying 1

To make a booklet, 128 MB Memory kit must be installed. The maximum number of document pages that can be scanned to memory is 100. If the number of pages in the booklet is not a multiple of four, the excess pages will be output as blank pages. This feature cannot be combined with Auto in Paper Selection, Mixed Size Originals, Specified Move in Copy Position, 2 Sided, Uncollated, Multi Up (N Up), Image Repeat, Poster, Covers, Transparency Separators, and Stapler features.

Document Orientation and Binding Locations on the Copy The binding locations change as follows depending on the orientation that the document is loaded.

Document Orientation Left Bind Right Bind Others 6 3 3 6 1 1 8 1 1 8 HeadHead to TopTopHeadHead to LeftLeft

Document Orientation Top Bind 6 3

1 1 8 1 HeadHead to TopTopHeadHead to LeftLeft

385 3.24 Creating a Booklet - Booklet Creation

Procedure

1 Load the document. User Friendly Features Friendly User

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select Booklet Creation in the Others screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Covers Booklet Creation Book Duplex No Covers Off Off

Repeat Image Poster Mirror/Negative Image Off Off Mirror Image: Off Negative Image: Off Stored Jobs Build Job Original Orientation 3 Off Head to Top The Booklet Creation screen is displayed. ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying 3 Select the required binding location. Booklet Creation Cancel Save

Off

Left Bind/ Top Bind

Right Bind

4 To make a booklet with a margin and cover attached, select Gutter and Covers.

Booklet Creation Cancel Save

Off Gutter Originals 0 mm 1 Sided

Others Left Bind/ Top Bind Head to Top Covers Off Right Bind

386 3.24 Creating a Booklet - Booklet Creation

To attach a gutter The gutter can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Report User Friendly Features Friendly User 1 8 : Gutter

1 Select Gutter.

Booklet Creation Cancel Save

Off Gutter Originals 0 mm 1 Sided Left Bind/ Top Bind Head to Top Covers Off Right Bind 3 The Booklet Creation - Gutter screen is displayed.

2 Set the margin by or . Image Quality Added Features Basic Copying

Booklet Creation - Gutter Cancel Save

(0-50) 0 mm

To attach a cover 1 Select Covers.

Booklet Creation Cancel Save

Off Gutter Originals 0 mm 1 Sided

Left Bind/ Others Top Bind Head to Top Covers Off Right Bind

The Booklet Creation - Covers screen is displayed.

387 3.24 Creating a Booklet - Booklet Creation

2 Select On.

Booklet Creation - Covers Cancel Save

Off User Friendly Features Friendly User

3 Select whether or not to output a cover for the copy.

Booklet Creation - Covers Cancel Save Printed Covers Paper Tray Settings Off Off Body Pages Tray: Covers Tray: On Tray 1 Tray 5 (Bypass) On A4 Size Detect 3 Plain Plain

ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying 4 Select Paper Tray Settings.

Booklet Creation - Covers Cancel Save Printed Covers Paper Tray Settings Off Off Body Pages Tray: Covers Tray: On Tray 1 Tray 5 (Bypass) On A4 Size Detect Plain Plain

The Booklet Creation - Covers - Paper Tray Settings screen is displayed. 5 Select the tray to use at Body Pages Tray and Covers Tray.

Booklet Creation - Covers - Paper Tray Settings Cancel Save Body Pages Tray Covers Tray 3 8.5 11’’ 3 8.5 11’’ Plain Plain 1 A4 1 A4 Plain 4 A4 Plain 4 A4 Plain Plain Others 2 A3 2 A3 Bypass... Bypass... Plain 5 Plain 5 Size Detect Size Detect Plain Plain

388 3.24 Creating a Booklet - Booklet Creation

5 Select Originals. The following describes the procedure when the Left Bind/Top Bind button is selected.

Booklet Creation Cancel Save

Off Gutter Originals 0 mm Features Friendly User 1 Sided Left Bind/ Top Bind Head to Top Covers Off Right Bind

The Booklet Creation - Originals screen is displayed. 6 Select one sided or two sided for the document you loaded.

Booklet Creation - Originals Cancel Save Original Orientation Head to Top 1 Sided 3

2 Sided Head to Left ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying

When the 2 Sided button is selected 1 Select Binding Location.

Booklet Creation - Originals Cancel Save Binding Location Original Orientation Head to Head Head to Top 1 Sided

2 Sided Head to Toe Head to Left

When Binding Location is set to Head to Head, select this when the top and bottom of the image are the same on the top and rear sides of the first document sheet.

When Binding Location is set to Head to Toe, select this when the top and bottom of the image are Others inverted on the top and rear sides of the first document sheet.

Head to Head Head to Toe

NO.1 NO.1 NO.2 NO.1 NO.1 NO.2 NO.2 NO.2

1st sheet 2nd sheet 1st sheet 2nd sheet

389 3.24 Creating a Booklet - Booklet Creation

7 Confirm that Original Orientation is set to the same orientation as that of the document you loaded.

Booklet Creation - Originals Cancel Save Original Orientation

User Friendly Features Friendly User Head to Top 1 Sided

2 Sided Head to Left

8 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Booklet Creation screen. 9 Select Save. 3 The screen returns to the Others screen. To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying 10 Set the tray at Paper Supply in the Basic Copying screen.

When making a booklet, the Auto button cannot be selected at Paper Supply Paper must also be set horizontally in the paper tray. To set the finish size of the booklet to a size different from the document size, select the paper size and copy ratio selection in the Basic Copying screen.

Others 11 Select other features if necessary.

12 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. The document starts to be scanned, and copies are output in the way you specified.

390 Making Two sided Copies From a Bound Document - 3.25 Book Duplex

Copies of facing pages in a bound document can be made with pages assigned so that they are in the same facing state as the document. A blank sheet is automatically inserted as the first page. The start and end pages can also be specified to the left or right of the facing pages.

Document Document Features Friendly User

A C A Report Blank sheet B D B No.1

No.1

Left Page then Right Two sided copies are made from the left page of the bound document starting from the left page. Right Page then Left Two sided copies are made from the right page of the bound document starting from the right page. Top Page then Bottom 3 Two sided copies are made from the top page of the bound document starting from the top page. ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying To copy from a bound document, additional 128 MB memory must be installed. This feature cannot be combined with the 2 Sided, Uncollated, Image Repeat, Bound Originals, Poster, Transpar- ency Separators, Booklet, and Build Job features. When there is only one sheet creation in the document to be scanned, the start page cannot be set to Right Page and the end page cannot be set to Left Page at Left Page then Right. Place documents on the document glass. Non-standard sized documents will not be divided into two accurately. Others

391 3.25 Making Two sided Copies From a Bound Document - Book Duplex

Procedure

1 Confirm the orientation of the document before placing the bound document on the document glass. User Friendly Features Friendly User

Left Page then Right Right Page then Left Top Page then Bottom

1 12 21 2 2 3 12 21 1 ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying

2 Select Book Duplex in the Others screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Covers Booklet Creation Book Duplex No Covers Off Off

Repeat Image Poster Mirror/Negative Image Off Off Mirror Image: Off Negative Image: Off Stored Jobs Build Job Original Orientation Off Head to Top

The Book Duplex screen is displayed. 3 Select the original type.

Book Duplex Cancel Save

Others Off

Left Page then Right Right Page then Left Top Page then Bottom

392 3.25 Making Two sided Copies From a Bound Document - Book Duplex

4 Select Start Page & End Page. The following describes the procedure when the Left Page then Right button is selected.

Book Duplex Cancel Save

Off Center Erase Load your originals Start Page & as shown below. End Page Features Friendly User Left Page then Right (0-50) Right Page Left Page then Left 0 mm Top Page Right Page then Bottom

The Book Duplex - Start Page & End Page screen is displayed. 5 Select Start Page and End Page for the facing pages.

Book Duplex - Start Page & End Page Cancel Save

Start Page End Page Load your originals as shown below. 3 Left Page Left Page

Right Page Right Page Image Quality Added Features Basic Copying

6 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Others screen. 7 Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 8 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. 9 When making another copy, enter the set of documents, to repeat the operation press Start. When Right Page then Left button is selected Others If you select Next Original after selecting the Right Page then Left and pressing the Start button at step 4. To copy a right bound document, perform the following: 1 Select Right Page then Left. 2 Select Start Page & End Page. 3 Select Left Page at Start Page and Right Page at End Page. 4 Press Start. 5 Select Last Original.

393 3.25 Making Two sided Copies From a Bound Document - Book Duplex

10 When the machine has finished scanning the last document, select Last Original. The facing pages of the bound document are divided up, and copied onto two sides with the pages assigned so that they are in the same facing state as the document. User Friendly Features Friendly User

3 ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying Others

394 Making Multiple Copies on 3.26 One Sheet - Repeat Image

The image of a document on one sheet of paper can be copied repeatedly for a specified number of times. When the copy ratio is set to Auto, the repeated copies are reduced so that they fit in the selected paper. You can also specify how the repeated copies are arranged. User Friendly Features Friendly User Document Auto (Evenly) Auto (Consecutively)

Auto The machine automatically sets the number of copies from the document size, paper size, and copy ratio, and 3 repeatedly copies the document image on the paper. No. of Repeats ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying Specify how many document images are to be copied repeatedly along each of the long and short sides of the paper. 1 to 23 repeats can be specified along the long side (Y) and 1 to 33 repeats can be specified along the short side (X). Evenly Images are copied on the paper with the paper evenly divided up by the repeated number of images. Consecutively The repeat images are copied to the paper consecutively.

When making repeat copies at the same size as the document image, specify the number of repeats so that the copies fit in the paper. This feature cannot be combined with Automatic Tray Selection, Multi Up (N Up), Bound Originals, Book Duplex, Poster, Covers, Booklet Creation, and Stapler features. Auto under Reduce/Enlarge, Auto under Independent X-Y%, and the Mixed Size Originals features cannot be combined when the number of repeats is set to Auto. Copies cannot be made when the document image is larger than the specified paper size. Others

395 3.26 Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet - Repeat Image

Procedure

1 Load the document. User Friendly Features Friendly User

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Set the tray containing the paper to make copies on at Paper Supply in the Basic Copying screen.

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain 3 Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain More... More... More... More... ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying 3 Select Repeat Image in the Others screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Covers Booklet Creation Book Duplex No Covers Off Off

Repeat Image Poster Mirror/Negative Image Off Off Mirror Image: Off Negative Image: Off Stored Jobs Build Job Original Orientation Off Head to Top

The Repeat Image screen is displayed. 4 Select how to specify the number of images from Auto or Variable Repeats.

Repeat Image Cancel Save

Off Others

Auto Repeat

Variable Repeats

396 3.26 Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet - Repeat Image

When the Auto button is selected Proceed to Step 5.

When the Variable Repeats button is selected Specify the number of image repeats by . User Friendly Features Friendly User Repeat Image Cancel Save X Y Image Layout Off (1-33) (1-23) 11 X Even Auto Repeat Y

Variable Bias Repeats

5 Select how to arrange the images at Image Layout.

Repeat Image Cancel Save X Y 3 Image Layout Off (1-33) (1-23) Auto Auto X Even Auto Repeat Image Quality Added Features Basic Copying Y Variable Bias Repeats

6 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Others screen. 7 Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 8 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. The document image is copied repeatedly onto a single sheet of paper. Others

397 Making Enlarged Copies Spread Over Multiple 3.27 Sheets - Poster

An enlarged copy of a document can be made spread over multiple sheets. This feature allows you to make a large-size poster by pasting together the copies spread over multiple sheets. Copied sheets are provided with a paste margin so that they can be pasted together. This paste margin is fixed to 10 mm. User Friendly Features Friendly User Document Copy Pasted result

3 ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying Paste margin 10mm 2 × 2 Copies are made of the document divided into a total of four sheets, two each in the X and Y directions. 3 × 3 Copies are made of the document divided into a total of nine sheets, three each in the X and Y directions. 4 × 4 Copies are made of the document divided into a total of 16 sheets, four each in the X and Y directions.

When making copies using this feature, place the document on the document glass. The DADF cannot be used for this feature. Copy ratios other than Auto % under Reduce/Enlarge cannot be selected. This feature cannot be combined with the Tray 5 (Bypass Tray), Automatic Tray Selection, 2 Sided, Multi Up (N Up), Collated, Image Repeat, Bound Originals, Book Duplex, Covers, Transparency Separators, Booklet Cre- ation, Stapler, and Build Job features. Others Match the direction that the document and paper are loaded. With this feature, the Image Rotation feature does not function.

Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270).

398 3.27 Making Enlarged Copies Spread Over Multiple Sheets - Poster

2 Select Poster in the Others screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Covers Booklet Creation Book Duplex No Covers Off Off

Repeat Image Poster Mirror/Negative Image Features Friendly User Off Off Mirror Image: Off Negative Image: Off Stored Jobs Build Job Original Orientation Off Head to Top

The Poster screen is displayed. 3 Select the number of times that the document is to be divided. Poster Cancel Save

Off 2x2 3 3x3

4x4 ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying

4 Select Paper Tray. Poster Cancel Save

Off Originals Copies Paper Tray

2x2 1 A4 3 8.5 11’’ Plain Plain 3x3 2 A3 4 A4 Plain Plain 4x4

5 Confirm the settings, and select Save. The screen returns to the Others screen.

Select other features if necessary. 6 Others

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 7 Press Start. Copies are made spread over multiple sheets.

With this feature, the number of copies is limited to one.

399 Making Reversed Copies of Images - Mirror Image/ 3.28 Negative Image

Copies can be made with the left and right sides of the document image reversed or the colors of the document reversed in the color mode.

Mirror Image Copies can be made with the left and right sides of the document image reversed symmetrically. User Friendly Features Friendly User

Document Mirror image

Negative-Positive Reversal 3 Copies can be made with the colors in the document reversed in the selected color mode. When Output Color is set to Black/White or Single Color, the density (contrast) is reversed in black-and-white. When Output Color is set to Full Color, the colors in the document are reversed to their complementary colors. ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying

Document Copy

BlackBlack FullFull ColorColor SingleSingle Color Color (When(When MagentaMagenta is isset) set)

When Output Color is set to Dual Color, the Negative Image feature cannot be used. When Negative Image and Border Erase are set simultaneously, the edge erase area turns to White. Others

Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270).

400 3.28 Making Reversed Copies of Images - Mirror Image/Negative Image

2 Select Mirror Image/Negative Image in the Others screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Covers Booklet Creation Book Duplex No Covers Off Off

Repeat Image Poster Mirror/Negative Image Features Friendly User Off Off Mirror Image: Off Negative Image: Off Stored Jobs Build Job Original Orientation Off Head to Top

The Mirror Image/Negative Image screen is displayed. 3 To use mirror image, select On. To use the negative image, select On. Mirror Image/Negative Image Cancel Save

Mirror Image Negative Image Off Off 3 On On ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying

4 Select Save. The screen returns to the Others screen. 5 To use Negative Image, select the desired color more type for negative image at Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. With Negative Image, the Dual Color button cannot be selected.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button.

401 3.28 Making Reversed Copies of Images - Mirror Image/Negative Image

7 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. When mirror image is specified, copies are made with the left and right sides of the document image reversed. When negative image is specified, copies are made with the document image reversed in black-and- white or the contrast reversed. User Friendly Features Friendly User

3 ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying Others

402 Storing Frequently Used 3.29 Setups - Stored Jobs

Frequently used job setups can be stored to job memory and called up by a single button operation. This feature allows up to eight jobs to be stored. A name up to 18 characters long can be set to a stored job.

The value set for the paper size/paper type for Tray 5 is not saved in the job memory. Features Friendly User

3.29.1 Storing Copy Setups to Stored Jobs

This section describes the procedure for storing copy setups to stored jobs.

Procedure

1 Set the desired features to store to a stored job in the Basic Copying screen, Added Features screen, Image Quality screen, and Others 3 screen.

2 Select Stored Jobs in the Others screen. Image Quality Added Features Basic Copying Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Covers Booklet Creation Book Duplex No Covers Off Off

Repeat Image Poster Mirror/Negative Image Off Off Mirror Image: Off Negative Image: Off Stored Jobs Build Job Original Orientation Off Head to Top

The Stored Jobs screen is displayed. 3 Select Store.

Stored Jobs Save

Retrieve 1 (Not In Use) 5 (Not In Use)

Store 2 (Not In Use) 6 Job Memory 6 Others

Delete 3 (Not In Use) 7 (Not In Use)

Enter/Change 4 (Not In Use) 8 Job Memory 8 Name

403 3.29 Storing Frequently Used Setups - Stored Jobs

4 Select the number of the job to store. In this example, select 1.

Stored Jobs Save

Retrieve 1 (Not In Use) 5 (Not In Use) User Friendly Features Friendly User Job Memory 6 Store 2 (Not In Use) 6

Delete 3 (Not In Use) 7 (Not In Use)

Enter/Change Job Memory 8 4 (Not In Use) 8 Name

“The message stored to Job 1.” is displayed to indicate that the setup is stored.

Once a job is stored to a button, it cannot be overwritten. 5 Select Enter/Change Name, and select the number of the job to name. 3 Stored Jobs Save Retrieve 1 (Not In Use) 5 (Not In Use)

ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying Store 2 (Not In Use) 6 Job Memory 6

Delete 3 (Not In Use) 7 (Not In Use)

Enter/Change 4 (Not In Use) 8 Name Job Memory 8

6 Enter a name up to 18 characters long for the stored job, and select Save. The display might differ according to the ROM versions.

Document Centre C400/320 Cancel Save

a b c d e f g 1 2 3 Backspace Alphanumeric h j j k l m n 4 5 6 Space

o p q r s t u 7 8 9 Shift

Symbol v w x y z 0 Others This sets the name you entered, and the screen returns to the Stored Jobs screen.

For details about how to enter characters, see “5.1 Overview of System Administration Mode” (P. 108) in “Part 1 Hardware”. 7 Select Save. The screen returns to the Others screen.

To change the setup stored to a stored job, delete the setup, and store the new setup.

404 3.29 Storing Frequently Used Setups - Stored Jobs

3.29.2 Deleting Stored Jobs

This section describes the procedure for deleting copy setups currently registered to a stored job. User Friendly Features Friendly User Procedure

1 Select Stored Jobs in the Others screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Covers Booklet Creation Book Duplex No Covers Off Off

Repeat Image Poster Mirror/Negative Image Off Off Mirror Image: Off Negative Image: Off Stored Jobs Build Job Original Orientation Off Head to Top 3 The Stored Jobs screen is displayed. ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying 2 Select Delete.

Stored Jobs Save

Retrieve 1 Job Memory 1 5 (Not In Use)

Job Memory 6 Store 2 (Not In Use) 6

Delete 3 (Not In Use) 7 (Not In Use)

Enter/Change Job Memory 8 4 (Not In Use) 8 Name

The message “Select the number of the stored job to delete” is displayed. 3 Select the number of the job to delete. In this example, select 1.

Stored Jobs Save

Retrieve 1 Job Memory 1 5 (Not In Use) Others

Store 2 (Not In Use) 6 Job Memory 6

Delete 3 (Not In Use) 7 (Not In Use)

Enter/Change 4 (Not In Use) 8 Job Memory 8 Name

405 3.29 Storing Frequently Used Setups - Stored Jobs

A confirmation message will be displayed.

Stored Jobs Close The programming information stored in the following Stored Job will be deleted. Job No. : 1 Job Name : Job Memory 1 Are you sure? User Friendly Features Friendly User

Yes No Enter/Change Name

4 Select Yes.

Stored Jobs Close The programming information stored in the following Stored Job will be deleted. Job No. : 1 Job Name : Job Memory 1 Are you sure?

Yes No 3 Enter/Change Name

ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying The message “Delete setup stored to Job1.” is displayed. 5 Select Close. The screen returns to the Others screen. Others

406 3.29 Storing Frequently Used Setups - Stored Jobs

3.29.3 Copying With Stored Jobs

Following describes the procedure for calling a copy setup stored to a stored job and making copies using that setup. User Friendly Features Friendly User Procedure

1 Load the document.

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select Stored Jobs in the Others screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features 3 Covers Booklet Creation Book Duplex No Covers Off Off

Repeat Image Poster Mirror/Negative Image ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying Off Off Mirror Image: Off Negative Image: Off Stored Jobs Build Job Original Orientation Off Head to Top

3 Select the number of the job containing the copy setup you want to call up. In this example, select the 1 button.

Stored Jobs Save

Retrieve 1 Job Memory 1 5 (Not In Use)

Store 2 (Not In Use) 6 Job Memory 6

Delete 3 (Not In Use) 7 (Not In Use)

Enter/Change 4 (Not In Use) 8 Job Memory 8 Name

The message “Called up Job1.” is displayed. Others 4 Select Save. The screen returns to the Others screen. 5 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. Copies are made using the setup stored to the stored job.

407 Making Copies of Documents at Different Settings in a Single 3.30 Operation - Build Job

Copies of documents can be made with settings for pages or the entire stack of pages changed to be finally grouped together as a single job. This is called the Build Job feature. If you make multiple copies when the Build Job feature is set, a sample copy is printed out beforehand so that you can confirm the final output state of the copy. After you have confirmed the output state, you can change the number of copies or select whether or not to User Friendly Features Friendly User output the remaining number of copies.

Document Copy

Copy The preset number of copies is made.

First setting

Next setting 3 Third setting

Sample copy

ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying Only one copy is made. The remaining number of copies can be printed or canceled depending on the output state of the sample copy.

To use the Build Job feature, additional 128 MB memory must be installed. Other features cannot be set while the Build Job feature is active. Interrupt copies also cannot be made by pressing Interrupt. If you cancel a setting while the Build Job feature is active, all build job settings are canceled, With this feature, the resolution is always processed at 600 dpi regardless of whether or not optional accessories for high image quality output are installed. Others

408 3.30 Making Copies of Documents at Different Settings in a Single Operation - Build Job

Combining the Build Job Feature with Other Features The Build Job feature is sub-divided into two other features, a feature for making settings on the entire job, and a feature for making settings on each document that is loaded. The following table shows the possible combinations of features: User Friendly Features Friendly User Doc Doc Ove Ove Feature ume Feature ume rall rall nt nt Document Glass Transparency Separators ×× Duplex Automatic Document Transparency Separators ×× Feeder (copies for distribution) Paper Trays 1, 2, 3, 4 *1 Image Rotation Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) *1 Original Type Auto Tray Switching *1 Background Suppression Output Color Lighter/Darker/Contrast 2 Sided (1 → 2 Sided) Sharpness/Color Saturation 3 2 Sided (2 → 2 Sided) Color Shift 2 Sided (2 → 1 Sided) Color Balance Auto/X-Y Auto Ratio Image Quality Presets Image Quality Added Features Basic Copying Standard/Any/Independent X- Covers Y% Output (Collated) Booklet Creation Output (Uncollated) ××Book Duplex ×× Stapling Image Repeat Auto Center/Move to Corner Poster ×× Variable Shift Mirror Image/Negative Image Border Erase/Center Erase Build Job (Sample Copy) *2 Original Size Build Job (by Chapter) *3 Mixed Size Originals Output Tray (Center Output Tray) Bound Originals Output Tray (Side Output Tray) Multiple Up Output Tray (Finisher Tray) Original Orientation No. of Sets Others : Settings can be made by the Build Job feature, however they cannot be changed after scanning of the document is started. × : Settings cannot be made. : Changes can be made to settings if you have not started printing or if you have not instructed continuation of printing after outputting the sample print.

*1 : The paper tray for adding documents to cannot be changed when the booklet creation feature is set. *2 : Build Job (sample copy) settings cannot be changed after scanning of the document is started. *3 : With Build Job (by chapter), you can change whether or not to make settings for each document that is loaded.

409 3.30 Making Copies of Documents at Different Settings in a Single Operation - Build Job

Procedure

1 Load the document that is to be scanned by the first build job setup. User Friendly Features Friendly User 2 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad. 3 Select Build Job in the Others screen. Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Covers Booklet Creation Book Duplex No Covers Off Off

Repeat Image Poster Mirror/Negative Image Off Off Mirror Image: Off Negative Image: Off Stored Jobs Build Job Original Orientation Off Head to Top

3 The Build Job screen is displayed.

ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying 4 Select On.

Build Job Cancel Save This feature scans and merges individual job segments with different features programmed. Segments can consist Off of one or more originals. Not that features which apply to the entire jobs such as Covers, Booklet Creation, Stapling* and Output Destination On need to be selected first.

*Stapling is an optional feature.

The Sample Set button for setting whether or not to output the sample copy is displayed in the center of the screen. 5 Select whether or not to output the sample print. In this example, select the On button at Sample Set.

Build Job Cancel Save

Sample Set Others Off Select On to make a proof set of your Off originals. Check output. Press Start to print the remaining sets or Stop to cancel the job. On On The sample set is counted as part of the quantity selected.

6 Select Save. The screen returns to the Others screen.

410 3.30 Making Copies of Documents at Different Settings in a Single Operation - Build Job

7 If necessary, set desired features in the Basic Copying, Added Fea- tures, Image Quality or Others screen.

Added Basic Copying Image Quality Others Menu Features Covers Booklet Creation Book Duplex

No Covers Off Off Features Friendly User

Repeat Image Poster Mirror/Negative Image Off Off Mirror Image: Off Negative Image: Off Stored Jobs Build Job Original Orientation Off Head to Top

For details about features that can be combined with the Build Job feature, see “ Combining the Build Job Feature with Other Features” (P. 409). 8 Press Start. Scanning of the first document that you loaded is started. 3 9 Confirm that Next Original is selected while the document is being scanned. Image Quality Added Features Basic Copying

Copy Job :Doc. No. 00002 Close

Quantity: 0/20 Stop

Originals: 18 Last Original (A4 ) Black Next Original 100%

Collated

The following screen is displayed when scanning of the document ends.

Build Job selected -- Ready to copy. Free Memory 80% Load next original and touch Start. Or, touch Last Original when the scanning completes. 1 Copy Job :Doc. No. 00002 Close

Quantity: 0/20 Stop

Originals: 50 Last Original

Chapter Division Next Original Others

Change Settings... Start

If you leave the machine for a fixed amount of time without performing any operation with Last Origi- nal selected or the screen displayed, the Auto Clear feature automatically stops storing of documents to memory, and printing is started at the preset details.

411 3.30 Making Copies of Documents at Different Settings in a Single Operation - Build Job

For details about setting the Auto Clear feature, see “ 5. Auto Clear” (P. 123) in “5.4.1 Machine Clock/Timers” in “Part 1 Hardware”.

Load the next document. User Friendly Features Friendly User 10 If you want to leave the Chapter Division button or other settings unchanged, proceed to step 12 of this procedure. 11 Select other features if necessary. To set by chapter If you select the Chapter Division button, the “Chapter feature” is activated, and the next document will be copied from the top side if “2 Sided” is selected. If scanning of the first loaded document ended at the top side when the Chapter Division button is not selected, the next document will be copied from the back side of the final copied page of the first loaded document.

Copy Job :Doc. No. 00002 Close 3 Quantity: 0/20 Stop

Originals: 50 Last Original ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying Chapter Division Next Original

Change Settings... Start

To cancel the Chapter Division button, select the Chapter Division button again. If you select the Stop button, all data of documents stored by the Build Job Feature will be cleared, and the Build Job feature will be canceled.

For details about the “Chapter feature”, see “ ” (P. 416).

To change settings Copy settings can be made for the loaded document. 1 Select Change Settings....

Copy Job :Doc. No. 00002 Close Others Quantity: 0/20 Stop

Originals: 50 Last Original

Chapter Division Next Original

Change Settings... Start

The Copy screen is displayed.

412 3.30 Making Copies of Documents at Different Settings in a Single Operation - Build Job

2 Set the desired feature.

For details about features that can be combined with the Build Job feature, see “ Combining the Build Job Feature with Other Features” (P. 409). 3 Select Cancel Job. Features Friendly User

Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Cancel Job Features Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain More... More... More... More...

Scanning of the document can also be started by pressing the Start button without selecting Cancel Job after setting the desired features. 3

12 Select Start. Image Quality Added Features Basic Copying

Copy Job :Doc. No. 00002 Close

Quantity: 0/20 Stop

Originals: 50 Last Original

Chapter Division Next Original

Change Settings... Start

Scanning of the next document that you loaded is started.

The same operations for Start and Stop in the screen can be performed by the Start and Clear buttons on the control panel. 13 If necessary, repeat steps 9 to 12.

14 After the last document is scanned, select Last Original. Others

Copy Job :Doc. No. 00002 Close

Quantity: 0/20 Stop

Originals: 180 Last Original

Chapter Division Next Original

Change Settings... Start

413 3.30 Making Copies of Documents at Different Settings in a Single Operation - Build Job

When Sample Set is set to Off When the Off button is selected for Sample Set at step 5, the procedure ends at this step. Setting up of the Build Job feature ends, and copying of all documents begins. When Sample Set is set to On Output of the sample copy begins and only one copy is output at the details preset to the Build Job fea- User Friendly Features Friendly User ture. When the On button is selected for Sample Set at step 5, proceed to step 16.

Free Memory 80% Sample Set selected -- Making copies... 1 Copy Job :Doc. No. 00002 Close

Quantity: 1/20 Stop Quantity: 10/10

Black

1 A 4 3 15 Confirm the output state of the sample copy. ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying 16 After you have confirmed the output state, select whether or not to output the remaining number of copies.

Check whether the output is desirable. Free Memory 80% Touch Start to continue or Stop to cancel the job. 1 Copy Job :Doc. No. 00002 Close

Quantity: 1/20 Stop Quantity: 180/180

Change Settings... Start

To cancel copying of the remaining copies Select the Stop button. Copying of the remaining number of copies is canceled.

To change the number of copies Others 1 Select Change Settings....

Copy Job :Doc. No. 00002 Close

Quantity: 1/20 Stop Quantity: 180/180

Change Settings... Start

The Change Settings screen is displayed.

414 3.30 Making Copies of Documents at Different Settings in a Single Operation - Build Job

2 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad.

Select the required quantity. Free Memory 80% Touch Start to continue. Quantity 10 Change Settings Close

The current set of copies is counted as part of the quantity selected. Features Friendly User

To change quantity, add 1 to the number of sets you want to make.

Start button is not available when the quantity selected is 1.

If you leave the machine for a fixed amount of time without performing any operation after the Change Settings screen is displayed, the Auto Clear feature automatically starts printing the remaining number of copies

For details about setting the Auto Clear feature, see “ 5. Auto Clear” (P. 123) in “5.4.1 Machine 3 Clock/Timers” in “Part 1 Hardware”.

3 Select Close. Image Quality Added Features Basic Copying 17 Press Start. When a sample copy is output, the number of copies obtained by subtracting the number of sample copies from the preset number of copies will be copied as the remaining number of copies. Others

415 3.30 Making Copies of Documents at Different Settings in a Single Operation - Build Job

With the Build Job feature, the Chapter feature is automatically activated at the 1 Sided Copy and 2 Sided Copy switch points and at the tray switch points.

User Friendly Features Friendly User The Chapter feature makes copies on the top side on the first page of the next document when the first loaded document ended at the top side due to the number of document sheets being an odd-number during 2 sided copying. At this time, the back side of the final page of the copy for the first loaded document becomes a blank sheet. When 2 sided copying is continued on the next document and the same tray is used, the Chapter feature does not function. If scanning of the first loaded document ended at the top side, the next document will be copied from the back side of the final copied page of the first loaded document. To activate the Chapter feature, select Chapter Division before you load the next document.

3 Output example when 1 Sided Copy and 2 Sided Copy are both selected.

1 LoadLoad thethe firstfirst documentdocument 22 LoadLoad thethe secondsecond documentdocument WhenWhen switching switching from from 2

2-SidedSided Copy Copy

to 1 Sided to Copy,

1-Sided Copy

, ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying 2 Sided Copy. 1 Sided Copy. the back side at the switch point in

2-Sided Copy

1-Sided Copy

. the back side at the switch point in 1 becomes a blank sheet. 1 becomes a blank sheet.

1 3 4 5 6 3 6 2 5 2 1 4

Output example when 2 Sided Copy is selected twice.

1 Load the firstfirst documentdocument 22 LoadLoad thethe secondsecond documentdocument WhenWhen continuing continuing with with 2 Sided

2-Sided Copy afterCopy

2-Sided Sided Copy. Copy

. 2

2-Sided Sided Copy. Copy

. 2 afterSided

2-Sided Copy, copies Copy

, are made copies from arethe madeback sidefrom at thethe backswitch side point at inthe 1 switch . point in 1 .

1 3 5 3 6 2 5 2 4 6 1 4

Others Output example when 2 Sided Copy is selected twice and Chapter Division is selected.

1 LoadLoad the the first first document document 2 Load2 Load the thesecond second document document WhenWhen continuing continuing with 2 with Sided

2-Sided Copy after Copy

after 2

2-Sided Sided Copy. Copy

. 2

2-SidedSided Copy. Copy

. 2 Sided

2-Sided Copy and Copy

Chapter is andselected,

By Chapter

is the back side at the switch point in the back side at the switch point in 1 1 becomes becomes a a blank blank sheet. sheet.

1 3 4 6 3 6 2 5 2 5 1 4

416 Specifying the Document Orientation - Original Orien- 3.31 tation

The document orientation must be set to indicate the top of the document when using the 2 Sided, Margin Shift, Edge Erase, Multi Up (N Up), Image Repeat, Mixed Size Originals, and Independent X-Y% features. The value set for the document orientation becomes the default setting in each of the screens for the above features. The document orientation, however, can be set in each of these screens. Features Friendly User

The document orientations are as follows: Head to Top Select this when placing the top of the document facing the inner side of the document glass or DADF.

Document on document glass Document on DADF

Top Top Top Left Right 3 Bottom ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying Head to Left Select this when placing the top of the document facing the left side of the document glass or DADF. When the document is placed or loaded to face the left side (text horizontal), be sure to select Head to Left.

Document on document glass Document on DADF

Top

Left Right Top Top

Bottom

The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed in the System Administration Mode. For details about how to change the default for this feature, see “5.5 Copy Mode Settings” (P. 139) in “Part 1 Hardware”. The

default setting is Head to Top. Others When Bound Originals and Book Duplex are set, the document orientation is automatically determined to match the document type setting.

417 3.31 Specifying the Document Orientation - Original Orientation

Procedure

1 Load the document. User Friendly Features Friendly User

For details about loading documents, see “1.2 Loading Documents” (P. 270). 2 Select Original Orientation in the Others screen.

Basic Copying Added Features Image Quality Others Menu

Covers Booklet Creation Book Duplex No Covers Off Off

Image Repeat Poster Mirror Image/Negative Image Off Off Mirror Image:Off Negative Image:Off Stored Jobs Original Orientation 3 Head to Top The Originals Orientation screen is displayed. ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying 3 Select Head to Top or Head to Left to match the direction that the document is loaded. When the document is loaded on the DADF

Originals Orientation Cancel Close

Head to Top Select the orientation of your originals.

Head to Left

When the document is placed on the document glass

Originals Orientation Cancel Close

Head to Top Select the orientation of your originals. Others

Head to Left

418 3.31 Specifying the Document Orientation - Original Orientation

Place or load the document as follows when the Head to Left button was selected at the Originals Ori- entation screen. User Friendly Features Friendly User

4 Confirm the settings, and select Close. The screen returns to the Others screen. 5 Select Output Color in the Basic Copying screen. Select other features if necessary.

To cancel setting, select the Cancel button. 3 6 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad, and press Start. ai oyn de etrsImage Quality Added Features Basic Copying Copies will be made at the selected orientation. Others

419 Part 3 Appendix 1Appendix

A Specifications...... 424 B Optional Accessories ...... 432 C Cautions and Limitations...... 433 D Possible Combinations of Features...... 434 E Error Codes Displayed on the Display ...... 443 E.1 Error Code Tables...... 443 E.2 About Other Errors...... 452 A Specifications

Following are the specifications for the DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series Copiers. Note that improvements in specifications and the appearance of the product may be made without prior notice. Appendix Body/Copy Feature Specifications

Copier Type Console Copying Method Micro-tandem Laser Xerography Development Method Trickle development (2-component) Document Glass/Photo- Fixed/OPC sensitive Type CPU PowerPC 750 400 MHz Fusing System Heat roller Scanning Method Flat bed system using CCD image sensor (fixed document method) Resolution 600 dots/25.4 mm (600 dpi) Document Size Max.: 297 × 452 mm Min.: 15 × 15 mm Copy Paper Size Trays 1, 2, 3, 4 A5, A4, A4 , A3, B5, B5 , B4, 8.5 × 11",8.5 × 11" , 8.5 × 13", 8.5 × 14", 11 × 17" Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) A6, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, B6, B5, B5 , B4, 5.5 × 8.5", 5.5 × 8.5" , 8 × 10", 8.5 × 11", 8.5 × 11" , 8.5 × 13", 8.5 × 14", 11 × 15", 11 × 17", 12 × 18" Non-standard size: Y direction 100 to 305mm, X direction 140 to 482.6mm High Capacity Tray 3, 4 A4 , B5 , 8.5 × 11"

Image loss area: Lead edge 4 mm, Trail edge 2 mm, Both edges 2 mm

* When sheets B5 in size or narrower are output continuously, the non-paper passage side on the fuser unit heats up. For this reason, the message “Please wait” is sometimes displayed and output is discontinued. Output is resumed after a few minutes. The message “Please wait” is also sometimes displayed and output is discontinued for 30 seconds or more when one sheet of paper A5 in size or smaller has been output. G.S.M. Trays 1, 2, 3, 4 : 64 to 105 g/m2 Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) : 55 to 220 g/m2 Warm-up Time Within 52 seconds * On fax-mounted models or in a networked environment, the machine sometimes takes 52 seconds or more to warm up. First Copy Output Time When the default for the color mode is Black or No Defaults. Black-and-white mode: 4.7 Seconds / Color mode: 12.8 Seconds When the default for the color mode is Full Color, Auto, Dual Color or Sin- gle Color. Black-and-white mode: 7.0 Seconds / Color mode: 10.4 Seconds

424 A Specifications

Noise During operation : 68 db (full system 74 db) During standby : 47 db (full system 50 db) Continuous Copy Speed The continuous copy speed sometimes drops due to adjustment of image

quality. Appendix

Paper fed from trays 1, 2, 3, 4 DocumentCentre C400 *1

Paper Size Number of Sheets B5 , A4 , A5, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 40 sheets/minute (one-sided), 32 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 22 sheets/minute (one-sided), 18 sheets/minute (two-sided) B5, A4, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 30 sheets/minute (one-sided), 18 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 16 sheets/minute (one-sided), 10 sheets/minute (two-sided) B4, 8.5 × 13, 8.5 × 14 Black-and-white: 24 sheets/minute (one-sided), 16 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 13 sheets/minute (one-sided), 9 sheets/minute (two-sided) A3, 11 × 17 Black-and-white: 20 sheets/minute (one-sided), 15 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), 8 sheets/minute (two-sided)

DocumentCentre C320

Paper Size Number of Sheets B5 , A4 , A5, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 32 sheets/minute (one-sided), 20 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 16 sheets/minute (one-sided), 11 sheets/minute (two-sided) B5, A4, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 24 sheets/minute (one-sided), 17 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 13 sheets/minute (one-sided), 9 sheets/minute (two-sided) B4, 8.5 × 13, 8.5 × 14 Black-and-white: 20 sheets/minute (one-sided), 15 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), 8 sheets/minute (two-sided) A3, 11 × 17 Black-and-white: 17 sheets/minute (one-sided), 14 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 9 sheets/minute (one-sided), 8 sheets/minute (two-sided)

425 A Specifications

DocumentCentre C240

Paper Size (PPC) Number of Sheets B5 , A4 , A5, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 24 sheets/minute (one-sided),

Appendix 18 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 13 sheets/minute (one-sided), 10 sheets/minute (two-sided) B5, A4, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 20 sheets/minute (one-sided), 16 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), 9 sheets/minute (two-sided) B4, 8.5 × 13, 8.5 × 14 Black-and-white: 17 sheets/minute (one-sided), 14 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 9 sheets/minute (one-sided), 8 sheets/minute (two-sided) A3, 11 × 17 Black-and-white: 15 sheets/minute (one-sided), 13 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 8 sheets/minute (one-sided), 7 sheets/minute (two-sided)

Paper fed from Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) *2 DocumentCentre C400

Paper Size (PPC) Number of Sheets B5 , A4 , A5, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 30 sheets/minute (one-sided), 30 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 16 sheets/minute (one-sided), 16 sheets/minute (two-sided) B5, A4, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 24 sheets/minute (one-sided), 17 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 13 sheets/minute (one-sided), 9 sheets/minute (two-sided) B4, 8.5 × 13, 8.5 × 14 Black-and-white: 20 sheets/minute (one-sided), 15 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 13 sheets/minute (one-sided), 9 sheets/minute (two-sided) A3, 11 × 17 Black-and-white: 20 sheets/minute (one-sided), 15 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), 8 sheets/minute (two-sided)

Paper Size (transparency) Number of Sheets A4 , 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 16 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 8 sheets/minute (one-sided) A4, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 13 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 7 sheets/minute (one-sided) A3, 11 × 17 Black-and-white: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 5 sheets/minute (one-sided)

426 A Specifications

Paper Size (thickness 1) Number of Sheets B5 , A4 , A5, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 16 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided)

B5, A4, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 13 sheets/minute (one-sided), Appendix Color: 8 sheets/minute (one-sided) B4, 8.5 × 13, 8.5 × 14 Black-and-white: 13 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 7 sheets/minute (one-sided) A3, 11 × 17 Black-and-white: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 5 sheets/minute (one-sided)

Paper Size (thickness 2) Number of Sheets B5 , A4 , A5, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided) B5, A4, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 8 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 8 sheets/minute (one-sided) B4, 8.5 × 13, 8.5 × 14 Black-and-white: 7 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 7 sheets/minute (one-sided) A3, 11 × 17 Black-and-white: 5 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 5 sheets/minute (one-sided)

DocumentCentre C320

Paper Size (plain) Number of Sheets B5 , A4 , A5, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 24 sheets/minute (one-sided), 18 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 13 sheets/minute (one-sided), 10 sheets/minute (two-sided) B5, A4, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 20 sheets/minute (one-sided), 16 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), 9 sheets/minute (two-sided) B4, 8.5 × 13, 8.5 × 14 Black-and-white: 17 sheets/minute (one-sided), 14 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), 8 sheets/minute (two-sided) A3, 11 × 17 Black-and-white: 17 sheets/minute (one-sided), 14 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 9 sheets/minute (one-sided), 8 sheets/minute (two-sided)

Paper Size (transparency) Number of Sheets A4 , 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 13 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 7 sheets/minute (one-sided) A4, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 5 sheets/minute (one-sided) A3, 11 × 17 Black-and-white: 9 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 4 sheets/minute (one-sided)

427 A Specifications

Paper Size (thickness 1) Number of Sheets B5 , A4 , A5, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 13 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 8 sheets/minute (one-sided) × Appendix B5, A4, 8.5 11 Black-and-white: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 7 sheets/minute (one-sided) B4, 8.5 × 13, 8.5 × 14 Black-and-white: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 5 sheets/minute (one-sided) A3, 11 × 17 Black-and-white: 9 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 5 sheets/minute (one-sided)

Paper Size (thickness 2) Number of Sheets B5 , A4 , A5, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 8 sheets/minute (two-sided), Color: 8 sheets/minute (two-sided) B5, A4, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 7 sheets/minute (two-sided), Color: 7 sheets/minute (two-sided) B4, 8.5 × 13, 8.5 × 14 Black-and-white: 5 sheets/minute (two-sided), Color: 5 sheets/minute (two-sided) A3, 11 × 17 Black-and-white: 5 sheets/minute (two-sided), Color: 5 sheets/minute (two-sided)

DocumentCentre C240

Paper Size (plain) Number of Sheets B5 , A4 , A5, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 20 sheets/minute (one-sided), 17 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), 9 sheets/minute (two-sided) B5, A4, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 17 sheets/minute (one-sided), 15 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 9 sheets/minute (one-sided), 8 sheets/minute (two-sided) B4, 8.5 × 13, 8.5 × 14 Black-and-white: 15 sheets/minute (one-sided), 13 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 9 sheets/minute (one-sided), 8 sheets/minute (two-sided) A3, 11 × 17 Black-and-white: 15 sheets/minute (one-sided), 13 sheets/minute (two-sided) Color: 8 sheets/minute (one-sided), 7 sheets/minute (two-sided)

Paper Size (transparency) Number of Sheets A4 , 8.5 11 Black-and-white: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 5 sheets/minute (one-sided) A4, 8.5 11 Black-and-white: 9 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 4 sheets/minute (one-sided) A3, 11 17 Black-and-white: 8 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 4 sheets/minute (one-sided)

428 A Specifications

Paper Size (thickness 1) Number of Sheets B5 , A4 , A5, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 11 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 7 sheets/minute (one-sided)

B5, A4, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 9 sheets/minute (one-sided), Appendix Color: 5 sheets/minute (one-sided) B4, 8.5 × 13, 8.5 × 14 Black-and-white: 9 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 5 sheets/minute (one-sided) A3, 11 × 17 Black-and-white: 8 sheets/minute (one-sided), Color: 4 sheets/minute (one-sided)

Paper Size (thickness 2) Number of Sheets B5 , A4 , A5, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 7 sheets/minute (two-sided), Color: 7 sheets/minute (two-sided) B5, A4, 8.5 × 11 Black-and-white: 5 sheets/minute (two-sided), Color: 5 sheets/minute (two-sided) B4, 8.5 × 13, 8.5 × 14 Black-and-white: 5 sheets/minute (two-sided), Color: 5 sheets/minute (two-sided) A3, 11 × 17 Black-and-white: 4 sheets/minute (two-sided), Color: 4 sheets/minute (two-sided)

*1 When paper is fed from Tray 4 on a High Capacity Tray model, and the paper size is B5 , A4, , A5 or 8.5 × 11”, the speed becomes 30 sheets/minute (one-sided document) in the Black-and-white mode. When paper is fed from Tray 4 on a 4-tray model, and the paper size is B5, A4, or 8.5 × 11”, the speed becomes 24 sheets/ minute (one-sided document) in the Black-and-white mode. *2 When paper is fed from Tray 5 (Bypass Tray), and Automatic Size Detec- tion is selected at that paper size, the 1st sheet is printed out slower. Paper Capacity 2,340 sheets (When using Fuji Xerox P (Trays 1 to 4: 560 sheets each, Tray 5 (Bypass Tray): 100 sheets) paper) Number of Copies 999 (number of copies that can be loaded) Installation Environment Temperature: 10 to 32°C Humidity: 15 to 85% (no condensation) At 32°C, humidity should be below 47.5%. At 27.8°C, humidity should be below 85%. Output Tray Capacity Standard Output Tray: Approx. 400 sheets (A4 ) Offset Output: Approx. 200 sheets (A4 )* * Offset output is an optional accessory. When using the offset output option, the number of sheets that can be output differs from the standard output. Duplex Printing Available Power/Power Consumption 220/240 VAC, 10 A (50/60 Hz)/2.2 KVA or less Memory Page memory, standard : 128 MB (option: 128 MB) System memory, standard: 256 MB (option: 256 MB) Hard Disk 10 GB Dimensions 666 (W) × 780 (D) × 1067 (H) mm Weight 174 kg (excluding paper and optional accessories)

429 A Specifications

Network Printer Specifications

PDL Standard

Appendix PCL6, PCL5e, TIFF, HP-GL2*1, HP-GL*2 Optional Accessories/Kit PostScript3 software kit (Ver.3011, PDF) *1 HP7586 and FX4036 emulation *2 DesignJet750C and FX4036 emulation Printer Driver Compatible PCL6 OS Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows NT, Windows XP PostScript (optional accessory)* Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows NT, Windows XP, Mac OS 7.1 to 8.1, Mac OS 8.5/8.5.1, Mac OS 8.6 to Mac OS 9.x and Mac OS 10.2 or later * For Windows 2000, use the PPD for MS PostScript driver, and for other OS’s, use an Adobe PPD. Interface Bi-directional parallel (IEEE1284 compliant), Ethernet 100Base-TX/ 10Base-T Optional accessory: Token Ring Protocol Centronics: Compatible.Nibble, ECP Ethernet : TCP/IP, NetWare, EtherTalk (AppleTalk), SMB, DHCP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPP, Port9100, Salutation, BOOTP, FTP, UDP/IP, SNMP Fonts Standard 81 European-language fonts, symbol 35 sets PostScript (optional accessory) 136 European-language fonts

Network Scanner Specifications

Scanning Method Flat bed system using CCD image sensor (fixed document method) Compression Method MH, MMR, JPEG Resolution 200/300/400/600 dpi Midtones 256 Scanning Speed (scan- Black-and-white mode: 32 sheets/minute, Color mode: 13 sheets/minute ning to mailbox) (A4: 200 dpi) File Format Black-and-white binary : TIFF, PDF, DocuWorks Grayscale : JFIF* (JPEG), TIFF, PDF, DocuWorks Full-color : JFIF* (JPEG), TIFF, PDF, DocuWorks *JFIF: JPEG File Interchange Format TWAIN Compatible OS Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows NT, Windows XP Protocol TCP/IP, Salutation, HTTP Driver TWAIN

430 A Specifications

DADF Specifications

Size/Weight 639 (W) × 535 (D) × 130 (H) mm, 14 g

Document Feed Method Top side feed Appendix Document Size Max: A3, Min: B5 Capacity Lightweight paper (38 to 49 g/m2): 50 sheets Plain paper (50 to 100 g/m2): 50 sheets Heavyweight paper (101 to 128 g/m2): 40 sheets Document Feed Modes One sided Feed, Two sided Feed, Mixed-size Feed (one sided, two sided) Document Replacement Black-and-white/Color: One sided 32 sheets/minute, Two sided 7.7 Speed sheets/minute Document Weight One sided Feed Mode: 38 to128 g/m2 Two sided Feed Mode: 50 to110 g/m2 Power/Power Consump- Supplied from machine body, 14.5 W DC (A3/Two sided mode) tion* *The maximum power consumption figure is for only when the DADF is attached.

Duplex Unit Specifications

Available Paper Sizes A5, A4, A4 , A3, B5, B5 , B4, 8.5 × 11", 8.5 × 11" , 8.5 × 13", 8.5 × 14", 11 × 17" *Both sides of paper loaded on Trays 1 to 4 are automatically copied. G.S.M. 63 to 105 g/m2

Light Staple Finisher (option) Specifications

Size/Weight 530 (W) × 590 (D) × 945 (H) mm, 35 g Finisher Tray Capacity A4: 1,000 sheets, B4 or larger size paper: 500 sheets, mix stacker*: 300 sheets *When larger size paper is stacked on top of small-size paper G.S.M. 64 to 128 g/m2 Staple Capacity 2 to 50 sheets (Xerox P paper) Output Paper Sizes A4 , A4, B5 , B4, A3, 16K , 8K, 8 × 10", 8.5 × 11" , 8.5 × 11", 8.5 × 13", 8.5 × 14", 11 × 17" Power/Power Consump- Supplied from main body, 48 W DC tion*

Side Output Tray (option) Specifications

Paper Sizes Same as main body Side Output Tray Capacity 200 sheets Delivery Method Delivered face up

431 B Optional Accessories

The following table lists the main optional accessories. For details, contact our Customer Support Center.

Appendix Product Name Description Offset Catch Tray This kit is for shifting the output position of copies. 128MB Memory Kit This kit expands memory up to 128MB. 256MB Memory Kit This kit expands memory up to 256MB. PostScript Software Kit PostScript Software Kit Light Finisher This Light Finisher staples prints or copies before outputting them. TokenRing Option-Kit This kit enables communications over the TokenRing interface. Face Up Side Tray Kit This kit enables paper to be output with its top side facing up. Internet FAX Option If this option is installed on models not installed with Fax features, the same functions as a model with Fax features can be used. Additional FAX G3 Kit The FAX G3 Kit and Additional FAX Port Kit are needed to install this kit. This kit allows you to add on a FAX communications (G3 mode) line. Additional FAX Port Kit This kit is needed to use the Additional FAX G3 Kit. Power cord This power cord is exclusively for this machine. IIT Anti-vibration Kit This kit provides vibration resistance in the event of an earthquake, other natural disasters, or accidents.

Product types is subject to change without notice. For the latest information, contact our Customer Support Center.

PostScript Software Kit When the PostScript Software Kit is installed, this machine can be used as a PostScript printer. Printing is also possible from a Macintosh.

432 C Cautions and Limitations

This section describes the cautions and limitations to observe when using this machine. When the printing result differs from the settings The printing result sometimes differs from the settings as follows when, for Appendix example, the print page buffer runs out of memory. If this happens, we recommend adding on memory. Copies are printed on only one side of the paper even though you specified two sided printing. The job is canceled. (Jobs including the current page are canceled if they cannot be stored to the print page buffer.)

About Accessories The PostScript Software Kit (option) is needed to use this machine as a Post- Script printer.

Installing and moving the main body When moving the main body from the machine rack, contact our Customer Support Center. Do not subject the main body to impact while the machine is in operation. When closing the document cover, take care not to trap your fingers. Do not place objects near the suction and discharge ports for the fans on external covers.

433 Possible Combinations of D Features

This section provides lists of possible combinations of copy features.

Paper Supply - Auto Trays 1 to 4 Manual bypass Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) Reduce/Enlarge Output Color Original Type Auto Size Detect Standard Size Standard 12 Non-standard Size Plain Lightweight/Transparency/Labels Heavywt 1/Heavywt 2 2 2-Side 2/Heavywt 1-Side Heavywt Auto% 100% R/E Presets Any ratio Auto Full Color Single Color Dual Color Black Text and Photo (Magazine Photo/Photograph) (Magazine Photo and Text Text and Photo (Color Copies) Text (normal text) Photo (Magazine Photo/Photograph) Photo (Color Copies) Map/Highlighter Marked/Inkjet Remove Background Color Independent X-Y% Appendix

Feature to Combine Auto% Specified% Calculator% × 18"

Already Set Feature

Paper Supply - Auto Trays 1 to 4 Manual bypass Auto Size Detect SS

Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) Standard Size Standard 12 × 18" Non-standard Size Plain Lightweight/Transparency/Labels Heavywt 1/Heavywt 2 Heavywt 1-Side 2/Heavywt 2-Side 2 Auto% S

Reduce/Enlarge 100% R/E Presets Any ratio Auto% S Independent Specified% X-Y% Calculator% Auto Output Color Full Color Single Color ×××××× Dual Color ×××××× Black Text and Photo (Magazine Photo/Photograph) Text and Photo (Color Copies) Original Type Text (normal text) Photo (Magazine Photo/Photograph) × Photo (Color Copies) × Map/Highlighter Marked/Inkjet Remove Background Color

Unmarked Can be used simultaneously Cannot be used simultaneously × Selection of subsequent features is prohibited Previous setting changes to other selection S Copying not possible is indicated when the Start button is pressed Can be selected, though previous setting is ignored Can be selected conditionally

434 D Possible Combinations of Features

Density Color Control Color Shift Color Saturation Sharpness Contrast Presets Quality Image Margin Shift Edge Erase/Center Erase Image Rotation Negative Image Mirror Image Original Size Mixed Size Original Orientation 2 Sided Output Multi Up (N Up) Image Repeat Bound Originals Book Duplex Originals - Head to Head/Head to Toe Copies - Head to Head/Head to Toe Auto Collated Uncollated 2 2 1 Center Corner Any Standard Size Non-standard Size 1 Auto → → → → 1 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided 1 Sided

Feature to Combine Appendix

Already Set Feature

Paper Supply - Auto Trays 1 to 4 Manual bypass Auto Size Detect SS SS SS SSSS

Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) Standard Size Standard 12 × 18" SS S Non-standard Size Plain Lightweight/Transparency/Labels SS S Heavywt 1/Heavywt 2 SS S Heavywt 1-Side 2/Heavywt 2-Side 2 SS S Auto%

Reduce/Enlarge 100% R/E Presets S Any ratio S Auto% Independent Specified% X-Y% S Calculator% S Auto Output Color Full Color Single Color Dual Color × Black Text and Photo (Magazine Photo/Photograph) Text and Photo (Color Copies) Original Type Text (normal text) Photo (Magazine Photo/Photograph) Photo (Color Copies) Map/Highlighter Marked/Inkjet Remove Background Color

435 D Possible Combinations of Features Poster Covers Booklet Stapling Specify Number of Copies Place on Document Glass Load on DADF Build Job Interrupt Unauthorized User Color/ B/W User Color User B/W User Transparency Output Separators Destination Separators Only Sets Separators N + N Sets Only Center Output Tray Side Output Tray Finisher Tray

Appendix Feature to Combine

Already Set Feature

Paper Supply - Auto ---- Trays 1 to 4 ---- Manual bypass × ---- Auto Size Detect SSSS ---- Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) Standard Size ---- Standard 12 × 18" SSS ---- Non-standard Size ---- Plain ---- Lightweight/Transparency/Labels SSS ---- Heavywt 1/Heavywt 2 SSS ---- Heavywt 1-Side 2/Heavywt 2-Side 2 SSS ---- Auto% ----

Reduce/Enlarge 100% ---- R/E Presets ---- Any ratio ---- Auto% ---- Independent Specified% X-Y% ---- Calculator% ---- Auto

Color Mode ---- Full Color ---- Single Color ---- Dual Color ---- Black ---- Text and Photo (Magazine Photo/Photograph) ---- Text and Photo (Color Copies)

Original Type ---- Text (normal text) ---- Photo (Magazine Photo/Photograph) ---- Photo (Color Copies) ---- Map/Highlighter Marked/Inkjet ---- Remove Background Color ----

436 D Possible Combinations of Features

Feature to Combine Appendix × 18"

Already Set Feature

Density Color balance Color Shift Color Saturation Sharpness Contrast Image Quality Presets Margin Shift Margin Center S Corner S Any Edge Erase/Center Erase Image Rotation Negative Image S × Mirror Image S Original Size Auto Standard Size Non-standard Size SS SS Mixed Size Original Orientation 1 → 1 Sided 1 → 2 Sided SS SSS 2 Sided 2 → 1 Sided SS SSS 2 → 2 Sided Originals - Head to Head/Head to Toe Copies - Head to Head/Head to Toe

Output Auto Collated Uncollated Multi Up (N Up) × S Image Repeat × S ×× Bound Originals S Book Duplex SS SSS

437 D Possible Combinations of Features

Density Color balance Color Shift Color Saturation Sharpness Contrast Presets Quality Image Margin Shift Edge Erase/Center Erase Image Rotation Negative Image Mirror Image Original Size Mixed Size Original Orientation 2 Sided Output Multi Up (N Up) Image Repeat Bound Originals Book Duplex Originals - Head to Head/Head to Toe Copies - Head to Head/Head to Toe Auto Collated Uncollated 2 2 1 Center Corner Any Standard Size Non-standard Size 1 Auto → → → → 1 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided 1 Sided

Appendix Feature to Combine

Already Set Feature

Density Color balance Color Shift Color Saturation Sharpness Contrast Image Quality Presets Margin Shift Margin Center Corner Any Edge Erase/Center Erase Image Rotation Negative Image Mirror Image

Original Size Auto Standard Size Non-standard Size Mixed Size × Original Orientation 1 → 1 Sided -- 1 → 2 Sided

2 Sided ×× × × 2 → 1 Sided × × 2 → 2 Sided - × × Originals - Head to Head/Head to Toe Copies - Head to Head/Head to Toe

Output Auto Collated × Uncollated × Multi Up (N Up) × ××× Image Repeat ××× × × ×× Bound Originals × ×× × Book Duplex × ××× ××××

438 D Possible Combinations of Features Poster Covers Booklet Stapling Specify Number of Copies Place on Document Glass Load on DADF Build Job Interrupt Unauthorized User Color/ B/W User Color User B/W User Transparency Output Separators Destination Separators Only Sets Separators N + N Sets Only Center Output Tray Side Output Tray Finisher Tray

Feature to Combine Appendix

Already Set Feature

Density ---- Color balance ---- Color Shift ---- Color Saturation ---- Sharpness ---- Contrast ---- Image Quality Presets ---- Margin Shift Center ---- Corner ---- Any ---- Edge Erase/Center Erase ---- Image Rotation ---- Negative Image ---- Mirror Image ---- Original Size Original Auto ---- Standard Size ---- Non-standard Size ---- Mixed Size SSSS× SS ---- Original Orientation ---- 1 → 1 Sided ---- 1 → 2 Sided ----

2 Sided ×× × 2 → 1 Sided ×× × ---- 2 → 2 Sided ×× ---- Originals - Head to Head/Head to Toe ---- Copies - Head to Head/Head to Toe ----

Output Auto ---- Collated × ---- Uncollated ××××××---- Multi Up (N Up) ×× S ---- Image Repeat ××××S × ---- Bound Originals × S ---- Book Duplex × ×××× S × ----

439 D Possible Combinations of Features

Appendix Feature to Combine × 18"

Already Set Feature

Poster × × ×××××× Covers Transparency

Separators Separators Only Separators + N Sets

N Sets Only Booklet × SS SSS

Destination Center Output Tray Output Output Side Output Tray SS Finisher Tray SS SSS Stapling SS SSS Specify Number of Copies Place on Document Glass Load on DADF Build Job Interrupt Unauthorized User ××××× Color/ B/W User Color User ×× B/W User ××××

440 D Possible Combinations of Features

Feature to Combine Appendix

Already Set Feature

Poster ××× × ×××× Covers S ×× Transparency Separators Separators Only S ×× × Separators + N Sets S ××

N Sets Only S ×× Booklet ×× × ××× ××× ×

Destination Center Output Tray Output Output Side Output Tray Finisher Tray S Stapling S ×× Specify Number of Copies Place on Document Glass S Load on DADF SSS Build Job ××× Interrupt Unauthorized User Color/ B/W User Color User B/W User

441 D Possible Combinations of Features Poster Covers Booklet Stapling Specify Number of Copies Place on Document Glass Load on DADF Build Job Interrupt Unauthorized User Color/ B/W User Color User B/W User Transparency Output Separators Destination Separators Only Sets Separators N + N Sets Only Center Output Tray Side Output Tray Finisher Tray

Appendix Feature to Combine

Already Set Feature

Poster ××××× ×× S × ---- Covers ××××× ---- Transparency Separators Separators Only ×× × ××× ---- Separators + N Sets ×× × ----

N Sets Only ×× × ---- Booklet ××××× × ----

Destination Center Output Tray

Output Output ---- Side Output Tray ---- Finisher Tray × ---- Stapling ×× × ---- Specify Number of Copies ---- Place on Document Glass ---- Load on DADF S × ---- Build Job × ---- Interrupt ---- Unauthorized User ---- Color/ B/W User ---- Color User ---- B/W User ----

442 Error Codes Displayed on E the Display

This section describes the error codes that are displayed on the display. Messages and error codes (***-***) such as those shown below are displayed when an error occurs, preventing printing from ending normally, or when some trouble has occurred on the

machine. Appendix

A fault or an error has occurred. Copy Memory 100% Refer to the User Guide for information on the fault code at right. (XXX-YYY) Quantity 1 Basic Copying Added Image Quality Others Menu Features Output Color2 Sided Reduce/Enlarge Paper Supply Auto 1->1 Sided 100% Auto Full Color 1->2 Sided (H to H) Auto% 1 A4 Plain Black 2->2 Sided (H to H) 50% A3->A5 2 A3 Plain Dual Color-Red/Black 2->1 Sided (H to H) 70% A3->A4,B4->B5 3 8.5 11’’ Plain More... More... More... More...

E.1 Error Code Tables

When an error code is displayed on the display, remedy the error by referring to the corresponding remedy for the error code in the following tables.

When an error code is displayed, the remaining print data or other information stored in the machine’s memory is not assured.

Error Code Cause/Remedy 003-746 “Cause” A function (one of paper size, tray, output tray, or 2 sided printing) that is incompatible with the specified paper quality has been specified. “Remedy” Check the print data.

See “Chapter 3 Basic Printing” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). “Cause” An illegal print parameter combination was set. For example, a non- 003-747 standard size was specified, and Tray Selection was set to Auto. “Remedy” Check the print data. In the above case, select Tray 5 (Bypass Tray).

For details about printing, see “Chapter 3 Basic Printing” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). “Cause” The number of document sheets specified for the Book Duplex func- 003-750 tion exceeded the maximum stored pages. “Remedy” Limit the number of document sheets to within the maximum stored pages.

See "3. Maximum Stored Pages" (P. 153) at "5.5.3 Copy Control" in “Part 1 Hardware.”

443 E Error Codes Displayed on the Display

Error Code Cause/Remedy 003-761 “Cause” The paper size in the tray selected by Auto Tray Switch differs from the paper size in the tray selected at Tray Selection.

Appendix “Remedy” Either change the paper size for the tray, or change the paper type priority setting.

See “2.3 Changing Paper Settings” (P. 35), or “ Paper Tray Priority” (P. 129) at “5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)” in “Part 1 Hardware”. “Cause” The Reduce/Enlarge ratio exceeds the setting range when the 003-795 scanned document is enlarged/reduced to the specified paper size. “Remedy” Take one of the following actions: Directly enter the Reduce/Enlarge ratio. Change the paper size. “Cause” The size of the scanned document could not be detected. 005-274 “Remedy” Take one of the following actions: Confirm whether or not the size of the paper can be automatically detected. The document may not be loaded at the correct position. Confirm the document’s loading position.

For details see “2.2 Loading Documents” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scan- ner). “Cause” An error occurred on the DADF. 005-275 “Remedy” Turn the DADF off then back on again. Contact our Customer Support Center. “Cause” A communications error occurred between the document scanner and 006-277 document feed section on the machine. “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. “Cause” A communications error occurred between the main body and optional 007-250 trays (Trays 2 to 4) or between the main body and the High Capacity Trays (Trays 3 and 4). “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. Tray 1 can be used. “Cause” Tray 1 malfunctioned. 007-270 “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than Tray 1 can be used. “Cause” Tray 2 malfunctioned. 007-271 “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than Tray 2 can be used. “Cause” Tray 3 malfunctioned. 007-272 “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than Tray 3 can be used. “Cause” Tray 4 malfunctioned. 007-273 “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than Tray 4 can be used. “Cause” Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) malfunctioned. 007-274 “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) can be used.

444 E Error Codes Displayed on the Display

Error Code Cause/Remedy 007-276 “Cause” Tray 3 (High Capacity) malfunctioned. “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than Tray 3 (High

Capacity) can be used. Appendix 007-277 “Cause” Tray 4 (High Capacity) malfunctioned. “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than Tray 4 (High Capacity) can be used. 007-281 “Cause” Tray 1 malfunctioned. “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than Tray 1 can be used. 007-282 “Cause” Tray 2 malfunctioned. “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than Tray 2 can be used. 007-283 “Cause” Tray 3 malfunctioned. “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than Tray 3 can be used. 007-284 “Cause” Tray 4 malfunctioned. “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than Tray 4 can be used. 007-291 “Cause” Tray 3 (High Capacity) malfunctioned. “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than Tray 3 (High Capacity) can be used. 007-293 “Cause” Tray 4 (High Capacity) malfunctioned. “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than Tray 4 (High Capacity) can be used. 015-790 “Cause” The scanned document is a copy-prohibited document. “Remedy” See “ Illegal Copies” (P. xxviii) and confirm the types of documents that can be copied. 016-450 “Cause” The SMB host name has been set twice. “Remedy” Change the host name.

For details, see “2.1 Windows Network (SMB)” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/ Scanner). 016-452 “Cause” The IP address has been set twice. “Remedy” Change the IP address.

For details, see “1.3 Setting IP Address” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). “Cause” Failed to acquire the IP address from the DHCP server. 016-453 “Remedy” Set the IP address manually.

For details, see “1.3 Setting IP Address” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). 016-454 “Cause” Could not acquire the IP address from DNS. “Remedy” Confirm the DNS settings and IP address acquisition method setting.

For details, see “1.3 Setting IP Address” in “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner).

445 E Error Codes Displayed on the Display

Error Code Cause/Remedy 016-500 “Cause” Could not determine the name of the SMTP server when reply mail was transmitted.

Appendix “Remedy” Check from CWIS to see if the SMTP server is set correctly. 016-501 “Cause” Could not determine the name of the POP3 server when using POP3 protocol. “Remedy” Check from CWIS to see if the POP3 server is set correctly. 016-502 “Cause” Could not log in to the POP3 server when using POP3 protocol. “Remedy” Check from CWIS to see if the user name and password used for the POP3 server are set correctly. 016-503 “Cause” Could not determine the name of the SMTP server when mail was transmitted. “Remedy” Check from CWIS to see if the SMTP server is set correctly. Also, check that the DNS server is set correctly. 016-504 “Cause” Could not determine the name of the POP3 server when mail was transmitted. “Remedy” Check from CWIS to see if the POP3 server is set correctly. Also, check that the DNS server is set correctly. 016-505 “Cause” Could not log in to the POP3 server when transmitting mail. “Remedy” Check from CWIS to see if the user name and password used for the POP3 server are set correctly. 016-701 “Cause” PCL print data could not be processed as there was insufficient memory. “Remedy” Lower the resolution, or instruct printing again without setting two sided printing or N Up.

For details, see the On-line Help of the printer driver. “Cause” PCL print data could not be processed as there was insufficient space 016-702 in the print page buffer. “Remedy” Take one of the following actions: Set Print Mode to Speed Priority. Use Ensure Print. Increase the size of the print page buffer. Add on memory.

See the relevant descriptions under “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). For details about Print Mode, the On-line Help of the printer driver. For details about Ensure Printing, the On-line Help of the printer driver. About print page buffer and additional memory, the On-line Help of the printer driver. “Cause” A mail specified a non-registered or invalid mailbox No. was received. 016-703 “Remedy” Take one of the following actions. Register the mailbox with the specified No. Send a mail to a valid mailbox.

See the user Guide (Facsimile).

446 E Error Codes Displayed on the Display

Error Code Cause/Remedy 016-704 “Cause” The hard disk ran out of space as the mailboxes is full of stored documents.

“Remedy” Delete unwanted documents from the mailboxes. Appendix

For details, see “3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). 016-706 “Cause” The hard disk ran out of space as the maximum number of users for secure printing was exceeded. “Remedy” Delete unwanted documents stored in the machine’s memory or unwanted secure print registered users.

See “4.3 Secure Print” in “Part 1 Printer” or “3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). “Cause” Sample prints cannot be made as the Extension Box is malfunctioning. 016-707 “Remedy” Contact our Customer Support Center. “Cause” The TIFF file could not be spooled as the size of the file exceeded the 016-716 remaining amount of space on hard disk. “Remedy” Increase the size of the PCL form area. For details, see “3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). “Cause” An error occurred during print processing. Printing was instructed by 016-721 Auto Tray Switching when Paper Type Priority was set to “Auto Tray Switching Off” for all paper at Common Settings in the system settings. “Remedy” When printing by Auto Tray Switching, set one of the paper types to a setting other than “Auto Tray Switching Off” in Paper Type Priority.

See “ Paper Tray Priority” (P. 129) in “Part 1 Hardware”. “Cause” The print language could not be automatically selected when the print 016-726 mode specification is set to Auto. PostScript data was sent without the PostScript Software Kit installed. “Remedy” The PostScript Software Kit must be installed. “Cause” The TIFF file contains unsupported tags. 016-728 “Remedy” Check the print data.

For details, see “3.3 Configuring Scan Settings” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/ Scanner). “Cause” The TIFF file could not be printed as the number of colors and resolu- 016-729 tion of the TIFF file exceeded the upper limit of the effective range. “Remedy” Change the number of colors and resolution of the TIFF file, and instruct it to print again.

For details, see “3.3 Configuring Scan Settings” in “Part 2 Scanner” of the User Guide (Printer/ Scanner). 016-731 “Cause” Printing of the TIFF data was discontinued midway and all data could not be printed. “Remedy” Instruct printing again.

447 E Error Codes Displayed on the Display

Error Code Cause/Remedy 016-735 “Cause” An attempt was made to print a job template while it was being updated.

Appendix “Remedy” Wait a while before instructing it to print again. 016-737 “Cause” An error occurred during reading of data from the job template pool server. “Remedy” Check the access rights of the directory to which the job template is stored. 016-739 “Cause” Could not find the specified job template pool server. “Remedy” Check the path name to the job template pool server. 016-740 “Cause” Could not log into the job template pool server. “Remedy” Check the login user name, password and other information. 016-741 “Cause” Could not connect to the job template pool server. “Remedy” Ask the network administrator to check the network environment or server environment. 016-742 “Cause” The job template could not be stored to memory due to insufficient hard disk space. “Remedy” Delete unwanted data from the hard disk to increase hard disk space. 016-743 “Cause” The settings on the job template pool server are incorrect. “Remedy” Check the settings of the job template pool server. 016-744 “Cause” There is a problem in the domain name of the job template pool server. “Remedy” Make sure that the DNS server connection and the domain name are registered to the DNS server. 016-745 “Cause” The address of the DNS server is not registered on this machine. “Remedy” Either register the address of the DNS server on this machine, or set the address of the job template pool server by an IP address. 016-748 “Cause” Printing is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space. “Remedy” Reduce the number of pages of print data, for example, by dividing up the print data or printing one copy at a time when making multiple copies. 016-749 “Cause” A PJL command syntax error occurred. “Remedy” Either confirm the print settings, or correct the PJL command. 016-757 “Cause” The entered password is wrong. “Remedy” Enter the correct password. 016-758 “Cause” The account is not registered as an authorized copy user. “Remedy” Contact the System Administrator. 016-759 “Cause” The maximum number of copies has been reached. “Remedy” Contact the System Administrator. 016-760 “Cause” An error occurred during PostScript processing. “Remedy” Take one of the following actions: Set Print Mode to Speed Priority. Increase the size of the print page buffer. Increase PostScript memory.

See the relevant descriptions under “Part 1 Printer” of the User Guide (Printer/Scanner). For details about Print Mode, the On-line Help of the printer driver. About print page buffer and PostScript memory, the On-line Help of the printer driver.

448 E Error Codes Displayed on the Display

Error Code Cause/Remedy 016-761 “Cause” An error occurred during image processing. “Remedy” Set the Print Mode to Speed Priority and instruct printing again. If this

does not remedy printing, print in the Ensure Print mode. Appendix 016-762 “Cause” A print language not supported on the machine was specified. “Remedy” Specify the print language at Print Mode Specification under Port Set- tings. 016-763 “Cause” A Scanning of the gradation compensation chart ended in error. “Remedy” Place the tone compensation chart correctly on the document glass. 016-764 “Cause” Could not connect to the SMTP server. “Remedy” Contact the SMTP server administrator. 016-765 “Cause” Could not send mail as the hard disk on the SMTP server was full. “Remedy” Contact the SMTP server administrator. 016-766 “Cause” An error occurred on the SMTP server. “Remedy” Contact the SMTP server administrator. 016-767 “Cause” Could not send mail as the mail address was wrong. “Remedy” Confirm the mail address, and try sending the mail again. 016-768 “Cause” Could not connect to the SMTP server as the mail address of this machine was incorrect. “Remedy” Check the mail address of this machine. 016-769 “Cause” The SMTP server does not support confirmation of mail distribution (DSN). “Remedy” Send mail without setting confirmation of mail distribution (DSN). 016-770 “Cause” The job template could not be processed due to insufficient hard disk space. “Remedy” Delete unwanted data from the hard disk to increase hard disk space. 016-771 “Cause” Could not acquire the scan data repository address for the job template used for the scan. 016-772 “Remedy” Correctly set the DNS address. Or, set the address of the scan data repository by an IP address. 016-773 “Cause” The machine’s IP address is not set correctly. “Remedy” Check the DHCP environment. Or, set a fixed IP address to the machine. 016-774 “Cause” Compression conversion could not be processed due to insufficient hard disk space. “Remedy” Delete unwanted data from the hard disk to increase hard disk space. 016-775 “Cause” Image conversion could not be processed due to insufficient hard disk space. “Remedy” Delete unwanted data from the hard disk to increase hard disk space. 016-776 “Cause” An error occurred during image conversion processing. “Remedy” Image conversion processing is sometimes completed for part of the data. Check the data in CentreWare Internet Services. 016-777 “Cause” An error occurred on the hard disk during image processing. “Remedy” A probable cause is a hard disk malfunction. For details about replacing hard disks, contact our Customer Support Center. 016-778 “Cause” Conversion of the scan image was discontinued due to insufficient hard disk space. “Remedy” Delete unwanted data from the hard disk to increase hard disk space.

449 E Error Codes Displayed on the Display

Error Code Cause/Remedy 016-779 “Cause” An error occurred during conversion processing of the scan image. “Remedy” Instruct scanning again. Appendix 016-780 “Cause” An error occurred on the hard disk during conversion processing of the scan image. “Remedy” A probable cause is a hard disk malfunction. For details about replacing hard disks, contact our Customer Support Center. 016-781 “Cause” Could not connect to the FTP server for the job template used for the scan. “Remedy” Ask the network administrator to check the network environment or server environment. 016-782 “Cause” Could not log in to the FTP server for the job template used for the scan. “Remedy” Check the login user name, password and other information. 016-783 “Cause” Could not find the specified server path during file forwarding for the job template used for the scan. “Remedy” Check the path name of the server currently set to the job template.

Help for CentreWare Internet Services or the CentreWare Scanning Services Installation Guide. 016-784 “Cause” A write to FTP server error occurred for the job template used for the scan. “Remedy” Confirm that there is sufficient space in the directory on the server, and that access rights are present. 016-785 “Cause” The file could not be sent due to insufficient space on the server’s hard disk for the job template used for the scan. “Remedy” Delete unwanted data from the server’s hard disk to increase hard disk space. 016-787 “Cause” The server IP address set to the job template is illegal. “Remedy” Specify the correct job template. 016-788 “Cause” Failed to retrieve the file from the Web browser. “Remedy” Take one of the following actions, and then try retrieving again. Refresh the browser page. Restart the browser. Turn the machine off then back on again. 016-793 “Cause” The hard disk has run out free space. “Remedy” Either delete unwanted data from the hard disk to increase free disk space, or initialize the hard disk. 020-530 “Cause” No correct operations were performed in a certain period of time. “Remedy” Perform an operation within a certain period of time. 021-751 “Cause” You could not contact our Customer Support Center due to a communications line error when asking for inspection or repair. “Remedy” Make sure that the telephone line is connected, wait a while, and then ask for inspection or repair again. If an error code is displayed, contact our Customer Support Center. 116-701 “Cause” 2 sided printing was not possible due to insufficient memory. “Remedy” Add on memory.

450 E Error Codes Displayed on the Display

Error Code Cause/Remedy 116-702 “Cause” Printing was performed using a substitute font. “Remedy” Check the print data. 116-703 “Cause” An error occurred during PostScript (option) processing. Appendix “Remedy” Either confirm the print data, or click [Spool Settings] on the [Details] tab in the printer driver to set bi-directional communications off. 116-710 “Cause” A probable cause is that the correct document size could not be judged as the receive data exceeded the HP-GL/2 (option) spool size. “Remedy” Increase the size assigned to HP-GL/2 auto-layout memory. 116-714 “Cause” An HP-GL/2 (option) command error occurred. “Remedy” Check the print data. 116-740 “Cause” A numerical value operation error occurred as a value exceeding the value limit of the printer was used in the print data. “Remedy” Check the print data. 116-747 “Cause” There are too many paper margin values for the HP-GL/2 (option) effective coordinate area. “Remedy” Reduce the paper margin values, and instruct printing again. 116-748 “Cause” There is no plot data in the HP-GL/2 (option) print data. “Remedy” Check the print data. 116-780 “Cause” There is a problem with the document attached to the received mail. “Remedy” Check the attached document.

451 E Error Codes Displayed on the Display

E.2 About Other Errors

Appendix This section describes the actions to take when the following messages are displayed.

Error Message Cause/Remedy A malfunction “Cause” An error occurred. occurred. Switch “Remedy” Turn the machine off, wait for the display on the control panel to go the machine Off out, and then turn the machine back on again. then back On If the same message is displayed, note down the message displayed at (***-***). again. (***-***) Next, turn the machine off, wait for the display on the control panel to go out, and then contact our Customer Support Center. Abnormal end (***- “Cause” An error occurred causing operation to end abnormally. ***) “Remedy” Instruct the same operation again.

452 Index

Numerics C

1 color ...... 298 Card authentication...... 189 2 colors ...... 296 Cautions and limitations...... 433 10Base-T/100Base-TX connector...... 5 Center erase ...... 340 Center output tray ...... 4 A Center tray exit cover ...... 7 Changing paper settings...... 35 About documents...... 266 Changing the paper size...... 33 About orientation when loading documents .. 273 Changing the print priority ...... 246 About the rotate 90° feature...... 272 Checking trays...... 40 About types of paper loaded in trays 1 to 4..... 29 Circuit breaker ...... 18 Adjusting color balance...... 378 Cleaning external covers ...... 62 Adjusting copy density and contrast ...... 371 Cleaning internal components (raster output Adjusting the sharpness and saturation of scanners) ...... 63 images...... 373 Cleaning the copier...... 62 Adjusting tone...... 375 Cleaning the DADF...... 66 Administrator confirmation of total number of Cleaning the document glass...... 66 copies...... 208 Clear all...... 5, 8, 18 Advanced features screen...... 293 Clear button...... 9 Audio settings...... 125 Collated...... 324 Auditron administration ...... 110 Color balance...... 378 Authentication...... 189 Color mode...... 295 Auto tray switch...... 281 Color saturation ...... 373 Automatic tone compensation settings ...... 133 Color shift ...... 375 Automatic tray selection...... 29 Common settings ...... 122 Automatically detectable document sizes...... 267 Confirmation indicator ...... 6 Available document sizes...... 266 Confirming completed jobs...... 247 Confirming currently executing jobs...... 245 B Confirming error information...... 85 Confirming machine status...... 42 Basic copy features ...... 276 Confirming the number of copies for each Basic copying presets ...... 139 Index account...... 203 Basic features screen...... 293 Confirming the status of consumables ...... 46 Book duplex ...... 391 Confirming the total number of copies by meter Booklet creation ...... 385 reports ...... 213 Bottom left cover ...... 5 Confirming the total number of copies on the Bound originals ...... 351 meter...... 210 Brightness adjustment dial ...... 8 Confirming the total number of printed pages by Buttons in screens ...... 294 meter reports...... 213

453 Confirming the total number of printed pages on Error status display screen ...... 14 the meter ...... 210 Evenly...... 395 Consecutively...... 395 Exiting the system administration mode ...... 112 Contrast ...... 371 Extended Features Setting List ...... 224 Control panel...... 4, 8 Copy meter reports ...... 214 F Copy operation control (copy settings) ...... 153 Feature buttons...... 13 Copy settings ...... 139 Feature settings list ...... 219 Copying multiple documents onto one sheet 354 Finisher interface top cover...... 7 Copying on heavyweight paper...... 285 Finisher top cover buttons...... 7 Copying with stored jobs ...... 407 Forcibly outputting data wait documents ...... 262 Covers...... 382 Front cover...... 4, 7 Creating a booklet ...... 385 Fuser unit ...... 6 D H Default screen settings...... 126 Handle ...... 6 Deleting prints at a specified time...... 256 Hardware configuration ...... 42 Deleting sample prints ...... 252 How to enter text...... 110 Deleting saved documents ...... 259 How to switch the screen display...... 292 Deleting stored jobs ...... 405 HP-GL/2 Logical Printers/Stored Job List...... 238 Deleting/resetting total data...... 205 HP-GL/2 Palette List ...... 239 Document cover ...... 4 HP-GL/2 Settings List ...... 237 Document feed tray...... 6 Document glass...... 4 I Document guide ...... 6 Document jams...... 100 Image quality presets...... 380 Document output tray ...... 6 Image quality screen...... 293 Document weight...... 266 Image quality settings ...... 133 Drum cartridges ...... 6, 45 Image quality type ...... 365 Duplex automatic document feeder...... 6 Image rotation ...... 362 Duplex unit cover...... 5 Important notes about documents ...... 268 Initial checks...... 73 Index E Inkjet originals ...... 366 Inserting blank sheets between copied Effective scanning area ...... 266 transparencies ...... 357 Entering the system administration mode ..... 111 Installing and moving the main body ...... 433 Erasing edges and margin shadows in the Interrupt button...... 8 document ...... 340 Interrupt copy ...... 290 Error codes...... 443 Error History Report ...... 226

454 Making copies onto separate sheets ...... 351 J Making copies shifted by a desired amount . 335 Making copies shifted to the center ...... 334 Job confirmation feature ...... 244 Making copies with the background color of the Job History Report...... 227 document erased...... 369 Job in memory indicator...... 8 Making copies with the image rotated vertically or Job status button...... 10 horizontally...... 362 Job Template List ...... 225 Making enlarged copies spread over multiple sheets ...... 398 L Making enlarged/reduced copies ...... 306 Making multiple copies on one sheet...... 395 L/R erase...... 340 Making one sided copies ...... 299 Left center cover ...... 5 Making one sided/two sided copies ...... 299 Left cover ...... 6 Making reversed copies ...... 400 Lighter/darker ...... 371 Making reversed copies of images...... 400 Lighter/darker/contrast...... 371 Making two sided copies...... 301 Loading capacity ...... 266 Making two sided copies from a bound Loading documents ...... 270 document ...... 391 Loading paper ...... 28 Making two sided copies from two sided Loading paper in tray 5 (bypass tray)...... 30 documents ...... 304 Locking casters ...... 4 Map...... 366 Low power mode...... 19 Margin shift...... 333 M Message area...... 12 Meter Report...... 232 Machine status button...... 10 Migration to sleep mode...... 138 Mailbox List...... 234 Mirror image...... 400 Main components ...... 4 Mirror image/negative image...... 400 Make two sided copies from one sided Mixed size originals ...... 346 documents...... 302 Moving the position of images in the copy.... 333 Making copies at independent copy ratios for the Moving the position of the paper guide ...... 32 X and Y directions ...... 311 Making copies at specified dimensions in the X N and Y directions...... 313 Index N sets...... 357 Making copies at the same copy ratio for the X Negative image...... 400 and Y directions...... 306 Network settings...... 157 Making copies by selecting a variable ratio... 309 No separators ...... 357 Making copies from a bound document onto No. of repeats ...... 395 separate sheets ...... 351 Number of copies...... 12 Making copies on a selected paper size ...... 319 Numeric keypad ...... 9 Making copies on non-standard size paper... 288 Making copies on transparencies...... 282

455 Print Meter Report ...... 231 O Print meter report...... 213 Print priority settings...... 132 Offset settings...... 138 Printer settings ...... 166 Online indicator...... 8 Printing error history reports ...... 85 Optional accessories ...... 432 Printing meter reports ...... 215 Original type ...... 365 Printing reports/lists...... 219, 241 Originals orientation...... 417 Product specifications...... 424 Other color originals...... 366 Protocol settings (network settings)...... 164 Other settings (Common Settings) ...... 138 Others screen ...... 294 R Output...... 4, 327 Outputting a Cover for copies...... 382 Ratio selection...... 306 Outputting prints at a specified time...... 256 Registered colors...... 156 Outputting sample prints ...... 252 Registering account data...... 198 Outputting to the finisher tray ...... 328 Registering/changing mailboxes ...... 109, 184 Outputting/deleting security prints ...... 248 Regular operation ...... 112 Remaining copy memory...... 12 P Replacing consumables ...... 45 Replacing the staple cartridge...... 58 Paper jams ...... 86 Replacing the toner collection bottle ...... 51 Paper size...... 40 Replacing toner cartridges ...... 48, 55 Paper stopper ...... 4 Report settings...... 137 Paper supply ...... 317 Paper type ...... 40 S Parallel interface connector ...... 5 Password authentication...... 189 Scanner settings ...... 171 Password/System Settings button...... 9 Scroll buttons...... 13 Password entry screen...... 15 Select button ...... 12 PCL Fonts List ...... 233 Selecting the color to copy...... 295 PCL settings list...... 240 Selecting the desired image quality...... 380 Photo ...... 365 Selecting the original type ...... 365 Poor print quality...... 81 Selecting the paper to use for copying...... 317

Index Port settings (network settings)...... 158 Separators ...... 357 Possible combinations of features...... 24, 434 Serial no...... 42 Poster ...... 398 Setting and changing system administrator’s PostScript Software Kit...... 432 passwords ...... 117 Power saver (on/off) button ...... 8 Setting color mode restrictions ...... 202 Power saver feature...... 19 Setting copy restrictions ...... 201 Power saver screen ...... 14 Setting document size buttons Power switch ...... 4 (copy settings) ...... 154

456 Setting preset ratio buttons (copy settings) ... 155 Setting preset ratios (scanner settings)...... 180 T Setting system settings in the system T/B erase...... 340 administration mode ...... 113 Tab ...... 12 Setting the maximum number of copies...... 203 Text...... 365 Setting the output sizes (scanner settings).... 179 Text and photo...... 365 Setting the scanning size (scanner setting)... 178 This feature is for initializing the hard disk.... 138 Setting the system clock/timers...... 123 TIFF logical printers list ...... 236 Setting the totals management feature ...... 196 TIFF Settings List...... 235 Setting user registered colors Toner cartridges ...... 6, 45 (copy settings) ...... 156 Toner collection bottle ...... 45 Setting/changing administrator passwords.... 110 Toner collection bottle cover ...... 6 Sharpness...... 373 Top left cover ...... 5 Sharpness/color saturation ...... 373 Totals management feature ...... 188 Simultaneously scanning different size Touch panel display...... 8, 10 documents...... 346 Transparency separators...... 357 Sleep mode...... 19 Tray status...... 40 Software version ...... 42 Trays ...... 4 Sorting copies before output ...... 324 Troubleshooting...... 72 Specifications ...... 424 Specifying the document scanning size before U making copies...... 343 Specifying the originals orientation ...... 417 Uncollated ...... 324 Stand...... 7 Standard scaling ratios ...... 307 W Staple cartridge ...... 7, 45 Stapler faults...... 103 Windows network (SMB)...... 108, 188 Stapler tray...... 7 Stapling copies...... 330 Z Start button ...... 9 Zoom ...... 309 Stop button...... 8 Stopper ...... 6 Stored jobs...... 403 Index Storing frequently used setups ...... 403 Storing to stored jobs ...... 403 Switching off the power...... 17 Switching on the power...... 16 System Administration Mode ...... 108 System settings...... 109, 112, 122

457 Customer Response Sheet

DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series User Guide (Copier) (DE3042E2-1) To improve our publications, we would appreciate your feedback regarding this guide. Please take a few moments to complete and return this form to us.

About Yourself 1. How often do you use this guide? [ ] Daily [ ] Weekly [ ] Monthly [ ] Infrequently 2. When do you usually refer to the guide? [ ] Doing a usual operation [ ] Using unfamiliar features [ ] Solving a problem 3. Which part of the guide do you read frequently? Chapter/Section/Page: 4. Where do you keep this guide? 5. (Optional) Your Name: Occupation: Company or organization: Address:

About the Guide Strongly Neutral Strongly agree disagree 1. It is handy. 12345 2. It is easy to read. 12345 3. Titles of chapters and sections make sense.12345 4. Information is logically placed. 12345 5. Referencing is easy. 12345 6. Content is easy to understand. 12345 7. The step-by-step instructions are easy to follow.12345 8. All necessary information is included.12345 9. Illustrations aid in the understanding of content. 12345 10. The use of color is effective. 12345 Other comments:

After completing this form, detach and send it to the address below. (Please use your own envelope and postage stamp.) Thank you for your cooperation. ✂ Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. KSP R&D 2D7 3-2-1, Sakado, Takatsu-ku Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa-ken JAPAN 213-0012. DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series User Guide (Copier)